00482828-Hardware Description (V100R007 08)

OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System
V100R007
Hardware Description
Issue 08
Date 2011-10-30
Part Number 00482828
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission
System
Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2 Configuration of the Cabinet...........................................................................................................................1-4
1.3 Specifications..................................................................................................................................................1-5
2 Power Box....................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Functions.........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Panel Description............................................................................................................................................2-3
2.3 DIP Switches...................................................................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Interface Description.......................................................................................................................................2-7
2.5 Specifications................................................................................................................................................2-12
3 Enhanced Subrack......................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Slot Description...............................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Fan Tray Assembly.........................................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces..................................................................................................3-5
3.4.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area..............................................................................................................3-5
3.4.2 Pin Assignment of Interfaces.................................................................................................................3-7
3.5 Specifications................................................................................................................................................3-11
3.6 Labels on the Subrack...................................................................................................................................3-12
4 Independent OLA Subrack......................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Slot Description...............................................................................................................................................4-3
4.3 Fan Tray Assembly.........................................................................................................................................4-3
4.4 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces..................................................................................................4-4
4.4.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area..............................................................................................................4-4
4.4.2 Pin Assignment of Interfaces.................................................................................................................4-7
4.5 Specifications................................................................................................................................................4-14
4.6 Labels on the Subrack...................................................................................................................................4-14
5 DCM..............................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 DCM................................................................................................................................................................5-2
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

System
Contents Hardware Description
5.1.1 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Functions................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.3 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................5-2
5.1.4 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 DCM Frame.....................................................................................................................................................5-6
6 HUB...............................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 HUB................................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 HUB Frame.....................................................................................................................................................6-2
7 Overview of Boards................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions..................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Laser Safety Label..................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Bar Code for Boards........................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Characteristic Code................................................................................................................................7-5
7.3 Board Category...............................................................................................................................................7-5
8 Optical Transponder Board......................................................................................................8-1

8.1 ELOG..............................................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................8-4
8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-6
8.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................8-9
8.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-11
8.1.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-11
8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................8-12
8.1.9 ELOG Board Specifications.................................................................................................................8-12
8.2 ELOGS..........................................................................................................................................................8-17
8.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................8-17
8.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-18
8.2.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................8-18
8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-20
8.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-24
8.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-26
8.2.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-26
8.2.9 ELOGS Board Specifications...............................................................................................................8-27
8.3 ETMX............................................................................................................................................................8-31
8.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-32
ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System

8.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-37
8.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-39
8.3.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-39
8.3.9 ETMX Board Specifications................................................................................................................8-40
8.4 ETMXS.........................................................................................................................................................8-45
8.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-46
8.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-50
8.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-52
8.4.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-52
8.4.9 ETMXS Board Specifications..............................................................................................................8-53
8.5 FDG...............................................................................................................................................................8-57
8.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-58
8.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-62
8.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-63
8.5.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-63
8.5.9 FDG Board Specifications...................................................................................................................8-64
8.6 LBE...............................................................................................................................................................8-67
8.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-68
8.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-72
8.6.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-74
8.6.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-74
8.6.9 LBE Board Specifications....................................................................................................................8-75
8.7 LBES.............................................................................................................................................................8-78
8.7.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-79
8.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-83
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

System
8.7.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-85

8.7.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-85
8.7.9 LBES Board Specifications..................................................................................................................8-86
8.8 LBF................................................................................................................................................................8-89
8.8.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-90
8.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-95
8.8.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-97
8.8.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................8-97
8.8.9 LBF Board Specifications....................................................................................................................8-98
8.9 LBFS...........................................................................................................................................................8-103
8.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-103
8.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................8-104
8.9.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................8-105
8.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-106
8.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-109
8.9.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-111
8.9.7 Bar Code.............................................................................................................................................8-111
8.9.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................8-111
8.9.9 LBFS Board Specifications................................................................................................................8-112
8.10 LOG...........................................................................................................................................................8-118
8.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................8-118
8.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-119
8.10.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................8-119
8.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................8-121
8.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-124
8.10.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-126
8.10.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-126
8.10.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................8-126
8.10.9 LOG Board Specifications...............................................................................................................8-127
8.11 LOGS........................................................................................................................................................8-131
8.11.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-131
8.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-136
8.11.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-138
8.11.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-138
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System

8.11.9 LOGS Board Specifications.............................................................................................................8-139
8.12 LQM..........................................................................................................................................................8-143
8.12.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-144
8.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-149
8.12.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-151
8.12.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-151
8.12.9 LQM Board Specifications...............................................................................................................8-152
8.13 LU40..........................................................................................................................................................8-158
8.13.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-159
8.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-163
8.13.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-165
8.13.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-165
8.13.9 LU40 Board Specifications..............................................................................................................8-166
8.14 LU40S.......................................................................................................................................................8-168
8.14.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-169
8.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-173
8.14.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-174
8.14.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-174
8.14.9 LU40S Board Specifications............................................................................................................8-175
8.15 LUR40.......................................................................................................................................................8-177
8.15.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-178
8.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-181
8.15.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-183
8.15.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-183
8.15.9 LUR40 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................8-184
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

System
8.16 LUR40S.....................................................................................................................................................8-185
8.16.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-186
8.16.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-189
8.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-191
8.16.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-191
8.16.9 LUR40S Board Specifications.........................................................................................................8-192
8.17 LWC1........................................................................................................................................................8-193
8.17.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-194
8.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-198
8.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-200
8.17.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-200
8.17.9 LWC1 Board Specifications.............................................................................................................8-201
8.18 LWF..........................................................................................................................................................8-205
8.18.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-206
8.18.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-211
8.18.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-213
8.18.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-213
8.18.9 LWF Board Specifications...............................................................................................................8-214
8.19 LWFS........................................................................................................................................................8-217
8.19.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-218
8.19.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-223
8.19.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-225
8.19.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-225
8.19.9 LWFS Board Specifications.............................................................................................................8-226
8.20 LWX..........................................................................................................................................................8-229
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
8.20.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-230
8.20.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-234
8.20.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-235
8.20.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-235
8.20.9 LWX Board Specifications..............................................................................................................8-236
8.21 TMR..........................................................................................................................................................8-239
8.21.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-240
8.21.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-244
8.21.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-246
8.21.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-246
8.21.9 TMR Board Specifications...............................................................................................................8-247
8.22 TMRS........................................................................................................................................................8-249
8.22.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-250
8.22.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-253
8.22.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-255
8.22.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-255
8.22.9 TMRS Board Specifications.............................................................................................................8-256
8.23 TMX..........................................................................................................................................................8-258
8.23.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-259
8.23.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-264
8.23.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-265
8.23.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-265
8.23.9 TMX Board Specifications...............................................................................................................8-266
8.24 TMXS........................................................................................................................................................8-270
8.24.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-270
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

System

8.24.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-275
8.24.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-276
8.24.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-276
8.24.9 TMXS Board Specifications............................................................................................................8-277
8.25 TMX40......................................................................................................................................................8-280
8.25.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-280
8.25.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-285
8.25.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-287
8.25.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-287
8.25.9 TMX40 Board Specifications...........................................................................................................8-288
8.26 TMX40S....................................................................................................................................................8-292
8.26.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-293
8.26.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-298
8.26.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-300
8.26.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-300
8.26.9 TMX40S Board Specifications........................................................................................................8-301
8.27 TRC1.........................................................................................................................................................8-305
8.27.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-306
8.27.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-309
8.27.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-311
8.27.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................8-311
8.27.9 TRC1 Board Specifications..............................................................................................................8-312
9 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board....................................................................9-1

9.1 D40..................................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................9-3
9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................9-3
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
9.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 9-5

9.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-11
9.1.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................9-11
9.1.9 D40 Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................9-12
9.2 FIU................................................................................................................................................................9-13
9.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-14
9.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-17
9.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-20
9.2.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................9-20
9.2.9 FIU Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................9-20
9.3 ITL.................................................................................................................................................................9-22
9.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-23
9.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-27
9.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-29
9.3.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................9-29
9.3.9 ITL Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................9-30
9.4 M40...............................................................................................................................................................9-32
9.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-32
9.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-35
9.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-41
9.4.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................9-41
9.4.9 M40 Board Specifications....................................................................................................................9-42
9.5 V40................................................................................................................................................................9-43
9.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-44
9.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-47
9.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-53
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

System
9.5.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................9-53

9.5.9 V40 Board Specifications.....................................................................................................................9-54
10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board......................................................................10-1

10.1 MR2.............................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................10-5
10.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................10-6
10.1.7 Bar Code.............................................................................................................................................10-6
10.1.9 MR2 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................10-7
10.2 MR8.............................................................................................................................................................10-8
10.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-11
10.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-12
10.2.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................10-12
10.2.9 MR8 Board Specifications...............................................................................................................10-13
10.3 RMU9........................................................................................................................................................10-15
10.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-16
10.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-19
10.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-21
10.3.8 RMU9 Board Specifications............................................................................................................10-22
10.4 WSD9........................................................................................................................................................10-23
10.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-24
10.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-28
10.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-30
10.4.8 WSD9 Board Specifications.............................................................................................................10-31
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
10.5 WSM9.......................................................................................................................................................10-32
10.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-33
10.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-37
10.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-39
10.5.8 WSM9 Board Specifications............................................................................................................10-40
10.6 WSMD4....................................................................................................................................................10-41
10.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-42
10.6.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-47
10.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-49
10.6.8 WSMD4 Board Specifications.........................................................................................................10-50
10.7 WSMD2....................................................................................................................................................10-52
10.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-52
10.7.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-56
10.7.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-58
10.7.8 WSMD2 Board Specifications.........................................................................................................10-59
11 Optical Amplifier Board.......................................................................................................11-1

11.1 HBA............................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................11-5
11.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................11-7
11.1.7 Bar Code.............................................................................................................................................11-7
11.1.9 HBA Board Specifications.................................................................................................................11-8
11.2 OAU............................................................................................................................................................11-9
11.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-10
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

System

11.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-13
11.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-15
11.2.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................11-15
11.2.9 OAU Board Specifications...............................................................................................................11-16
11.3 OBU..........................................................................................................................................................11-21
11.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-22
11.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-25
11.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-27
11.3.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................11-27
11.3.9 OBU Board Specifications...............................................................................................................11-28
11.4 OPU...........................................................................................................................................................11-30
11.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-31
11.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-33
11.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-35
11.4.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................11-35
11.4.9 OPU Board Specifications...............................................................................................................11-36
11.5 RPC...........................................................................................................................................................11-37
11.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-38
11.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-42
11.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-44
11.5.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................11-44
11.5.9 RPC Board Specifications................................................................................................................11-45
12 System Control, Supervision and Communication Board.............................................12-1

12.1 SCC.............................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................12-2
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
12.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers.................................................................................................................12-5

12.1.6 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................12-5
12.1.7 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................12-7
12.1.9 SCC Board Specifications..................................................................................................................12-7
12.2 PMU............................................................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.1 Version Description ...........................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.3 Functions and Features ......................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................12-9
12.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-11
12.2.8 PMU Board Specifications...............................................................................................................12-11
13 Optical Supervisory Channel and Timing Transmission Board..................................13-1

13.1 SC1..............................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................13-6
13.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................13-8
13.1.8 SC1 Board Specifications...................................................................................................................13-8
13.2 SC2..............................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-10
13.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................13-14
13.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-16
13.2.8 SC2 Board Specifications.................................................................................................................13-16
14 Protection Board.....................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 DCP.............................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................14-6
14.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................14-8
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

System
14.1.8 DCP Board Specifications..................................................................................................................14-9

14.2 OLP...........................................................................................................................................................14-10
14.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-11
14.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-15
14.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-17
14.2.8 OLP Board Specifications................................................................................................................14-18
14.3 SCS............................................................................................................................................................14-20
14.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-20
14.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-23
14.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-25
14.3.8 SCS Board Specifications................................................................................................................14-26
15 Spectrum Analyzer Board.....................................................................................................15-1

15.1 MCA............................................................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................15-3
15.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................15-8
15.1.7 Bar Code.............................................................................................................................................15-8
15.1.9 MCA Board Specifications................................................................................................................ 15-9
15.2 WMU...........................................................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-10
15.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................15-13
15.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-15
15.2.8 WMU Board Specifications.............................................................................................................15-16
16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board................................................16-1

16.1 GFU.............................................................................................................................................................16-2
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
16.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................16-2
16.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................16-5
16.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................16-6
16.1.8 GFU Board Specifications.................................................................................................................16-7
17 Variable Optical Attenuator Board.....................................................................................17-1

17.1 VA4.............................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................17-5
17.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................17-6
17.1.7 Bar Code.............................................................................................................................................17-6
17.1.9 VA4 Board Specifications..................................................................................................................17-7
17.2 VOA............................................................................................................................................................17-8
17.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................17-8
17.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................17-11
17.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................17-12
17.2.7 Bar Code...........................................................................................................................................17-12
17.2.9 VOA Board Specifications...............................................................................................................17-13
18 Optical Fiber Automatic Monitoring Board......................................................................18-1

18.1 FMU............................................................................................................................................................18-2
18.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................18-2
18.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................18-4
18.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................18-6
18.1.8 FMU Board Specifications.................................................................................................................18-7
18.2 MWA...........................................................................................................................................................18-8
18.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................18-9
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

System

18.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................18-11
18.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................18-14
18.2.8 MWA Board Specifications.............................................................................................................18-14
18.3 MWF.........................................................................................................................................................18-15
18.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................18-16
18.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................18-19
18.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................18-20
18.3.8 MWF Board Specifications..............................................................................................................18-21
19 Cables.......................................................................................................................................19-1
19.1 Optical Fibers..............................................................................................................................................19-2
19.1.1 Classification......................................................................................................................................19-2
19.1.2 Connectors..........................................................................................................................................19-3
19.2 Power Cables and Grounding Cables for Subracks.................................................................................... 19-5
19.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables......................................................................................19-5
19.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables........................................................................................................19-8
19.2.3 Subrack Power Cables........................................................................................................................19-9
19.2.4 HUB Power Cable............................................................................................................................19-10
19.3 Alarm Cables for Subracks.......................................................................................................................19-13
19.3.1 SERIAL Interface Cable..................................................................................................................19-13
19.3.2 Alarm Interface Cables.....................................................................................................................19-16
19.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable.............................................................................................................19-19
19.3.4 Alarm Input Transfer Cable.............................................................................................................19-20
19.3.5 Alarm Output Transfer Cable...........................................................................................................19-22
19.4 Management Cables for Subrack..............................................................................................................19-23
19.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable....................................................................................................................19-24
19.4.2 RS-422 Serial Port Cable.................................................................................................................19-25
19.4.3 RS-232 Serial Port Cable.................................................................................................................19-26
19.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Cable...............................................................................................................19-27
19.4.5 Straight-through Network Cable......................................................................................................19-28
19.4.6 Crossover Network Cable................................................................................................................19-30
19.5 Subrack Power Cables for Independent OLA Subrack.............................................................................19-31
19.5.1 Independent OLA Subrack Power Cables........................................................................................19-31
19.5.2 Independent OLA Subrack Grounding Cable..................................................................................19-33
19.6 Alarm Cables for Independent OLA Subrack...........................................................................................19-33
19.6.1 Cabinet Indicator Alarm Cable........................................................................................................19-34
19.6.2 Inter-Subrack Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cable.......................................................................19-35
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
19.6.3 Alarm Interface Cable......................................................................................................................19-36

19.7 Management Cables for Independent OLA Subrack................................................................................19-40
A Indicators...................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators..........................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 Board Indicators............................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2.1 Alarm Indicator....................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2.2 Running Indicator.................................................................................................................................A-3
A.2.3 Communication Indicator.....................................................................................................................A-3
A.2.4 PMU Board Indicators..........................................................................................................................A-4
A.3 Fan Indicators................................................................................................................................................A-4
B Bar Codes of Each Board..........................................................................................................B-1

B.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................B-2
B.2 Characteristic Code of the Optical Transponder Board (OTU).....................................................................B-4
B.2.1 Characteristic Code of the Fixed-Wavelength OTU.............................................................................B-4
B.2.2 Characteristic Code of the Tunable-Wavelength OTU.........................................................................B-6
B.2.3 Characteristic Code of the Fixed-Wavelength Regenerating OTU......................................................B-7
B.2.4 Characteristic Code of the Tunable-Wavelength Regenerating OTU..................................................B-8
B.3 Characteristic Code of the Optical Multiplexing/Demultiplexing Board......................................................B-8
B.3.1 Characteristic Code of the D40.............................................................................................................B-8
B.3.2 Characteristic Code of the FIU.............................................................................................................B-9
B.3.3 Characteristic Code of the ITL...........................................................................................................B-10
B.3.4 Characteristic Code of the M40..........................................................................................................B-10
B.3.5 Characteristic Code of the V40...........................................................................................................B-11
B.4 Characteristic Code of the Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Board.............................................................B-12
B.4.1 Characteristic Code of the MR2.........................................................................................................B-12
B.4.2 Characteristic Code of the MR8.........................................................................................................B-13
B.5 Characteristic Code of the Optical Amplifier Board...................................................................................B-13
B.5.1 Characteristic Code of the OAU.........................................................................................................B-14
B.5.2 Characteristic Code of the HBA.........................................................................................................B-14
B.5.3 Characteristic Code of the OBU.........................................................................................................B-15
B.5.4 Characteristic Code of the OPU..........................................................................................................B-16
B.5.5 Characteristic Code of the RPC..........................................................................................................B-16
B.6 Characteristic Code of the Performance Detection Board...........................................................................B-17
B.6.1 Characteristic Code of the MCA.........................................................................................................B-17
B.7 Characteristic Code of the Adjustment Board.............................................................................................B-17
B.7.1 Characteristic Code of the VA4..........................................................................................................B-17
B.7.2 Characteristic Code of the VOA.........................................................................................................B-18
C Quick Reference Table of the Boards...................................................................................C-1

C.1 OTU Specification.........................................................................................................................................C-2
C.1.1 OTU Specification on the Client Side..................................................................................................C-2
C.1.2 OTU Specification on the WDM Side..................................................................................................C-5
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

System
C.2 Optical Amplifier Unit Specification.............................................................................................................C-7

C.3 Other Unit Specification................................................................................................................................C-9
C.4 Basic Function of OTU................................................................................................................................C-12
C.5 Loopback Function of OTU.........................................................................................................................C-16
C.6 Pluggable Optical Module of OTU..............................................................................................................C-18
D Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards............................................................D-1

E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1
F Acronyms and Abbreviations..................................................................................................F-1
xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX BWS 1600G V100R007
OptiX iManager T2000 V200R008C00
Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l Network Planning Engineer

l Hardware Installation Engineer
l Installation and Commissioning Engineer
l Field Maintenance Engineer
l Network Monitoring Engineer
l Data Configuration Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

System
About This Document Hardware Description
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version

V100R007
The update of contents is described as follows.
Added the E2LQM board.
Updated the DCM specifications.
Deleted the EOLP board.
Fixed some bugs in the earlier version.
2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System

V100R007

V100R007
l After the boards using CLASS 3B or CLASS 4 lasers are configured with the IPA function,
the laser hazard level is decreased to HAZARD LEVEL 1M. Thus, according to IEC
LASER
RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE
TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER
PRODUCT
60825-2, the laser hazard level label is changed from
LASER
RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN
EXPOSURE TO DIRECTOR
SCATTERED RADIATION
CAUTION
CLASS 4 LASER HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
PRODUCT LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
that indicates CLASS 3B or CLASS 4 to that
indicates HAZARD LEVEL 1M.
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY

WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
l The laser hazard level label is changed from that indicates CLASS
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
1M to that indicates HAZARD LEVEL 1M according to IEC 60825-2.

System
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
l The laser hazard level label that indicates CLASS 1 is deleted

according to IEC 60825-2.

V100R007

V100R007
Chapter Description
8 Optical Transponder The descriptions of the E3ELOG, E3ELOGS, E3LOG,

Board E3LOGS, E4LWC1, E4TRC1 are added.
The descriptions of the FCE, IMX4, IMX4S, LDG, LOM,
LOMS, LQM, LWM, LWMR, LWXR, LW40, LR40, TRC2
are deleted.
9 Optical Multiplexer and The descriptions of the D48, M48, V48 are deleted.
Demultiplexer Board
10 Optical Add and Drop The descriptions of the DWC, EDWC, WSM5, WSD5 are
Multiplexing Board deleted.
11 Optical Amplifier Board The descriptions of the E3RPC are added.

The descriptions of the E4OAU, E4OBU, E4OPU, RPA are
deleted.
13 Optical Supervisory The descriptions of the ST1, ST2 are deleted.

Channel and Timing
Transmission Board
14 Protection Board The descriptions of the CP40, SCS, OCP are deleted.
16 Variable Optical The descriptions of the VA2 are deleted.

Attenuator Board

System
Chapter Description
18 Optical Power and The descriptions of the DGE, DSE, GFU are deleted.
Dispersion Slope
Equalizing Board
C Quick Reference Table of The descriptions of the optical interface common parameters of
the Boards the boards are updated.

V100R007

V100R007
Fixed some bugs in the earlier version. The descriptions of the board with L-band are deleted.
Chapter Description
8 Optical Transponder Board The descriptions of the E8LBF, E8LBFS, E8LWF, E8LWFS,
E8ETMX, E8ETMXS, E8ELOG, E8ELOGS, E8TMR and
E8TMRS are added.
The descriptions of the E3ETMX and E3ETMXS are added.
12 System Control, The descriptions of the E4SCC are added.

Supervision and
Communication Board
14 Protection Board The descriptions of the PBU are deleted.
C Quick Reference Tables The descriptions of the optical interface common parameters
of the boards are updated.

V100R007

System
Chapter Description
1 Cabinet The Appearance of the cabinet is updated.
3 Enhanced Subrack The Appearance of enhanced subrack is updated.
8 Optical Transponder Board The descriptions of the TMX40, TMX40S, LU40S, LUR40
and LUR40S are added.
11 Optical Amplifier Board The versions of the HBA are updated.
14 Protection Board The descriptions of the CP40 and EOLP are added.
15 Spectrum Analyzer Board The descriptions of the WMU are updated.
D Power Consumption, The descriptions of TMX40, TMX40S, LU40S, LUR40,

Weight and Slots of Boards LUR40S, CP40 and EOLP are added.
The descriptions of the LBE, LBES, LBF, LBFS, LWF,
LWFS, TMR, TMRS, LU40, LU40S, TMX40, TMX40S,
MR8, and WSMD2 are updated.

V100R006
Chapter Description
8 Optical Transponder Board The specifications of the LBES, LBFS, LWFS and TMRS are
updated.
The descriptions of the LU40 are added.
The versions of the LBE, LBES, LBF, LBFS, LWF, LWFS,
TMR, and TMRS are updated.
The descriptions of the LRF, LRFS are deleted.
9 Optical Multiplexer and The versions of the D40, D48, FIU, ITL, M40, M48, V40, and
Demultiplexer Board V48 are updated.
10 Optical Add and Drop The descriptions of the MR8 and WSMD2 are added.
Multiplexing Board
11 Optical Amplifier Board The versions of the OAU, OBU, and OPU are updated.
14 Protection Board The versions of the SCS are updated.

System
Chapter Description
17 Optical Fiber Automatic The versions of the MWA and MWF are updated.
Monitoring Board
18 Optical Power and The versions of the DSE and GFU are updated.
Dispersion Slope Equalizing
Board
D Power Consumption, The descriptions of the LBE, LBES, LBF, LBFS, LWF,
Weight and Slots of Boards LWFS, TMR, TMRS, LU40, MR8, and WSMD2 are added.
The descriptions of the LRF, LRFS are deleted.

V100R006
Chapter Description
3 Standard Subrack The descriptions of the cascading mode about the network
ports in the subrack interface are added.
8 Optical Transponder Board The specifications of the OTU are updated.

The descriptions of the LOM and LOMS are added.
The versions of the LBF, LBFS, LOG and LOGS are updated.
10 Optical Add and Drop The specifications of the WSD5, WSM5, WSD9, and WSM9
Multiplexing Board are updated.
The versions of the WSD5, WSM5, WSD9, and WSM9 are
added.
The descriptions of slots valid for the WSMD4 in an
independent OLA subrack are added.
11 Optical Amplifier Board The descriptions of the E4OAUC00 are added.
16 Variable Optical The specifications of the VOA, and VA4 are updated.
Attenuator Board The descriptions of the VA2 are added.
The versions of the VOA, and VA4 are added.

System
Chapter Description
D Power Consumption, The descriptions of the LOM, LOMS, and VA2 are added.
Weight and Slots of Boards The descriptions of the WSD5, WSM5, WSD9, and WSM9
are updated.

V100R006
Chapter Description
4 Independent OLA Subrack The descriptions of the pin assignment of interfaces on the
OLA subrack are added.
7 Overview of Boards The descriptions of the LW40, LR40, IMX4, IMX4S, ELOG,
ELOGS, EDWC, and WSMD4 are added.
The versions of the LWF, LWFS, LBE, LBES, LBF, LBFS,
TMX, TMXS, ETMX, ETMXS, TMR, and TMRS are
updated.
8 Optical Transponder Board The specifications of the OTU are updated.

The descriptions of the LW40, LR40, IMX4, IMX4S, ELOG,
ELOGS, EDWC, and WSMD4 are added.
The versions of the LWF, LWFS, LBE, LBES, LBF, LBFS,
TMX, TMXS, ETMX, ETMXS, TMR, and TMRS are
updated.
The system and board-level CRZ specifications are deleted.
B Bar Codes of Each Board The descriptions of the BOM number, ex-factory number,
hardware version, name, model and characteristic code of the
boards are added.
of the boards are added.
D Power Consumption, The descriptions of the LW40, LR40, IMX4, IMX4S, ELOG,
Weight and Slots of Boards ELOGS, EDWC, and WSMD4 are added.

V100R005

System
Some bugs in former version are fixed.
Chapter Update description
3 Standard Subrack Descriptions of the ETHERNET2 used as a backup network

interface for inter-subrack communication are added.
7 Overview of Boards In quick reference table for OTUs:

l 10GE-WAN interfaces of the LWF(S) boards ared added.
l Specifications of LBE(S) and LBF(S) boards are updated.
Specification items of the optical amplifier units are adjusted.
Specifications of the HBA board are updated in the quick reference
table for other units.
9 Optical Transponder Regenerating OTUs of 10Gbit/s OTUs are updated.

Unit Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM
side of 2.5Gbit/s OTUs are updated.
Descriptions of the E2LWF(S) and E2LRF(S) boards are added.
Specifications of LBE(S) and LBF(S) boards are updated.
12 Optical Amplifier Specifications of the HBA board are updated.

Unit Descriptions of the LINE and SYS interfaces on the RPA front
panel are updated.
14 Optical Supervisory Functions and features of the ST1 and ST2 are updated.
Channel and Timing Descriptions of Ethernet interface on the front panel are added.
Transmission Unit
16 Spectrum Analyzer Descriptions of the WMU02 are deleted.

Unit Specifications of the WMU board are updated.
17 Variable Optical Descriptions of the VA2 board are deleted.

Attenuator Unit
20 Cables Figure and technical parameters of HUB power cable are added.
A Indicators Descriptions of a yellow running indicator on the PBU board are

added.

V100R005
The conceptual diagrams of the manual optimized, the manual structure adjusted, the unit
classification updated.

System
3 Standard Subrack The subrack is switched; the subrack structure diagram and label
diagram are updated.
7 Overview of Boards The functions and specifications of the boards whose hardware
versions are switched are adjusted.
The LBF(S) board is renamed.
9 Optical Transponder The hardware versions of the boards are switched.

Unit The E1FDG is switched to the E2FDG. The E3LDG and E4LDG
are switched to the E5LDG. The E1LBE(S) is switched to the
E2LBE(S). The E2LWF(S) is switched to the E3LWF(S) and
E4LWF(S). The E2LWC1 and E2TRC1 are switched to the
E3LWC1 and E3TRC1 respectively. The E4LWC and E4TRC are
switched to the E5LWC and E5TRC respectively. The E1TMX(S)
is switched to the E2TMX(S).
The descriptions of the E2TMR(S) and TRC2 boards are added.
The description of the LRF(S) board is deleted.
The specifications of OTU boards such as the LWF, LWFS, LBE,
LBES, LBF, LBFS, LWC, LWC1, TRC, TRC1 and LQM and the
V40, V48 and MR2 boards are updated.
10 Optical Multiplexer The descriptions of the M08, D08, E2M40 and E2D40 boards are
and Demultiplexer Unit deleted.
The specifications of the V40 and V48 boards are updated.
11 Optical Add and The RMU9 board is added.

Drop Multiplexing The specifications of the MR2 are updated.
Unit
12 Optical Amplifier The description of the E3OAUC00 is added.

Unit The specifications of the forward Raman board are updated.
14 Optical Supervisory The descriptions of the ST1 and ST2 boards are added.
Channel and Timing
Transmission Unit
16 Spectrum Analyzer The description of the WMU board is added.

Unit
17 Variable Optical The description of the VA2 board is added.

Attenuator Unit

V100R005

System
2 Power Box The descriptions of alarm suppression and the communications

between the PMU and the subrack(s) have been added. The version
and description of power box have been changed.
3 Subracks The RoHS label of subracks has been added.
5 40G Optical The optical specifications of 40G OTU have been added. The
Transponder Unit parameters of environment temperature and working voltage range
have been modified.
6 Overview of Boards The descriptions of the ETMX, ETMXS, LBF, LBFS, M48, D48,
M40, D40, V40, E2ITL, LQM and the quick reference to
specifications have been added.The list of loopback supported by
OTU has been added.
7 Optical Transponder The descriptions of the LBF, LBFS, ETMX, ETMXS, E2TMX, and
Unit E2TMXS have been added. The description of the 192-channel
specification has been added.
8 Optical Multiplexer, The descriptions of the multiplexing and demultiplexing boards,

Demultiplexer, Add/ WSS boards, and the E2ITL that are applied in the 192-channel
Drop Unit system have been added. The insertion loss parameters of the V40
and V48 have been modified.
9 Optical Amplifier The description of the E2RPC03 has been added.

Unit
10 Performance The E1DSE02 and E1DSE03 boards have been added.

Detection and
Adjustment Units
12 Protection Unit The E1OLP01/E1OLP02 has been deleted. The E2OLP03 has been
added. A new application of optical line protection has been added.
14 Cables The structure, pin assignment and technical parameters of the HUB
power cable have been changed.

V100R004
The updated contents are as follows:
Two new chapters are added: Chapter 14 Cables and Chapter 15 Optical Interface Attribute
Application Guide.
2 Power Box The PDU of the 40G OTU have been added.

System
3 Subracks The labels of subracks have been added.
7 Optical Transponder The front panels of the boards have been updated.
Unit
8 Optical Multiplexer, The front panels of the boards have been updated.
Demultiplexer, Add/
Drop Unit
9 Optical Amplifier The front panels of the boards have been updated.
Unit
10 Performance The front panels of the boards have been updated.

Detection and
Adjustment Units
11 Optical Fiber The front panels of the boards have been updated.
Automatic Monitoring
Unit
12 Protection Unit The front panels of the boards have been updated.
13 Optical Supervisory The front panels of the boards have been updated.
Units and System
Control Unit

V100R004
The former manual version is T1-042574-20060530-C-1.40
The updated contents are as follows:
One new chapter is added: Chapter 5 40G Optical Transponder Unit.
Chapter 1 Cabinet The B63 cabinet has been deleted.Related description has been
updated.
Chapter 3 Subrack The descriptions of the independent OLA subrack have been added.
The structure figure and descriptions of the standard subrack have
been updated.
Chapter 4 DCM Frame The dimensions of the DCM frame and HUB frame have been
and HUB Frame newly added.

System
Chapter 7 Optical The introductions to the FCE board have been added.The
Transponder Unit introductions to the following boards have been deleted: the TWC,
OCU, OCUS, LQS, AP8, and AS8.The specifications of the boards
have been updated.
Chapter 8 Optical The introductions to the E2M40, E2D40, V48, M08 and D08 board
Multiplexer, have been added.
Demultiplexer, Add/
Drop Unit
Chapter 9 Optical The introductions to the E4OAU, E4OBU and E4OPU board have
Amplifier Unit been added.The introductions to the following boards have been
deleted: the E2OAU and E2OBU of the C band, RPL and WBA.
Chapter 10 The available wavelength range of following boards has been

Performance Detection extended: MCA, DGE, ITL, DSE and FIU.
and Adjustment Units
Chapter 12 Protection The introductions to the DCP board have been added.
Units
Chapter 13 Optical The introduction to the SCE board has been deleted.The
Supervisory Units and introduction to the E2SCC board has been added.The introductions
System Control and to the following boards have been deleted: TC1 and TC2.
Communication Unit
Appendix A - The consumptions and weights the board have been updated.
Appendix D

V100R003
Some bugs in version 1.31 are fixed.
The specifications of the boards have been updated.
The description of the AP8, AS8, OCU, OCUS, LQS and RPL have been deleted.

V100R003
Some bugs in version 1.30 are fixed.

System

V100R003
The descriptions of the FDG, LOG, LOGS and DWC boards in this version are added.

V100R002
Add the related description of the AP8 board in this version.

System
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet
1 Cabinet
About This Chapter
The OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System (hereinafter called the
OptiX BWS 1600G for short) comprises: cabinet, subrack, power box, fan tray assembly
(including air filter), dispersion compensation module (DCM) frame, HUB frame.
In typical configuration, the OptiX BWS 1600G is installed in 300 mm (11.8 in.) ETSI rear-
column cabinet, see Figure 1-1. A cabinet can hold subracks with different board combinations
to form diverse types of the OptiX BWS 1600G.
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

System
1 Cabinet Hardware Description
Figure 1-1 Appearance of an OptiX BWS 1600G 300 mm (11.8 in.) ETSI rear-column cabinet
D W
1.1 Structure
An OptiX BWS 1600G system adopts an ETSI300-119-3 standard cabinet. Hence, the system
is rational in cabinet structure and graceful in appearance.
1.2 Configuration of the Cabinet
The rational cabinet structure makes the OptiX BWS 1600G highly integrated.
1.3 Specifications
This section introduces the technical specifications of the cabinet.
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
1.1 Structure
An OptiX BWS 1600G system adopts an ETSI300-119-3 standard cabinet. Hence, the system
is rational in cabinet structure and graceful in appearance.
The main frame of the cabinet is a rack with a door fixed at the front, a rear door with air vents
fixed at the back and movable side doors at both sides. The power box is mounted at the top.
The DCM frame and the HUB frame are installed at the bottom of the cabinet. The subracks are
installed in the middle of the cabinet.
For the exploded view of a cabinet of an OptiX BWS 1600G, see Figure 1-2.
The cabinet features the following:
l The cabinet has a front door. Besides, each subrack is equipped with a door that provides
a good shelter for the subrack.
l The cabinet leaves much space for routing and managing optical fibers and cables.
l Two movable side doors are installed at both sides of the cabinet. Each side door can move
in or move out along a slide rail on the top and the bottom of the cabinet.
l Air vents are provided at the front door of the subrack, the rear door and upper enclosure
frame of the cabinet to ensure heat dissipation.

System
1 Cabinet Hardware Description
Figure 1-2 Exploded view of an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet

8
6
H
D W 7
1. Rear panel 2. Subrack 3. Fiber-optic bracket 4. rear-column
5. DCM and HUB frame 6. Side door 7. Front door 8. Power box
1.2 Configuration of the Cabinet

The rational cabinet structure makes the OptiX BWS 1600G highly integrated.
For the full configuration of the 300 mm (11.8 in.) ETSI rear-column cabinets of various heights,
refer to Table 1-1. If the cabinet is not fully configured, the subracks are installed from bottom
to top.
Table 1-1 Full configuration of the 300 mm (11.8 in.) ETSI rear-column cabinets of various
heights
Height of the Quantity of Quantity of Quantity of Quantity of

Cabinet Power Boxes Subracks DCM Frames HUB Frames
2.0 m (6.6 ft.) 1 2 1 1

System
Height of the Quantity of Quantity of Quantity of Quantity of

Cabinet Power Boxes Subracks DCM Frames HUB Frames
2.2 m (7.2 ft.) 1 3 1 1
2.6 m (8.5 ft.) 1 3 2 1
1.3 Specifications
This section introduces the technical specifications of the cabinet.
Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of the cabinet.
Table 1-2 Technical specifications of the cabinet

Item 2-m High Cabinet 2.2-m High Cabinet 2.6-m High Cabinet
Dimensions 2000 mm x 600 mm x 2200 mm x 600 mm x 300 2600 mm x 600 mm x

(Height x 300 mm (78.8 in. x mm (86.6 in. x 23.6 in. x 300 mm (102.3 in. x
Width x 23.6 in. x 11.8 in.) 11.8 in.) 23.6 in. x 11.8 in.)
Depth)
Weight 56 kg (123 lb.) 60 kg (132 lb.) 67 kg (148 lb.)

(Includes the
empty cabinet
and power
box.)
Maximum 1300 W 2000 W 2000 W

power
consumption
Nominal -48 V DC/-60 V DC -48 V DC/-60 V DC -48 V DC/-60 V DC

working
voltage
Working -38.4 V to -57.6 V -38.4 V to -57.6 V DC/-48 -38.4 V to -57.6 V

voltage range DC/-48 V to -72 V DC V to -72 V DC DC/-48 V to -72 V DC

System
Hardware Description 2 Power Box
2 Power Box
About This Chapter
Describes the function and technical specifications of the power box; and introduces the switches
and interfaces on the front panel of the power box.
2.1 Functions
A power box is mainly used to access two independent -48 V DC inputs or two independent -60
V DC inputs.
2.2 Panel Description
This section introduces the front view of a power box and the functions of each item on the front
panel.
2.3 DIP Switches
This section introduces the appearance and functions of DIP switches.
2.4 Interface Description
The PMU in the power box fulfills alarm output, input and cascade functions. On the PMU, the
ALARM interface is used for input, output, and concatenation of external alarms, and the
SERIAL interface is used for serial communication between the PMU and the SCC of each
subrack.
2.5 Specifications
The technical specifications of the power box include dimensions, weight and input rated current.

System
2 Power Box Hardware Description
2.1 Functions
A power box is mainly used to access two independent -48 V DC inputs or two independent -60
V DC inputs.
It distributes reliable power supply to the units of the equipment.
For the function of each unit in a power box, refer to Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Functions of the units in a power box
Unit Abbreviation Function
Power distribution unit PDU l Provides power distribution.

l Protects the system from lightning.
Power monitoring unit PMU l Accesses 16 external alarms and output four
channels of alarms.
l Provides low-voltage protection.
l Controls cabinet indicators and SCC
communication.
Power monitoring PMC l Supplies working voltage to the PMU.

connection board l Provides two lines of testing voltages.
Power output switch - A magnetic circuit breaker, used to control the

matched power outputs. Refer to Table 2-3 for
details.
A PMU board is the main part of a power box. The board has the following functions:
l Monitoring voltage
– A PMU monitors the input voltage of two -48 V/-60 V power. The PMU also reports
the voltage value and voltage alarms. The alarms include over- and under-voltage
alarms. For the alarming threshold, you may take the default value in the system, or set
a value according to your requirement. In different applications, the voltage alarming
thresholds can be set as:
Over-voltage threshold: -60 V ± 1 V for nominal -48 V DC, or -71 V ± 1 V for nominal
-60 V DC.
Under-voltage threshold: -41 ± 1 V for nominal -48 V DC, or -51 V ± 1V for nominal
-60 V DC.
– The board monitors the input voltage of eight branch powers. When a branch power
fails (for example, the corresponding branch power is not accessed or the power is
switched off manually), the power status alarm of this branch power is reported. When
a power supply fails (for example, the second power supply is not accessed), the under-
or over-voltage alarm of this power supply is reported and the corresponding four branch
powers of this power supply report the power status alarm at the same time.

System
NOTE
In actual application, the related branch powers will report power status alarms in the following situation:
l a cabinet is not configured with three subracks
l the user does not adopt double power supplies owing to certain reasons
In order to facilitate the user's maintenance, the network management system provides the function to
shield the power status.Table 2-2 shows the relationship between each branch power and each power No.
displayed on the T2000.
If the current configuration is normal, the status of certain powers can be shielded. In later expansion, after
the powers resume their normal usage, the shielding should be cleared and the monitoring of power status
should be recovered.
l Monitoring temperature
A temperature sensor in the power box monitors the temperature. Note that the sensor
measures the ambient temperature inside the power box, not that of the subracks or boards.
l Monitoring alarms
One PMU can monitor 16 external alarm inputs and four equipment alarms. The PMU
outputs the alarms occurred and supervises the external environment.
Table 2-2 Relationship between the branch powers and the power numbers displayed on the
T2000
Power No. Branch Power
1 Subrack power supply 1 of the PDU1 (upper subrack)
2 Subrack power supply 2 of the PDU1 (middle subrack)
3 Subrack power supply 3 of the PDU1 (lower subrack)
4 Auxiliary power supply of the PDU1
5 Subrack power supply 1 of the PDU2 (upper subrack)
6 Subrack power supply 2 of the PDU2 (middle subrack)
7 Subrack power supply 3 of the PDU2 (lower subrack)
8 Auxiliary power supply of the PDU2
2.2 Panel Description

This section introduces the front view of a power box and the functions of each item on the front
panel.
For the front view of a power box, see Figure 2-1.

System
Figure 2-1 Front view of a power box
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 0A 2 0A 2 0A 2A 20 A 20 A 20A 2A
RTN(+) NEG(-) RTN(+) NEG(-)
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 AUX OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 AUX
ON ON ON ON ON ON
O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF ALAR M SER IAL

TES T RUN
PO W E R IN SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 P OW E R IN SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 M U TE AL M
A LM RUN A LM RUN
PMU
PDU AUX 4A/250V PDU AUX 4A/250V
14 13 12 11 10 9 8
For the functions of each item in Figure 2-1, refer to Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Description of the power panel
Marking Function Unit Function
1 Grounding mode It indicates the grounding mode: When the copper bar
indication hole is connected to the indication hole, the DC-I
grounding mode is adopted. When the copper bar is
not connected to the indication hole, the DC-C
grounding mode is adopted.
2 Protection It connects with the protection grounding (PGND)

grounding screw of cable.
the PDU
3 Power input NEG (-) connects with -48V/-60V power cable and
terminal RTN (+) connects with reflow grounding cable.
4 Power output OUT1/OUT2/OUT3 supply power to subrack and

terminal each channel is 20A. AUX supplies power for HUB,
which is 2A. Each channel of output terminal is
marked with "+" and "-", "+" connecting with the
reflow grounding cable and "-" connecting with the
-48V/-60V power cable.
5 ALARM interface It is for alarm input/output and cascade.
6 SERIAL interface It is for communication between PMU and subrack.
7 PMU It is a power monitor unit.
8 RUN indicator It indicates the running status of PMU.

(green) and ALM
indicator (red) on
the PMU

System
Marking Function Unit Function
9 Alarm elimination It is for eliminating the audible alarm. It is in the ON

switch (MUTE) state usually. When it is in the OFF state, no alarm
audible is generated whether there is any critical
alarm.
10 Test switch (TEST) It is for audible/visual alarm and it is in the lower state
usually. When it is in the upper state, the green, yellow
and red indicators on the cabinet top will flash, and
the buzzer on PMU will give off alarm. It shows that
the alarm system is in normal state.
11 Auxiliary tributary It functions as the fuse of the auxiliary power supply

fuse (AUX). It is installed on the front panel of the power
box for easy installation and replacement.
12 Subrack switch SW1 Controls power supply of the upper

subrack. The output port of SW 1 is OUT1
SW2 Controls power supply of the middle

SW3 Controls power supply of the lower

13 RUN indicator It indicates the status of PDU. When the green

(green) and ALM indicator is lit, the PDU is running normally. When
indicator (red) on the red indicator is unlit, the lightning protection fuse
the PDU fails.
14 Power distribution It provides power input/distribution, lightning

unit (PDU) protection, overcurrent protection, EMI filter.
2.3 DIP Switches

This section introduces the appearance and functions of DIP switches.
For the appearance of DIP switches on a PMU board, see Figure 2-2. For the position of DIP
switches on a PMU board, see Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-2 PMU DIP switches

ON ECE
1 2 3 4

System
Figure 2-3 DIP switches on the PMU
ON ECE
DIP
switches 1234
Functions of each DIP switch are listed as follows.

l The first and second bits of the DIP switch are used to set the communication with a certain
subrack.
The settings of the two switches decide which subrack the PMU communicates with. The
default setting is that the PMU communicates with the lower subrack. The PMU reports
information such as environment variables and voltage to the SCC of the subrack. The SCC
then reports the information to the T2000.
For the settings and meanings of DIP switches, refer to Table 2-4.
NOTE
When the PMU is set to communicate with a certain subrack in the cabinet, the PMU sends the data such
as that of the environment and voltage only to the SCC in this subrack. The data can be transmitted to the
T2000 through the SCC. But at the same time, all the three subracks in the cabinet can report alarms to
the PMU and send commands to drive the cabinet indicators.
Table 2-4 Settings and meanings of DIP switches
DIP Switch 1 DIP Switch 2 PMU Communicates with …
ON ON Upper subrack
ON OFF Middle subrack
OFF ON Lower subrack
OFF OFF No communication
Note: The DIP switch is ON when in the upper position, and OFF when in the lower position.
l The third bit of the DIP switch: not covered by WDM equipment

System
Whether the DIP switch is toggled ON or OFF does not affect WDM equipment. By default,
the DIP switch is toggled ON.
l The fourth bit of the DIP switch provides an option for monitoring the voltage of the power
supply.
When the fourth bit of the DIP is set to OFF, the working voltage is -48 V DC. when it is
set to ON, the working voltage is -60 V DC. The default state is OFF.
2.4 Interface Description

The PMU in the power box fulfills alarm output, input and cascade functions. On the PMU, the
ALARM interface is used for input, output, and concatenation of external alarms, and the
SERIAL interface is used for serial communication between the PMU and the SCC of each
subrack.
SERIAL Interface
A SERIAL is a communication interface between the PMU and the subrack in the cabinet. The
SERIAL is also an interface for driving signal of the cabinet indicator.
For the cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks, see Figure 2-4.
Cable W1 is connected to the upper subrack, W2 to the middle subrack and W3 to the lower
subrack. W4 is a cable for driving indicators at the cabinet top. Connectors X5, X6, and X7
correspond to the indicator power supply interfaces (J4, J3, and J2) at the cabinet top respectively.
The J4, J3, and J2 are interfaces to provide power supplies for the green, red, and orange
indicators.
Figure 2-4 Alarm cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks
There are two types of alarms in a cabinet of the transmission equipment:

l Visual alarm: including red indicator alarm (critical) and orange indicator alarm (major).
l Audio alarm: given off by a buzzer. Audio alarm is triggered by critical alarms.
When the SCC board gives out a critical alarm signal, the red indicator flashes and the buzzer
buzzes. The MUTE switch at the cabinet top or the ALC switch of the SCC board controls the
buzz sound.

System
ALARM Interface
The transmission equipment outputs the alarm signal of the cabinet to the centralized alarming
system.
The power box provides four alarm outputs, one for major alarm, one for critical alarm, and the
other two for auxiliary Boolean value. If the centralized alarming system is in audio alarm mode,
the alarm mute function is required.
The alarm signal is led out from the ALARM interface of the PMU.
For the diagram of pins (DB50) of an ALARM interface, see Figure 2-5.
For the assignment of the pins, refer to Table 2-5.
For the usage of the pins, refer to Table 2-6.
Figure 2-5 ALARM pins diagram

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
13
38
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

System
Table 2-5 ALARM interface pin assignment
PIN No. Definition PIN No. Definition
1 RELAY1 34 ALMOUT1
3 RELAY2 35 ALMOUT1
5 RELAY3 36 ALMOUT2
7 RELAY4 37 ALMOUT2
9 RELAY5 38 ALMOUT3
11 RELAY6 39 ALMOUT3
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, GND 25, 50 Undefined

14, 16, 18, 20,
22, 24, 27, 29,
31, 33
NOTE
Each pin with a RELAY code is in pair with a GND cable that has a PIN code larger by 1.
Table 2-6 ALARM interface pin assignment
Pin Name Usage
ALMOUT1 and ALMOUT2 Major alarm Boolean output
ALMOUT3 and ALMOUT4 Critical alarm Boolean output
ALMOUT5 and ALMOUT6 Output of auxiliary alarm Boolean 1

System
Pin Name Usage
ALMOUT7 and ALMOUT8 Output of auxiliary alarm Boolean 2
RELAY1-16 Input of external 16 channels of Boolean
NOTE
When an alarm occurs, two alarm values are output at the same time, one to the W2 interface, the other to
the W3 interface, as shown in Figure 2-6, so as to cascade the alarm signals.
If several cabinets are installed side by side, the alarms of these cabinets can be cascaded. One
end of externally connected alarm cable contains a DB50 connector, while the other end has
three branches. These three branches contain two alarm output/alarm cascade connectors (DB9)
and one external alarm input connector (DB37). See Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Alarm cable
Figure 2-7 Structure of the alarm output cable
Pos.9 1
Pos.1 X1
1. DB9 connector

System
Figure 2-8 Structure of the alarm input cable
1
Pos.1
Pos.37
1. DB37 connector
In Figure 2-6, W2 and W3 are alarm output/cascade cables, W1 is the alarm input cable. The
alarm signals are cascaded among cabinets through W2 and W3. The last cabinet transmits the
signals to the centralized alarming system.
CAUTION
As an alarm output or cascade interface is a DB9 male connector, a 3-m (10 ft.) cable with DB9
female connectors on both ends is needed to cascade the alarm signals of two cabinets. See
Figure 2-7.
The power box provides 16 input interfaces for external alarms. The alarm input function is
intended for remote monitoring of the alarms from an external system (such as an environment
monitoring system). You may name the 16 inputs of alarms for easy remote monitoring on the
T2000.
External alarm input includes door access, smoke and other environmental factors. In other
words, the external alarm input accesses the environmental alarms in the equipment room for
centralized monitoring.
Before displaying an external alarm on the T2000 server, you may process the alarm with
software program to determine whether the alarm is valid.
W1 is an external alarm input connector, also a DB37 female connector. A 10-m (33 ft.) alarm
input cable (DB37 connector on one end and the other end reserved) is connected to the W1
cable to allow external alarm input. See Figure 2-8.
CAUTION
The transmission system cannot monitor the external alarms independently. The system must
co-work with an external environment monitoring system of the customer.

System
2.5 Specifications
The technical specifications of the power box include dimensions, weight and input rated current.
Table 2-7 lists the technical specifications of the power box.
Table 2-7 Technical specifications of the power box

Item Technical Specifications of the Power Box
Dimensions (Height x 100 mm x 400 mm x 258 mm (3.9 in. x 15.7 in. x 10.2 in.)
Width x Depth)
Input rated current 65 A
Weight 6.5 kg (14.4 lb.)

System
Hardware Description 3 Enhanced Subrack
3 Enhanced Subrack
About This Chapter
Describes the mechanical structure, technical specifications, and interfaces of the enhanced
subrack.
3.1 Structure
An enhanced subrack comprises three parts.
3.2 Slot Description
There are 13 slots in the board area of a subrack. If you face the front of the cabinet, the slots
from the left to the right are slot 1 to slot 13. The IU 7 is for the SCC board.
3.3 Fan Tray Assembly
Each subrack contains a fan tray assembly that consists of a fan tray and an air filter. The air
filter can be extracted directly for cleaning.
3.4 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces
The enhanced subrack provides rich interfaces for communication and maintenance.
3.5 Specifications
Specifications include mechanical specifications, power consumption and working voltage.
3.6 Labels on the Subrack
This section introduces the labels on the subrack.

System
3 Enhanced Subrack Hardware Description
3.1 Structure
An enhanced subrack comprises three parts.
l Upper part: an interface area that accesses all kinds of electrical signals.
l Middle part: a board area.
l Lower part: a fiber cabling area and a fan area.
For the structure of the enhanced subrack, see Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 enhanced subrack structure diagram
3
4
7 8 9 10
1. PFU module 2. Interface area 3. Beam 4. E1 cabling hole 5. Board area

6. Fiber spool 7. Fiber cabling area 8. Fan tray assembly 9. Subrack front door 10. VOA adjusting screw
l Interface area
All external interfaces are located in this area, including the interfaces for subrack power
supply, network management system and orderwire phone, and so on.
The interface area also works as a heat dissipation outlet of the subrack. The orderwire
phone can be installed under the beam in this area.
l PFU module
The power filter unit (PFU) module is pluggable. Each PFU module provides a DB3
interface to access a -48 V DC/-60 V DC working power supply. Each subrack is equipped
with two PFU modules so as to input two power supplies for mutual backup.
l Board area

System
Totally 13 slots are available, numbered IU1, IU2, IU3 … IU13 from left to right when you
face the front surface of the subrack. Slot IU7 is for SCC board and is 24-mm (0.9-inch)
wide. Other slots are 38-mm (1.5-inch) wide.
All optical interfaces are located on these standard G-type front panels. Most optical
interfaces are of LC/PC type or SC/PC type, while the LINE, EXT and OUT optical
interfaces on the front panel of the Raman amplifier unit are of LSH/APC type.
l Fiber cabling area
All the optical fibers from the optical interfaces are routed to this area. These optical fibers
then come out of this area and reach the matched side of the subrack. There are fiber spools
at the two sides of the subrack. These spools allow good management over the optical fibers.
Mechanical variable optical attenuator (VOA) is installed in this area. This area can contain
a maximum of eight VOAs, arranged in two rows.
l Fan tray assembly
This area contains a fan tray and an air filter. The air filter is fixed beneath the fan tray.
The fans and air filter ensure a dust-free environment with normal temperature.
l Front door
The front door is intended for equipment protection and electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC). The inner side of the front door is equipped with hooks to hold the screws for
adjusting the mechanical VOA.
l Backplane
The backplane is on the inner side of the rear panel of the subrack. The system depends on
the service bus of the backplane to connect all modules. This enables the system to fulfill
functions of data bus, communication bus, overhead bus and some control buses.
l Fiber spools
The fiber spools serve to coil the slack of the optical fiber.

There are 13 slots in the board area of a subrack. If you face the front of the cabinet, the slots
from the left to the right are slot 1 to slot 13. The IU 7 is for the SCC board.
Figure 3-2 shows the slot distribution in the board area of a subrack.
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of enhanced subrack

SCC
IU10
IU11
IU12
IU13
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU8
IU9

System

The fan tray and the air filter are installed at the lower part of the subrack, located under the
fiber laying area. The air filter is hung under the fan tray and the two parts form as a whole. See
Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Fan tray assembly of the enhanced subrack
2
3
4
5
1. Fans (six in total) 2. Air filter 3. Pulled handle

4. Fan running indicators (six in total) 5. Alarm indicator 6. Connector
The fan tray assembly is directly inserted in the backplane through connectors. The backplane
provides -48 V/-60 V DC for the fan tray assembly.
There are six green indicators on the front panel of the fan tray assembly. The six running
indicators (green) show the running status of the six fans. The red indicator indicates whether
the fan is faulty or not.
Because of abundant optical devices and large power consumption, the cooling and ventilation
system is critical.
For the air circulation of the entire subrack, see Figure 3-4.
The air inlet is located in the lower part of the subrack, while the air outlet is located in the
subrack interface area. Such a design forms a good cooling and ventilation system and allows
the normal running of the equipment.

System
Figure 3-4 Air circulation in the enhanced subrack
Air outlet
Interface area
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
: Airflow path and direction of the airflow

The enhanced subrack provides rich interfaces for communication and maintenance.
3.4.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area

The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, communication
interface and alarm output interface.
For the enhanced subrack interface area, see Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Interface area enhanced subrack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14
1. ETHERNET1 2. ETHERNET2 3. CLKIN 4. CLKOUT 5. OCU CLKIN

6. F&f 7. Serial1 8. Serial2 9. ALM 10. F1
11. OAM 12. PFU 13. POWER 14. PHONE

System
CAUTION
The PHONE interface and the ETHERNET interface are the same in the appearance and different
in function. Pay attention to distinguish them.
Table 3-1 Description of the interfaces in the interface area enhanced subrack
Interface Connect Function
or
ETHERNET1 RJ-45 Serves as the Telecom management network (TMN)

interface and local NE management interface.
It connects to the ETHERNET2 interface on another
subrack through cross-over network cables, to achieve the
inter-subrack communication concatenation.
ETHERNET2 RJ-45 l Serves as the communication interface with the ROP

board in the remote optical pumping amplifier
(ROPA) system.
l When the WMU is configured for centralized
wavelength monitoring, ETHERNET2 can be used as
a backup network interface for inter-subrack
communication.
l It connects to the ETHERNET1 interface on another
subrack through cross-over network cables, to achieve
the inter-subrack communication concatenation.
PHONE1/ RJ-45 Serves as the orderwire phone interface that uses the
PHONE2/PHONE3 optical supervisory channel (OSC) bytes E1 and E2.
Provides a 64 kbit/s orderwire voice channel for direct
orderwire communication between terminals.
CLOC IN1-IN2 SMB Serve as two clock input 75-ohm interfaces to access 2048
K kbit/s or 2048 kHz clock signals from the equipment at
the local station.
OUT1- SMB Serve as four clock output 75-ohm interfaces to output

OUT4 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz clock signals to the equipment at
the local station.
OCU CLKIN SMB Serve as two external clock source interfaces for the board
in the system of the early version.
F&f DB9 Possesses all the features of RS-232 interface. Serves only
as an interface for software internal testing.
Serial 1 DB9 Uses the F2 byte of the supervisory channel and possesses
the features of both RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces. The
maximum rate is 19.2 kbit/s.

System
Interface Connect Function

or
Serial2 DB9 Uses the F3 byte of the supervisory channel and possesses
the features of both RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces. The
ALM DB9 Serves for subrack alarm output. The ALM communicates
with the PMU board located in the power box. The ALM
is connected with the subrack communication interface
(SERIAL) on the power box panel.
F1 DB9 Serves as a 64 kbit/s co-directional data interface.
OAM DB9 Serves as a local NE management interface. Operation,

administration and maintenance interface.
POWER DB3 Serves as a subrack power supply interface.
NOTE
Subracks can communicate with each other in the network port cascading mode or non-cascading mode.
There are two ETHERNET interfaces in the subrack interface area, but the communication functions of the two
interfaces are different.
l Non-cascading mode
l The ETHERNET1 interface serves for ECC extended function. That is, the ETHERNET1 interfaces of
all subracks in an OTM, OLA or OADM are connected to the HUB through straight-through network
cables to communicate with the T2000 server. The ETHERNET1 interface also serves for special
network functions among subracks. The boards with such functions as ALC and APE may not belong
to the same subrack.
l The ETHERNET2 interface serves for the communication between the subrack and the ROP board of
the ROPA system.
l Generally, ETHERNET1s are used to realize inter-subrack communication. When the WMU is
configured for centralized wavelength monitoring, ETHERNET2 can be used as a backup network
interface for inter-subrack communication. The two network interfaces require two independent HUBs
for separate connections. That is, ETHERNET1s of all the subracks are connected to one HUB through
straight-through network cables while ETHERNET2s of all the subracks are connected to the other HUB
through straight-through network cables. Only the HUB1 must be connected to the T200 through
straight-through network cables.
l Before you use ETHERNET2, confirm that it is set to the correct communication mode (The default
value is Disabled).
l In the non-cascading mode, ETHERNET1 and ETHERNET2 are non-interchangeable.
l Cascading mode
The ETHERNET2 interface is connected to the ETHERNET1 interface on another subrack through cross-
over network cables, to achieve the inter-subrack communication concatenation.
3.4.2 Pin Assignment of Interfaces

This section introduces the pin assignment of interfaces on the enhanced subrack.

System
Table 3-2 Pin assignment of Ethernet interface

Pin assignment of RJ-45 connector Pin Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmits the

data positive
2 TX- Transmits the

data negative
3 RX+ Receives the

data positive
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RX- Receives data

negative
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 3-3 Pin assignment of PHONE interface

1 TX+ Transmits the

data positive
2 TX- Transmits the

data negative
3 RX+ Receives the

data positive
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RX- Receive data

negative
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected

System
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of F&f interface

Pin assignment of DB9
connector Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not connected
2 R232 Receives the 232 signal
3 T232 Transmits the 232 signal
4 N.C Not connected
5 GND Ground
6 N.C Not connected
7 N.C Not connected
8 N.C Not connected
9 N.C Not connected
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of Serial1/Serial2 interface

1 GND Ground
2 R232 Receives the 232 signal
3 T232 Transmits the 232 signal
4 N.C Not connected
5 GND Ground
6 T422+ Transmits the 422 signal data

positive
7 T422- Transmits the 422 signal data

negative
8 R422+ Receives the 422 signal data

positive
9 R422- Receives the 422 signal data

negative

System
Table 3-6 Pin assignment of ALM interface

1 ALMCUT Turns off the audible alarm for

the minor, major, and critical
alarms.
2 GND Ground
3 RALM Critical alarm, corresponding to

the CRI indicator on the subrack.
4 YALM Minor alarm, corresponding to

the MIN indicator on the
subrack.
5 N.C Not connected
6 GND Ground
7 PMUTXD Transmits the data to the PMU.
8 PMURXD Receives the data from the PMU.
9 N.C Not connected
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of F1 interface

1 GND Ground
2 N.C Not connected
3 N.C Not connected
4 N.C Not connected
5 GND Ground
6 F1T+ Transmits the F1 signal positive
7 F1T- Transmits the F1 signal negative
8 F1R+ Receives the F1 signal positive
9 F1R- Receives the F1 signal negative

System
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of OAM interface

Pin assignment of DB9 Pin Signal Function
connector
1 DSR Data set request
2 RXD Receive data
3 TXD Transmit data
4 DTR Data terminal ready
5 GND Ground
6 RTS Request to send
7 CTS Clear to send
8 NC Not connected
9 CD Carrier detect
3.5 Specifications
Specifications include mechanical specifications, power consumption and working voltage.
Table 3-9 Technical parameters of the enhanced subrack

Item Parameter
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) 625 mm x 495 mm x 291 mm (24.6 in. x 19.5 in.
x 11.5 in.)
Weight (empty subrack not installed with 18 kg (40 lb.)

boards or the fan tray assembly)
Maximum power consumption of the 650 W

subrack (full configuration) a
Power consumption (with the empty 19.6 W

subrack and fan tray assembly)
Rated current 18 A
Nominal working voltage -48 V DC/-60 V DC
Working voltage range -38.4 V to -57.6 V DC/-48 V to -72 V DC
a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption
configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability that
the subrack has. For transport equipment, values of heat dissipation and power consumption
are almost the same, and thus values of them are considered as the same.

System
Table 3-10 Power consumption of the subrack and cabinet in typical configuration in the OptiX
BWS 1600G
Maximum Power
Unit Name Consumptiona a Remarks
Subrack OTU subrack 350 W It is the power consumption when the

subrack is installed with twelve OTU
10G(LWFS), one SCC and fan tray
assemblys.
OTM subrack 110 W It is the power consumption when the

subrack is installed with two VOA, one
SC1, one MCA, one OAU, one OBU,
one FIU, one SCC and fan tray
assemblys.
OLA subrack 130 W It is the power consumption when the

subrack is installed with two VOA, one
SC2, two OAU, one OBU, two FIU,
one SCC and fan tray assemblys.
Cabinet OTM Cabinet 810 W It is the power consumption when the

(40 x 10Gbit/ subrack is installed with two OTU
s) subrack and one OTM subrack.
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of and cabinet is calculation
based on the power consumption of each module.

Label Description
Table 3-11 Labels on the equipment

Symbol Type It suggests …
ESD protection The electrostatic-sensitive

symbol equipment.
Air filter The regular cleaning of the air

ATTENTION 注意 regular filter.
cleaning label
CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清扫

System
Subrack Position of the grounding point.

grounding label
OptiX BWS 1600G

Product The product name and
电源额定值 POWER RATING: -48－-60V;18A
nameplate label certification.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification The qualification card.

card label
HUAW EI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
RoHS label The equipment complies with

the related environmental
requirements of RoHS
directives.

System
Label Position
Figure 3-6 Labels on the enhanced subrack
ATTENTION 注意
OptiX BWS 1600G

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
电源额定值 POWER RATING: -48－- 60V;18A

华为技术有限公司中国制作华为技术有限公司中国制作

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
HS
Ro

System
Hardware Description 4 Independent OLA Subrack
4 Independent OLA Subrack
About This Chapter
Describes the mechanical structure, technical specifications, and interfaces of the independent
OLA subrack.
4.1 Structure
The OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack mainly applies to the OLA station. It can
access power supplies independently.
There are 12 slots in the board area of the independent OLA subrack. (When you face the front
of cabinet, from the left to the right are slot 1 to slot 12.) IU 7 is for the SCC. IU 12 is for the
power and environment monitoring unit (PMU).
The OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack provides abundant interfaces for data
communication and equipment maintenance. These interfaces are located in the OLA subrack
interface area and on the front panel of the PMU board.
4.5 Specifications
Specifications include mechanical specifications, power consumption, rated current and working
voltage.

System
4 Independent OLA Subrack Hardware Description
4.1 Structure
The OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack mainly applies to the OLA station. It can
access power supplies independently.
The structure of the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack is shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack structure diagram
2
3
1 4
7 H
8 6 D W
9
10
11
1. Interface area 2. DC power filter board (DPFU) 3. Beam

4. Board area 5. Front door 6. VOA adjusting screw 7. Fiber routing area
8. Fan tray assembly 9. Air filter 10. Fiber spool box 11. Mounting ear
l Interface area: Located at the top of the subrack, this interface area contains all electrical
interfaces of the subrack.
l DPFU board: Provides a DB3 interface to access a -48 V DC/-60 V DC power supply;
provides a power switch for the subrack. Each OptiX 1600G independent OLA subrack is
equipped with two DPFU boards to input two power supplies for mutual backup.
l Beam: Serves as the location for the orderwire phone.
l Board area: Totally 12 slots are available, numbered IU1, IU2, IU3 … IU12 from left to
right when you face the front of the subrack. Slot IU7 is for SCC board and is 24-mm (0.9-

System
inch) wide. Slot IU12 is for PMU board and is 24-mm (0.9-inch) wide. Other slots are 38-
mm (1.5-inch) wide.
l Front door: The front door is intended for equipment protection and electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC). The inner side of the front door is equipped with hooks to hold the
screws for adjusting the mechanical VOA.
l Fiber routing area: All the optical fibers connected to the optical interfaces are routed to
this area. These optical fibers then come out of this area from the optical fiber hole at the
side of the subrack into the fiber spool box at the bottom for the coiling of the redundant
fiber jumpers. This area can hold eight mechanical VOAs.
l Backplane: The backplane is on the inner side of the rear panel of the subrack. The system
depends on the service bus of the backplane to connect all modules. This enables the system
to fulfill functions of data bus, communication bus, overhead bus and some control buses.
l Fan tray assembly: Provides six fans for ventilation and heat dissipation of the subrack. On
the front panel, there are six running indicators (green) and one alarm indicator (red).
l Air filter: Prevents dust from entering the subrack. It should be drawn out for cleaning
periodically.
l Fiber spool box: Coils redundant fiber jumpers.
l Mounting ear: Fixes the OLA subrack in a cabinet.

There are 12 slots in the board area of the independent OLA subrack. (When you face the front
of cabinet, from the left to the right are slot 1 to slot 12.) IU 7 is for the SCC. IU 12 is for the
power and environment monitoring unit (PMU).
Figure 4-2 shows the slot distribution in the board area of the independent OLA subrack.
Figure 4-2 Slot distribution of the independent OLA subrack

PMU
SCC
IU10
IU11
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU8
IU9

Refer to 3.3 Fan Tray Assembly.

System

The OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack provides abundant interfaces for data
communication and equipment maintenance. These interfaces are located in the OLA subrack
interface area and on the front panel of the PMU board.
4.4.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area

The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, communication
interface and alarm input and output interface.
The interface area is in the upper part of the subrack. Figure 4-3 shows the panel.
Figure 4-3 Interface area of the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack
CLOCK
NEG(-)POWER1RTN(+)
NEG(-)POWER2RTN(+)
OUT3 OUT4
ON ON
IN1
IN2
OAM
POWER ON POWER ON
ETHERNET1PHONE1 OUT1
OUT2
OFF OFF
ALM
ETHERNET2PHONE2
POWER OUT POWER OUT
1. CLOCK (six in total) 2. OAM 3. ALM

4. POWER 5. Subrack power switch 6. PHONE (two in total)
7. ETHERNET (two in total)

System
Table 4-1 Description of interfaces in the interface area of the independent OLA subrack
Interface Connector Function
ETHERNET1/ RJ-45 l Telecom management network (TMN)

ETHERNET2 management interface, local NE management
interface and inter-subrack communication
interface.
l Connected with the network interface of NM
computer through a straight-through network
cable, realizing management over the OptiX
BWS 1600G equipment.
l Connected with ETHERNET interfaces of
other subracks through crossover network
cables, realizing communication
concatenation among subracks.
l The functions of these two Ethernet interfaces
are the same.
PHONE1/PHONE2 RJ-45 Orderwire phone interface, using E1 and E2 bytes

of the supervisory channel to provide the 64 kbit/
s orderwire voice channel.
The interface is used for direct orderwire
communication between terminals.
CLOC IN1/IN2 SMB Two clock input 75-ohm interfaces.

K
OUT1/ SMB Four clock output 75-ohm interfaces.
OUT2/
OUT3/OUT4
OAM DB9 Serves as a local NE management interface.

Operation, administration and maintenance
interface.
ALM DB50 Input and output interface for alarm value.

The interface can input up to 16 external alarm
values and output four alarm values; moreover, it
can concatenate the output alarm values among
several OptiX BWS 1600G OLA subracks.
POWER1/POWER2 DB3 Two power interfaces to input power supply for

the subrack for mutual backup.
CAUTION
The PHONE interface and the ETHERNET interface are the same in the appearance and different
in function. Pay attention to distinguish them.
There are also some interfaces on the front panel of the PMU board.

System
The PMU board is inserted in slot IU12. Figure 4-4 shows its front panel.
Figure 4-4 PMU front panel
PMU
RUN
CRI
MAJ
MIN
ETH
F&f
Serial1
Serial2
F1
LAMP1
LAMP2
ALM-TEST
Table 4-2 Types and functions of the PMU interfaces

Interface Connector Type Description
ETH RJ-45 Realizes communication between boards in the OLA

subrack and external equipment.
F&f RJ-45 Bears features of RS-232 interfaces.
Serial 1 RJ-45 Employs F2 bytes of the supervisory channel. Provides

features of RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces, and the

System

F1 RJ-45 Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
LAMP1/ RJ-45 Outputs alarm driving signals to cabinet indicators. It

LAMP2 is used for concatenating equipment alarms among
OLA subracks.
For the detailed description of the PMU, refer to 12.2 PMU.
4.4.2 Pin Assignment of Interfaces

This section introduces the pin assignment of interfaces on the OLA subrack.
Table 4-3 Pin assignment of Ethernet interface

1 TX+ Transmits the data

positive
2 TX- Transmits the data

negative
3 RX+ Receives the data

positive
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RX- Receives data

negative
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected

System
Table 4-4 Pin assignment of PHONE interface

1 TX+ Transmits the data

positive
2 TX- Transmits the data

negative
3 RX+ Receives the data

positive
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RX- Receive data negative
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 4-5 Pin assignment of OAM interface

Pin Assignment of DB9 Connector Pin Signal Function
1 DSR Data set request
2 RXD Receive data
3 TXD Transmit data
4 DTR Data terminal ready
5 GND Ground
6 RTS Request to send
7 CTS Clear to send
8 NC Not connected
9 CD Carrier detect

System
Table 4-6 Pin assignment of OCTL interface

Pin Assignment of DB9 Connector Pin Signal Function
1 RS232_SC Clock signal

K
2 NC Not connected
3 NC Not connected
4 5V_PMU 5 V DC form PMU

board
5 GND Ground
6 RS232_RX Receives the 232

signal
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
9 RS232_TX Transmits the 232

signal

System
Table 4-7 Pin assignment of ALM interface

Pin Assignment of DB50 Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 RELAY1 34 ALMO
UT1
3 RELAY2 35 ALMO
UT1
5 RELAY3 36 ALMO
UT2
7 RELAY4 37 ALMO
UT2
9 RELAY5 38 ALMO
UT3
11 RELAY6 39 ALMO
UT3
13 RELAY7 40 ALMO
UT4
15 RELAY8 41 ALMO
UT4
17 RELAY9 42 ALMO
UT5
19 RELAY1 43 ALMO
0 UT5
21 RELAY1 44 ALMO
1 UT6
23 RELAY1 45 ALMO
2 UT6
26 RELAY1 46 ALMO
3 UT7
28 RELAY1 47 ALMO
4 UT7
30 RELAY1 48 ALMO
5 UT8
32 RELAY1 49 ALMO
6 UT8

System
Pin Assignment of DB50 Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal
2,4,6 GND 25,50 NC

,
8,10,
12,1
4,16,
18,2
0,22,
24,2
7,29,
31,3
3
Signal Function
ALMOUT1 and Major alarm

ALMOUT2 output
ALMOUT3 and Critical alarm

ALMOUT4 output
ALMOUT5 and The first auxiliary

ALMOUT6 alarm output
ALMOUT7 and The second

ALMOUT8 auxiliary alarm
output
RELAY1 to 16 alarm inputs

RELAY16
Table 4-8 Pin assignment of F&f interface

Pin Assignment of RJ-45 Connector Pin Signal Function
1 NC Not connected
2 NC Not connected
3 NC Not connected
4 RS232_ Receives the 232

RX signal
5 GND Ground
6 NC Not connected
7 NC Not connected
8 RS232_ Transmits the 232

TX signal

System
Table 4-9 Pin assignment of Serial1 interface

1 F2R42 Receives the 422 signal

2+ data positive

2- data negative
3 F2T422 Transmits the 422 signal

+ data positive
5 GND Ground

- data negative
7 NC Not connected

2
Table 4-10 Pin assignment of Serial2 interface

Signa
Pin Assignment of RJ-45 Connector Pin l Function
1 OHR4 Receives the RS422 signal

22+ data positive

22- data negative
3 OHT4 Transmits the RS422 signal

22+ data positive

32
5 GND Ground

22- data negative
7 NC Not connected

32

System
Table 4-11 Pin assignment of F1 interface

1 F1RP Receives the F1 signal

positive
2 F1RN Receives the F1 signal

negative
3 F1TP Transmits the F1 signal

positive
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 F1TN Transmits the F1 signal

negative
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 4-12 Pin assignment of LAMP1/LAMP2 interface

Signa
Pin Assignment of RJ-45 Connector Pin l Function
1 RAL Critical alarm signal

MP positive
2 RAL Critical alarm signal

MN negative
3 YAL Minor alarm signal

MP positive
4 GRU Power indicating signal

NP positive
5 GRU Power indicating signal

NN negative
6 YAL Minor alarm signal

MN negative
7 WAL Major alarm signal

MP positive
8 WAL Major alarm signal

MN negative

System
4.5 Specifications
Specifications include mechanical specifications, power consumption, rated current and working
voltage.
Table 4-13 Technical parameters of the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack
Item Parameter
Dimensions 665 mm (H) x 436 mm (W) x 291 mm (D)
Weight (empty subrack not installed with 19 kg

boards or the fan tray assembly)
Maximum power consumption of the 380 W

subrack (full configuration) a
Power consumption (with the empty 19.6 W

subrack and fan tray assembly)
Rated current 16 A
Nominal working voltage -48 V DC/-60 V DC
Working voltage range -38.4 V to -57.6 V DC/-48 V to -72 V DC
a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption
configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability that
the subrack has. For transport equipment, values of heat dissipation and power consumption
are almost the same, and thus values of them are considered as the same.

Label Description
Table 4-14 Labels on the equipment

Air filter regular The regular cleaning of the air

ATTENTION 注意 cleaning label filter.

System
Subrack Position of the groundingpoint.

grounding label
OptiX BWS 1600G

Product name The product name and
plate label certification.
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification The qualification card.

card label
HUAW EI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
RoHS label The equipment complies with the

related environmental
requirements of RoHS directives.

System
Label Position
Figure 4-5 Labels on the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack
OptiX BWS 1600G
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作华为技术有限公司中国制作

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
HS
Ro
ATTENTION 注意

System
Hardware Description 5 DCM
5 DCM
About This Chapter
Describes the working principle, function, and application of the DCM module and the structure
of the DCM frame.
5.1 DCM
DCM is dispersion compensation module.
5.2 DCM Frame
The DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion
of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

System
5 DCM Hardware Description
5.1 DCM
DCM is dispersion compensation module.
5.1.1 Application
The dispersion coefficient of a G.652 fiber is large, while that of a G.655 fiber is small. A DCM
can be installed on an optical amplifier unit at the transmit end or the receive end according to
the actual situation.
5.1.2 Functions
The system provides various DCMs for C band.
The system provides two types of DCM: the DCM based on dispersion compensation fiber
(DCF) and the DCM based on Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG).
The DCF-based DCM and the FBG-based DCM have similar compensation features. The
differences are as follows:
l The insertion loss of the DCF-based DCM increases with the distance in km.
l The insertion loss of the FBG-based DCM is always 4 dB regardless of the distance in km.
The DCM modules are available in different compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1
mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.),
100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1
mi.).
A DCM is located in a DCM frame that is in the lowest position of the cabinet.
Figure 5-1 shows the appearance of a DCM. There are two interfaces of a DCM which connect
to TDX and RDX of an optical amplifier or BAn and BDn of the DSE.
Figure 5-1 Appearance of a DCM
5.1.3 Working Principle

A DCM uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of a transmitting
fiber.

System
A G.652 or a G.655 fiber has positive dispersion coefficient and positive dispersion slope in the
1550-nm window.
After the optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the accumulation of positive
dispersion widens the optical signal pulse. This seriously affects the system transmission
performance. To minimize such an effect, a passive DCM is used in the network.
A DCM uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of a transmitting
fiber, so as to keep the original shape of the signal pulse.
5.1.4 Specifications
DCM specifications include DCM mechanical specifications, DCM performance specifications.
DCM Mechanical Specifications
Table 5-1 Dimensions and weight of a DCM
Module Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) Weight
DCM 44 mm x 238 mm x 266 mm (1.7 in. x 9.4 in. x 10.5 in.) 3.5 kg (7.7 lb)
DCM Performance Specifications
Table 5-2 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.652
fiber)
Max. Max. Operati

Distanc Insertio Allow on
Item e (mi./ n Loss DSC PMD PDL Power a Wavelen
Type km) (dB) R (ps) (dB) (dBm) gth (nm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2.3 90% to 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

110% 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
FBG- 49.7/80 4 1.0 0.2 23

DCM
(80)

System
Max. Max. Operati

Distanc Insertio Allow on
Item e (mi./ n Loss DSC PMD PDL Power a Wavelen
Type km) (dB) R (ps) (dB) (dBm) gth (nm)
FBG- 62.1/100 4 1.0 0.2 23

DCM
(100)
FBG- 74.5/120 4 1.0 0.2 23

DCM
(120)
FBG- 99.4/160 8 1.6 0.4 23

DCM
(160)
FBG- 124.2/20 8 1.6 0.4 23

DCM 0
(200)
FBG- 149.1/24 8 1.6 0.4 23

DCM 0
(240)
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage
the optical module.
LEAF fiber)
Operati
Max. Max. on
Distanc Insertio Allow Wavele
Item e (mi./ n Loss PMD PDL Power a ngth
Type km) (dB) DSCR (ps) (dB) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 4 90% to 0.4 0.3 20 1528 to

110% 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 5 0.5 0.3 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 5.9 0.7 0.3 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 6.9 0.8 0.3 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 7.8 0.9 0.3 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20
FBG- 74.5/120 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

DCM
(120)

System
Operati
Max. Max. on
FBG- 99.4/160 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

DCM
(160)
FBG- 124.2/20 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

DCM 0
(200)
FBG- 149.1/24 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

DCM 0
(240)
the optical module.
fiber)
Operati
Max. Max. on
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2 90% to 0.2 0.1 20 1528 to

110% 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 3 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 5 0.5 0.1 20
the optical module.
Table 5-5 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (TW-
RS fiber)
Operati
Max. Max. on
Distanc Insertio PDL Allow Wavele
Item e (mi./ n Loss PMD (dB) Power a ngth
Type km) (dB) DSCR (ps) a (dBm) (nm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 2.3 90% to 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

110% 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 2.8 0.3 0.1 20

System
Operati
Max. Max. on
Distanc Insertio PDL Allow Wavele
Item e (mi./ n Loss PMD (dB) Power a ngth
Type km) (dB) DSCR (ps) a (dBm) (nm)
DCM(C) 37.3/60 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 3.8 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 4.2 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
the optical module.
5.2 DCM Frame

The DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion
of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
Each DCM frame can hold two DCMs at most. The DCM frame is mounted in the lowest part
of the cabinet with mounting brackets and screws. See Figure 5-2. For the dimensions of a DCM
frame, refer to Table 5-6.
Figure 5-2 DCM and HUB frames in an cabinet
2
H
3 D
4 W
5
1. DCM frame 2. Case 3. DCM 4. HUB frame 5. HUB

System
Table 5-6 Dimensions of a DCM frame

Module Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)
DCM frame 48 mm x 530 mm x 282 mm (1.9 in. x 20.9 in. x 11.1 in.)

System
Hardware Description 6 HUB
6 HUB
About This Chapter
Describes the structure of the HUB Frame.
6.1 HUB
A HUB is required in a station with multiple subracks.
6.2 HUB Frame
A HUB frame comprises two parts: a box body and a HUB tray.

System
6 HUB Hardware Description
6.1 HUB
A HUB is required in a station with multiple subracks.
The HUB ports connect with the network ports in interface area of every subrack through network
cables. This realizes the communication between subracks, as well as the expanded ECC
function. A HUB is powered by a power box on the top of a cabinet where the HUB and power
box locate. For dimensions of a HUB, refer to Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Dimensions and weight of HUB

Module Dimensions (Height × Width × Depth) Weight
HUB 34 mm × 110 mm × 150 mm (1.3 in. × 34.3 in. × 5.9 in.) 0.30 kg (0.66 lb.)
6.2 HUB Frame

A HUB frame comprises two parts: a box body and a HUB tray.
The HUB frame can hold two 8-port HUBs to implement different functions. One is used for
extended ECC function, and the other is to realize the communication for special network
functions (e.g. APE, and ALC) among subracks. The power is supplied to the HUB from the
power box mounted at the top of the cabinet.
A HUB is located in a HUB frame that is in the lowest position of the cabinet. The HUB frame
is right under the DCM frame. See Figure 5-2.
At most, two HUBs can be placed into one HUB frame. The box body is attached to the cabinet
with ears and screws. The HUB tray is removable, which is easy for daily use and maintenance.
For dimensions of a HUB frame, refer to Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Dimensions of a HUB frame

Module Dimensions (Height × Width × Depth)
HUB frame 43 mm × 434 mm × 255 mm (1.7 in. × 17.1 in. × 10 in.)

System
Hardware Description 7 Overview of Boards
7 Overview of Boards
About This Chapter
Describes the classification and appearance of boards.
7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions

The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions and the laser
safety label.
7.2 Bar Code for Boards
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board characteristic code.
7.3 Board Category
The OptiX BWS 1600G system has 11 kinds of boards.

System
7 Overview of Boards Hardware Description
7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions

The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions and the laser
safety label.
7.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions

Describes the appearance and dimensions of the boards.
CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is
well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Table 7-1 The unit appearance and dimensions

Parameter Appearance and Dimensions
Board
appearance
Example SCC LBF M40 IMX
The number of 1 1 2 3
slots occupied
Height 345 mm (13.6 345 mm (13.6 345 mm (13.6 345 mm (13.6 in.)
in.) in.) in.)
Width 24 mm (0.9 in.) 38 mm (1.5 in.) 76 mm (3 in.) 114 mm (4.5 in.)
Depth 218.5 mm (8.6 218.5 mm (8.6 218.5 mm (8.6 218.5 mm (8.6 in.)
in.) in.) in.)
NOTE
The dexter figure shows the directions of the height, the H
width and the depth.
D W
l Height (H): frontal dimension
l Width (W): frontal dimension
l Depth (D): PCB size dimension

System
7.1.2 Laser Safety Label

Lasers are of HAZARD LEVEL 1 and HAZARD LEVEL 1M according to the value of the
output power.
WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance
of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
Table 7-2 lists the laser levels of the board.

NOTE
The power shown in Table 7-2 refers to the output power of the laser. It is achieved when the mode-field
diameter of fiber is 10 um at the 1550 nm wavelength.
Table 7-2 Laser levels

Laser Level Label Reference Power Range
HAZARD - < 10.00 dBm (< 10.00 mW)

LEVEL 1
HAZARD 10.00 dBm to 21.3 dBm (10.00 mW

LEVEL 1M to 136 mW)
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
7.2 Bar Code for Boards

and board characteristic code.
7.2.1 Overview
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
The information of a bar code includes can be queried on the T2000, for details refer to
Supporting Tasks.

System
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the T2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2 shows a bar code.
Figure 7-1 Constitutions of the bar codes on a unit (example 1)

Environmentally friendliness identifier
Y:Environmentally friendly
Ex-factory
number Unit name
21030707191073000001 Y SSE1LBF01-19270PK
BOM Hardware Characteristic

Model
version code
Bar code 1
Release number
BOM 03070719 01 19270
WDM-side
BOM
wavelength
Bar code 2

System
Figure 7-2 Constitutions of the bar codes on a unit (example 2)

Ex-factory Characteristic
number Unit name code
0339771074000011 Y SSE1RPC01-G10
BOM Hardware Model

version
Bar code 1
BOM 03033977 01
Release
BOM
number
Bar code 2
7.2.2 Characteristic Code

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to B Bar Codes of Each
Board.
7.3 Board Category

The OptiX BWS 1600G system has 11 kinds of boards.
l Optical transponder unit
l Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit
l Optical add and drop multiplexing unit
l Optical amplifier unit
l System control, supervision and communication unit
l Optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
l Protection unit
l Spectrum analyzer unit

System
l Variable optical attenuator unit

l Optical fiber automatic monitoring unit
l Optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit
Table 7-3 Board list
Board Board Board Description

Category Name
Optical E7LWF STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit

transponder unit E8LWF with AFEC function
E7LWFS STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit

E8LWFS with AFEC function (SuperWDM)
E4LBE Transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for

10GE (LAN)
E4LBES Transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for

10GE (LAN) (SuperWDM)
E4TMR 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board

E8TMR with AFEC and G.709
E4TMRS 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board

E8TMRS with AFEC and G.709 (SuperWDM)
E4TMX 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2

wavelength conversion board
E4TMXS 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2

wavelength conversion board (SuperWDM)
E3ETMX 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism MUX OTU-2

E8ETMX wavelength conversion unit with AFEC
E3ETMXS 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism MUX OTU-2

E8ETMXS wavelength conversion unit with AFEC (SuperWDM)
E3LBF 10G universal transmit-receive line wavelength

E8LBF conversion board
E3LBFS 10G universal transmit-receive line wavelength

E8LBFS conversion board (SuperWDM)
E4LWC1 STM-16/OTU1 transmit-receive line wavelength

conversion board
E4TRC1 STM-16/OTU1 line regenerating wavelength conversion

board
E3LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit
E2FDG 2-port GE wavelength conversion board with FEC

System

Category Name
E3LOG 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength

conversion board
E3LOGS 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength

conversion board (SuperWDM)
E2LQM 4 x Multi-rate ports wavelength conversion board
E3ELOG Enhanced 8-ports Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical

E8ELOG wavelength conversion board (AFEC)
E3ELOGS Enhanced 8-ports Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical

E8ELOGS wavelength conversion board (AFEC SuperWDM)
E1LU40 40Gbit/s Wavelength Conversion Board with AFEC

Function
E1LU40S 40Gbit/s Wavelength Conversion Board with AFEC

Function (SuperWDM)
E1LUR40 40G transmit-receive line regenerating wavelength

conversion unit with AFEC function
E1LUR40S 40G transmit-receive line regenerating wavelength

conversion unit with AFEC function (SuperWDM)
E1TMX40 40G Tributary Multiplexing-Demultiplexing Line

Wavelength Conversion Unit With AFEC Function
E1TMX40S 40G Tributary Multiplexing-Demultiplexing Line

Wavelength Conversion Unit With AFEC Function
(SuperWDM)
Optical E3M40 40-channel multiplexing unit

multiplexer and
demultiplexer E3D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit
unit E3V40 40-channel optical multiplexer with VOA
E3ITL Interleaver unit
E3FIU Fiber interface unit
Optical add and E3MR2 2-channel optical add/drop unit

drop
multiplexing E1MR8 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
unit E2WSM9 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing unit
E2WSD9 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing unit
E1RMU9 9-port ROADM multiplexing unit
E1WSMD4 4-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing/

multiplexing board

System

Category Name
E1WSMD2 2-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing/

multiplexing board
Optical E5OAU Optical amplifier unit

amplifier unit
E5OBU Optical booster unit
E5OPU Optical preamplifier unit
E2HBA High-power optical booster amplifier unit
E3RPC Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band
System control, E4SCC System control and communication unit

supervision and
communication E1PMU Power and environment monitoring unit
unit
Optical E2SC1 Unidirectional optical supervising channel unit

supervisory
channel unit E2SC2 Bidirectional optical supervising channel unit
Protection unit E2OLP01 Separate subrack channel protection board (client

wavelength: multimode 850 nm)
E2OLP02 Separate subrack channel protection board (client

wavelength: single-mode 1310 nm & 1550 nm)
E2OLP03 Optical line protection board
E2SCS Synchronization optical channel separator unit
Spectrum E1MCA Multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit

analyzer unit
E1WMU Wavelength monitor unit
Variable optical E2VA4 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

attenuator unit
E2VOA Variable optical attenuator unit
Optical fiber E1FMU Fiber measure unit

automatic
monitoring unit E2MWA Measure wavelength access unit
E2MWF Measure wavelength filter unit
Optical Power E3GFU Gain flatness unit

and Dispersion
Slope
Equalizing
Board

System
NOTE
"E1", "E2", "E3", "E4", "E5", "E6" "E7" and "E8" before the board name indicates the hardware version
of this board.

System
Hardware Description 8 Optical Transponder Board
8 Optical Transponder Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical transponder boards.
8.1 ELOG
ELOG: enhanced 8-ports Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board
(AFEC)
8.2 ELOGS
ELOGS: enhanced 8-ports Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board
(AFEC SuperWDM)
8.3 ETMX
ETMX: 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion unit
with AFEC.
8.4 ETMXS
ETMXS: 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion unit
with AFEC (SuperWDM).
8.5 FDG
FDG: 2-port Gigabit Ethernet wavelength conversion board with FEC.
8.6 LBE
LBE: transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN).
8.7 LBES
LBES: transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN) (SuperWDM).
8.8 LBF
LBF: 10G universal transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board.
8.9 LBFS
LBFS: 10G universal transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board (SuperWDM).
8.10 LOG
LOG: 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board.
8.11 LOGS
LOGS: 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board (SuperWDM).

System
8 Optical Transponder Board Hardware Description
8.12 LQM
LQM: 4 × Multi-rate ports wavelength conversion unit.
8.13 LU40
LU40: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion board with AFEC function
8.14 LU40S
LU40S: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion board with AFEC function (SuperWDM)
8.15 LUR40
LUR40: 40G transmit-receive line universal wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function
8.16 LUR40S
LUR40S: 40G transmit-receive line universal wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function
(SuperWDM)
8.17 LWC1
LWC1: STM-16/OTU1 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board
8.18 LWF
LWF: STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function.
8.19 LWFS
LWFS: STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function
(SuperWDM).
8.20 LWX
LWX: arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit.
8.21 TMR
TMR: 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC and G.709.
8.22 TMRS
TMRS: 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC and G.709
(SuperWDM).
8.23 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion board.
8.24 TMXS
TMXS: 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
(SuperWDM)
8.25 TMX40
TMX40: 40G Tributary Multiplexing-Demultiplexing Line Wavelength Conversion Unit With
AFEC Function
8.26 TMX40S
TMX40S: 40G Tributary Multiplexing-Demultiplexing Line Wavelength Conversion Unit With
AFEC Function(Super WDM)
8.27 TRC1
TRC1: STM-16/OTU1 line regenerating wavelength conversion board

System
8.1 ELOG
ELOG: enhanced 8-ports Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board
(AFEC)
8.1.1 Version Description

The available hardware versions of the ELOG are E3 and E8.
Version
Table 8-1 lists the version description of the ELOG.
Table 8-1 Version description of the ELOG

Item Description
Current board hardware E3 and E8

version
Board hardware version E1, E3 and E8
Similarity E1, E3 and E8 work in the same way.
Difference l E8ELOG supports the AFEC-2 encoding, E1ELOG/E3ELOG

support the AFEC encoding, the AFEC and AFEC-2 encoding
mode cannot be interconnected.
l The WDM-side of E8ELOG/E3ELOG supports 10.71 Gbit/s,
E1ELOG support 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s.
l E8ELOG doesnot support cross-connection function, but
E1ELOG/E3ELOG supports.
l E8ELOG supports GE service, but E1ELOG/E3ELOG support
GE/FC100/FC200 service.
l E1ELOG does not support the transmission in the mode of
NON-IDLE stuffing bytes.bao
Replacement E3ELOG can replace E1ELOG.

E8ELOG cannot replace E1ELOG and E3ELOG.
Type
NA
8.1.2 Application
The ELOG is a type of optical transponder unit. The ELOG multiplexes eight channels of GE/
FC100 service signals or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service signals into a channel of
OTU2 signals and converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.

System
For the application of the board in an WDM system, see Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 Application of the ELOG in an WDM system
GE/ GE/
FC100/ 1 MUX DMUX 1 FC100/
FC200 FC200
ELOG G.694.1 G.694.1 ELOG
GE/ DMUX MUX GE/
FC100 8 8 FC100
Client WDM WDM Client

side side side side
8.1.3 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the ELOG are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 Functions and features of the ELOG

Function and
Feature Description
Basic function E3ELOG:

l Multiplexes up to eight channels of GE/FC100 service signals or
four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service signals into a channel
of OTU2 signals. The services of three different types can be
accessed at the same time. Converts the signals into WDM
standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
l Access the GE and FC100 services at the same time at 8-PORT
mode. And it can access the GE, FC100 and FC200 services at
the same time at 4-PORT mode (only TX1/RX1 to TX4/RX4
support).
E8ELOG:
l Multiplexes up to eight channels of GE service signals into a
channel of OTU2 signals. Converts the signals into WDM
process is similar.
Encoding mode Supports non return to zero (NRZ) encoding.
Band type l Fixed wavelength: 80 channels in C band

l Tunable wavelength: 80 channels in C band
Channel spacing l NRZ, fixed wavelength: 50 GHz or 100 GHz

l NRZ, tunable wavelength: 50 GHz

System
Function and
Feature Description
FEC function E3ELOG supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8ELOG supports the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.
975.1.
NOTE
The AFEC encoding and AFEC-2 encoding cannot be interconnected.
Tunable wavelength Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output WDM
function wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.10 THz and 196.05
THz, totally 96 wavelengths at an interval of 50 GHz.
Overhead processing Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.
ESC function Supports ESC function, which can multiplex the supervisory
information into the service channel for transmission.
Alarms and l Provides RMON statistics of Ethernet performance monitoring

performance events function.
monitoring l Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
l Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including
the monitoring on laser bias current, laser cooling current, laser
working temperature and optical power.
For details about the alarm of the board, refer to Alarms and
Performance Events Reference ELOG/ELOGS Board Alarm List.
For details about the performance event, refer to Alarms and
Performance Events Reference ELOG/ELOGS Board Performance
Event List.
ALS function Supports automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

For details about the working principles of the ALS, refer to Product
Description Equipment-Level Protection.
Loopback Supports:
l Inloop on the WDM side
l Outloop on the WDM side
l Inloop on the client side
l Outloop on the client side
For details about the loopback, refer to Supporting Tasks Performing
Inloop and Outloop.
Protection mode Supports:

l Inter-board wavelength protection
l Inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection
l 1+1 wavelength protection at client
l Extended intra-board wavelength protection
For details about the working principles of the service protections,
refer to Feature Description.

System
Function and
Feature Description
Regenerating OTU E3ELOG: E4TMR, E4TMRS

E8ELOG: E8TMR, E8TMRS
Pluggable optical Supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module on
module the client side.
8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ELOG consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical module,
the cross-connect and service processing module or the service en/de-capsulation and processing
module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3 shows the principle block diagram of the ELOG.
Figure 8-2 Principle block diagram of the E3ELOG

Client side
GE WDM side
RX1
RX2 en/de-capsulation
O/E Service
RX8
E/O OUT
processing
FC
en/de-capsulation
TX1
TX2
E/O O/E IN
TX8 Cross-connect
Client-side Cross-connect and WDM-side
optical module service processing module optical module
Control
Memory CPU Communication

Control and communication module
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack

System
Figure 8-3 Principle block diagram of the E8ELOG
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2 O/E
RX8 Service E/O OUT
GE
en/de-capsulation processing
TX1
TX2
E/O O/E IN
TX8
Service en/de-capsulation and
Client-side WDM-side
processing module
optical module optical module
Control
Memory CPU communication

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the ELOG unit can access the following types of optical signals:
l GE optical signals
l FC100 optical signals
In the signal flow of the ELOG unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELOG to the WDM side
of the ELOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four (four channels of FC200 service signals or the
access of services signals in three different types) or eight (eight channels of GE services
or FC100 service signals) channels of optical signals from the client equipment through
the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. The module then performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the four or eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the cross-
connect and service processing module. The module performs processes such as cross-
connection, multiplexing, clock generating and frame processing. Then, the module outputs
one channel of OTU2 signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s OTU2

System
optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths. The OTU2 optical signals are output
through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/
s OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the
IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the cross-connect and service processing
module. The module performs processes such as decapsulation, clock recovery,
demultiplexing and cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four or eight channels of
GE/FC100/FC200 signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four or eight channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four or eight channels of client-side optical signals
through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and the client-side transmitter.
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four or eight channels of GE/FC100/
FC200 optical signals.
– Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four or eight channels of internal
electrical signals to GE/FC100/FC200 optical signals.
– Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and the WDM-side transmitter.
– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard OTU2 optical signals at
10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s, and extracts clock from the electrical signals.
– WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
standard OTU2 optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock
signals with the electrical services signals.
– Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
– Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Cross-connect and service processing module
The module consists of the GE en/de-capsulation module, the FC en/de-capsulation
module, and the cross-connect and service processing module. The service encapsulation
module en/de-capsulates signals, and cross-connects and converges services in different
types.
– GE en/de-capsulation module: Processes the overheads of GE signals, and reports the
performance monitoring state of service signals.
– FC en/de-capsulation module: Realizes the mapping of FC signals, and reports the
– Service processing module: Achieves the multiplexing from GE to OTU2 and the
demultiplexing from OTU2 to GE, and performs processes such as encapsulation/
decapsulation of FEC, encoding/decoding and scrambling/descrambling.
– Cross-connect module: Realizes the cross-connection and passthrough between the
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the unit, or the cross-connection
between the client/WDM-side signals of the unit and the service signals of another unit

System
in the same protection group. The cross-connect granularity of service signals is GE.
Each protection group supports the cross-connections between a maximum of four units.
The service signals of the units in the same protection group are transmitted through
the backplanes. There are 24 channels of signals between each unit and the backplane.
NOTE
E8ELOG doesnot support the cross function.

l Service en/de-capsulation and processing module
The module consists of the GE en/de-capsulation module and service processing module.
It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals.
l Control and communication module
– Controls the operations on the board.
– Controls the operations on each module of the unit according to CPU instructions.
– Collects the information of alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection of each functional module of the unit.
– Communicates with the SCC board.
– Provides the synchronization clock signals for each module.
l Power supply module
Converts the -48 V/-60 V DC power into the power required by each module of the
board.
8.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ELOG front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 8-4 shows the front panel of the ELOG.

System
Figure 8-4 ELOG front panel
ELOG
RUN
ALM
TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
TX3 RX3
TX4 RX4
TX5 RX5
TX6 RX6
TX7 RX7
TX8 RX8
IN OUT
Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel.
l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
l Alarm status indicator (ALM) - red
For details on the indicators, refer to A Indicators.

System
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELOG.
Table 8-3 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 8-3 Types and descriptions of the ELOG interfaces
Connector
Interface Type Description
IN LC Connected to the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM

unit to receive WDM signals
OUT LC Connected to the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM unit

to transmit WDM signals
TX1-TX8 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit service

signals
RX1-RX8 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive service

signals
NOTE
For FC200 service signals, only the TX1-TX4 and RX1-RX4 optical interfaces can be used.
8.1.6 Valid Slots

The ELOG occupies one slot.
Valid slots for the board are as follows:
l In an enhanced subrack, slots valid for the board are IU1-IU6, IU8-IU13.
l In an independent OLA subrack, slots valid for the board are IU1-IU6, IU8-IU11.
NOTE
For the enhanced subrack of the OptiX BWS 1600G, there are three groups of slots that support inter-board
cross-connection protection :
l IU1-IU4 are in one group.
l IU5 and IU8 are in one group.
Within those groups, arbitrary wavelength cross-connection can be realized.
The ELOG must be installed in any slot of IU1-IU4, IU9-IU12 or IU5 and IU8 when it is configured with
cross-connections of GE services. Currently the OptiX BWS 1600G does not support cross-connections
between groups.
8.1.7 Bar Code

This section introduces the bar code for the board.
For the detailed description of the bar code for the board, refer to B Bar Codes of Each
Board.

System
8.1.8 NM Configuration Reference

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the ELOG configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot

The board occupies one logical slot in the T2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces

Table 8-4 lists the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on the
board front panel.
Table 8-4 Display of the ELOG optical interfaces
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
IN/OUT 1
RX1/TX1 2
RX2/TX2 3
RX3/TX3 4
RX4/TX4 5
RX5/TX5 6
RX6/TX6 7
RX7/TX7 8
RX8/TX8 9
NOTE
An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves to
receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.
8.1.9 ELOG Board Specifications

ELOG board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
sides, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and power consumption.
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board
and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board
are reserved on the T2000 for precaution.
Specifications of Optical Module on the Client Side

Table 8-5 and Table 8-6 list the specifications of optical module on the client side of the ELOG.

System
Table 8-5 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ELOG (GE)
Specifications
1000BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE-

Parameters Unit SX-0.5 km LX-10 km LX-40 km ZX-80 km
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6 mi.) 40 km (25 80 km (50

distance mi.) mi.) mi.)
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -2.5 -3 3 5

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z-compliant

mask
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver - PIN PIN PIN PIN

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -21 -23

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
receiver
overload

System
Table 8-6 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ELOG (FC100 and FC200)
Parameters Unit Specifications
Optical Interface - FC100/FC200 FC100/FC200

type
Line code format - - -
Target distance 0.5 km (0.3 mi.) 2 km (1.2 mi.)
Operating nm 770-860 1266-1360

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -2.5 -3

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -9.5 -10

launched power
Maximum -20 dB nm NA NA
spectrum width
Minimum side-mode dB NA NA
suppression ratio
(SMSR)
Eye pattern mask NA Compliant with the parameter template of

Fiber Channel physical interface (FC-PI-2)
Receiver type - PIN PIN
Operating nm 770-860 1270-1580

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -17 -18
Receiver overload dBm 0 -3
Maximum dB NA NA
reflectance
Specifications of Optical Module on the WDM Side

Table 8-7 and Table 8-8 list the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the ELOG.

System
Table 8-7 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the ELOG
Parameter Unit Specification
Channel spacing GHz 50 100
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean launched dBm 0 0

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -5 -5

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10 +10
Nominal central frequency THz 192.10 - 196.05 192.10 - 196.00,

191.35 - 196.05
Central frequency deviation GHz ±5 ±10
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3 0.3

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800 800
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with G. Compliant with G.

691 691
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650
Receiver overload dBm 0 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27
Table 8-8 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the ELOG
Channel spacing GHz 50
Line code format - NRZ

System
Maximum mean launched dBm 0

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -5

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB +10
Nominal central frequency THz 192.10 - 196.05
Central frequency deviation GHz ±5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 800
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with G.691
Receiver type - PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 - 1650
Receiver sensitivity dBm -16
Receiver overload dBm 0
Maximum reflectance dB -27
Laser Safety Level

The laser hazard level of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1 (The maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
l Dimensions (Height × Width × Depth):

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
The power consumption of the board is as follows:
l Maximum power consumption at 25°C (77°F):

– E3ELOG: 46.0 W

System
– E8ELOG: 37.8 W
– E3ELOG: 48.1 W
– E8ELOG: 41.6 W
8.2 ELOGS
ELOGS: enhanced 8-ports Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board
(AFEC SuperWDM)

The available hardware versions of the ELOGS are E3 and E8.
Version
Table 8-9 lists the version description of the ELOGS.
Table 8-9 Version description of the ELOGS
Item Description

version
Board hardware version E1, E3 and E8
Similarity E1, E3 and E8 work in the same way.
Difference l E8ELOGS supports the AFEC-2 encoding, E1ELOGS/

E3ELOGS support the AFEC encoding, the AFEC and AFEC-2
encoding mode cannot be interconnected.
l The WDM-side of E8ELOGS/E3ELOGS supports 10.71 Gbit/
s, E1ELOGS support 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s.
l E8ELOGS does not support cross-connection function, but
E1ELOGS/E3ELOGS supports.
l E8ELOGS supports GE service, but E1ELOGS/E3ELOGS
support GE/FC100/FC200 service.
l E1ELOGS does not support the transmission in the mode of
NON-IDLE stuffing bytes.
Replacement E3ELOGS can replace E1ELOGS.

E8ELOGS cannot replace E1ELOGS and E3ELOGS.
Type
NA

System
8.2.2 Application
The ELOGS is a type of optical transponder unit. The ELOGS multiplexes eight channels of
GE/ FC100 service signals or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service signals into a channel
of OTU2 signals and converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-
T G.694.1.
Figure 8-5 Application of the ELOGS in an WDM system
GE/ GE/
FC200 FC200
ELOGS G.694.1 G.694.1 ELOGS
GE/ DMUX MUX GE/
FC100 8 8 FC100

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the ELOGS are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-10 Functions and features of the ELOGS
Function and
Feature Description
Basic function E3ELOGS:

l Multiplexes up to eight channels of GE/FC100 service signals or
four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service signals into a channel
of OTU2 signals. The services of three different types can be
accessed at the same time. Converts the signals into WDM
process is similar.
support).
E8ELOGS:
l Multiplexes up to eight channels of GE service signals into a
channel of OTU2 signals. Converts the signals into WDM
process is similar.

System
Function and
Feature Description
Encoding mode Adopts superWDM, supports differential phase return to zero (DRZ)
encoding.
Band type Tunable wavelength: (DRZ) 160 channels in C band
Channel spacing 25 GHz or 50 GHz
FEC function E3ELOGS supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8ELOGS support the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.
975.1.
NOTE
Tunable wavelength DRZ: Supports tunable wavelength optical module.

function l When Minimum tunable wavelength spacing is 25 GHz, the
output WDM wavelength of the module is tunable between
192.100 THz and 196.075 THz, totally 160 wavelengths.
l When Minimum tunable wavelength spacing is 50 GHz, the

Performance Events Reference ELOG/ELOGS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference ELOG/ELOGS Board Performance
Event List.


System
Function and
Feature Description
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E3ELOGS: E4TMR, E4TMRS

E8ELOGS: E8TMR, E8TMRS

The ELOGS consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical module,
the cross-connect and service processing module or the service en/de-capsulation and processing
Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7 shows the principle block diagram of the ELOGS.

System
Figure 8-6 Principle block diagram of the E3ELOGS

Client side
GE WDM side
RX1
O/E Service
RX8
E/O OUT
processing
FC
en/de-capsulation
TX1
TX2
E/O O/E IN
TX8 Cross-connect
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack

System
Figure 8-7 Principle block diagram of the E8ELOGS
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2 O/E
RX8 Service E/O OUT
GE
TX1
TX2
E/O O/E IN
TX8
processing module
Control
Memory CPU communication

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the ELOGS unit can access the following types of optical signals:
In the signal flow of the ELOGS unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELOGS to the WDM
side of the ELOGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives four (four channels of FC200 service signals or the
access of services signals in three different types) or eight (eight channels of GE services
or FC100 service signals) channels of optical signals from the client equipment through
the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. The module then performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the four or eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the cross-
connect and service processing module. The module performs processes such as cross-
connection, multiplexing, clock generating and frame processing. Then, the module outputs
one channel of OTU2 signals.
conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s OTU2

System
optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths. The OTU2 optical signals are output
l Receive direction
s OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the
demultiplexing and cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four or eight channels of
GE/FC100/FC200 signals.
through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four or eight channels of GE/FC100/
FC200 optical signals.
10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s, and extracts clock from the electrical signals.
standard OTU2 optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock
The module consists of the GE en/de-capsulation module, the FC en/de-capsulation
module, and the cross-connect and service processing module. The service encapsulation
module en/de-capsulates signals, and cross-connects and converges services in different
types.

System
Each protection group supports the cross-connections between a maximum of four units.
the backplanes. There are 24 channels of signals between each unit and the backplane.
NOTE
E8ELOGS doesnot support the cross function.

The module consists of the GE en/de-capsulation module and service processing module.
It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals.
board.
8.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ELOGS front panel.

Figure 8-8 shows the front panel of the ELOGS.

System
Figure 8-8 ELOGS front panel
ELOGS
RUN
ALM
TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
TX3 RX3
TX4 RX4
TX5 RX5
TX6 RX6
TX7 RX7
TX8 RX8
IN OUT
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELOGS.
Table 8-11 Types and descriptions of the ELOGS interfaces
Connector


TX1-TX8 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit service

signals
RX1-RX8 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive service

signals
NOTE
For FC200 service signals, only the TX1-TX4 and RX1-RX4 optical interfaces can be used.
8.2.6 Valid Slots

The ELOGS occupies one slot.
NOTE
The ELOGS must be installed in any slot of IU1-IU4, IU9-IU12 or IU5 and IU8 when it is configured with
cross-connections of GE services. Currently the OptiX BWS 1600G does not support cross-connections
between groups.
8.2.7 Bar Code

Board.

System

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the ELOGS configuration
in an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 8-12 Display of the ELOGS optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 2
TX2/RX2 3
TX3/RX3 4
TX4/RX4 5
TX5/RX5 6
TX6/RX6 7
TX7/RX7 8
TX8/RX8 9
NOTE
8.2.9 ELOGS Board Specifications

ELOGS board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-13 and Table 8-14 list the optical module specifications on the client side of the ELOGS.

System
Table 8-13 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ELOGS (GE)
Specifications


format


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -21 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

System
Table 8-14 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ELOGS (FC100 and FC200)

type
Operating nm 770-860 1266-1360

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
spectrum width
suppression ratio
(SMSR)

Operating nm 770-860 1270-1580

wavelength range
Maximum dB NA NA
reflectance

Table 8-15 list the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the ELOGS.

System
Table 8-15 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the
ELOGS
Parameters Unit Specification
Line code format - DRZ DRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn
Maximum mean dBm 0 0

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -5 -5

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio
Central frequency THz 192.10 - 196.05 192.100 - 196.075
Central frequency GHz ±3 ±2.5

deviation
Maximum -20dB nm 0.3 0.3

spectral width
Maximum ps/nm 1000 1000

dispersion
Eye pattern mask - NA NA
Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -16 -16

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Laser Safety Level


System
345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
– E3ELOGS: 51.3 W
– E8ELOGS: 42.5 W
– E3ELOGS: 53.8 W
– E8ELOGS: 46.8 W
8.3 ETMX
ETMX: 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion unit
with AFEC.

The available hardware versions of the ETMX are E3 and E8.
Version
Table 8-16 lists the version description of the ETMX.
Table 8-16 Version description of the ETMX

Item Description

version
Board hardware version E1, E2, E3 and E8. Currently the E1 and E2 are out of
production.
Similarity E1, E2, E3 and E8 work in the same way.

System
Item Description
Difference l E8ETMX supports the AFEC-2 encoding, E2ETMX and

E3ETMX support the AFEC encoding, the AFEC and
AFEC-2 encoding mode cannot be interconnected.
l The WDM-side of E8ETMX supports 10.71 Gbit/s,
E2ETMX and E3ETMX support 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/
s.
l E8ETMX and E3EMTX doesnot support cross-connection
function, but E1ETMX and E2ETMX support.
Replacement E2ETMX can replace E1ETMX.

E8ETMX cannot replace E2ETMX and E3ETMX.
Type
NA
8.3.2 Application
The ETMX is a type of optical transponder unit. The ETMX multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 signals into an OTU2 signals. The services of two types can be accessed at the same time.
The ETMX converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
For the application of the board in WDM system, see Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Application of the ETMX in WDM system
STM-16/ STM-16/
OC-48/ 1 MUX DMUX 1 OC-48/
OTU1 OTU1
ETMX G.694.1 G.694.1 ETMX
STM-16/ STM-16/
OC-48/ 4 DMUX MUX 4 OC-48/
OTU1 OTU1

The main functions and features supported by the ETMX are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-17 Functions and features of the ETMX

Function and Description
Feature
Basic function l The client side receives four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals and
multiplexes them into one OTU2 optical signal. The services of two
different types can be accessed at the same time. Converts the optical
signal received on the client side into the standard WDM signal
compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Supports the transparent transmission of the clock signals for four
tributary signals so as to realize the asynchronous multiplexing of client-
side tributary signals into the OTU2 signal.
Encoding Supports non return to zero (NRZ) encoding.

mode

Channel l NRZ, fixed wavelength: 50 GHz or 100 GHz

spacing l NRZ, tunable wavelength: 50 GHz
FEC function E3ETMX supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8ETMX supports the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Tunable Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output WDM wavelength
wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.10 THz and 196.05 THz, totally 96
function wavelengths at an interval of 50 GHz.
Overhead Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.

processing
ESC function Supports ESC function, which can multiplex the supervisory information
into the service channel for transmission.
Alarms and l Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
performance l Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including the
events monitoring on laser bias current, laser cooling current, laser working
monitoring temperature and optical power.
For details about the alarm of the board, refer to Alarms and Performance
Events Reference ETMX/ETMXS Board Alarm List.
For details about the performance event, refer to Alarms and Performance
Events Reference ETMX/ETMXS Board Performance Event List.


System

Feature
Loopback Supports:
For details about the loopback, refer to Supporting Tasks Performing Inloop
and Outloop.
Protection Supports:
scheme l Inter-board wavelength protection
For details about the working principles of the service protections, refer to
Feature Description.
Regenerating E3ETMX: E4TMR, E4TMRS

OTU E8ETMX: E8TMR, E8TMRS
Pluggable Supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module on the
optical module client side.

The ETMX unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
module, or the service en/de-capsulation and processing module, the control and communication
module, and the power supply module.
Figure 8-10 is the functional block diagram of the ETMX unit.

System
Figure 8-10 Functional block diagram of the ETMX
Client side WDM side

RX1
OTN
RX3 O/E Service E/O OUT
RX4
processing
SDH/SONET
TX1 en/de-capsulation
TX2 E/O O/E IN
TX3
TX4
processing module
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the ETMX unit can access the following types of optical signals:
l OTU1 optical signals

l Standard STM-16 optical signals
l Standard OC-48 optical signals
In the signal flow of the ETMX unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ETMX to the WDM side
of the ETMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives four channels of optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the cross-connect
and service processing module. The module performs processes such as cross-connection,
multiplexing, clock generating and frame processing. Then, the module outputs one channel
of OTU2 signals.
conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s OTN optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths. The OTN optical signals are output through the OUT
optical interface.

System
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s OTN optical
signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical
interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
demultiplexing and cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of OTU1/
STM-16/OC-48 signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-X4
optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of standard STM-16,
OC-48, or OTU1 optical signals.
– Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of internal
electrical signals to standard STM-16, OC-48, or OTU1 optical signals.
NOTE
When the E3ETMX unit accesses OTU1 signals on the client side, the FEC function is not supported.
Hence, the FEC function should be disabled at the receive end of the equipment that is connected to
the client side of the ETMX unit.When the E8ETMX unit accesses OTU1 signals on the client side.
the FEC funtion could be setting.
– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard OTN optical signals at 10.71
Gbit/s, and extracts clock from the electrical signals.
standard OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock signals with the
electrical services signals.
The module consists of the OTN en/de-capsulation module, the SDH/SONET en/de-
capsulation module, and service processing module. The service encapsulation module
realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals.
– OTN en/de-capsulation module: Processes the G.709 overheads of OTN signals, and
reports the performance monitoring state of service signals.
– SDH/SONET en/de-capsulation module: Realizes the mapping of SDH/SONET
signals, and reports the performance monitoring state of service signals.
– Service processing module: Achieves the multiplexing from OTU1 to OTU2 and the
demultiplexing from OTU2 to OTU1, and performs processes such as encapsulation/

System

board.
8.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ETMX front panel.

Figure 8-11 shows the front panel of the ETMX.

System
Figure 8-11 ETMX front panel
ETMX ETMX
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
RX1 RX1
TX1 TX1
RX2 RX2
TX2 TX2
RX3 RX3
TX3 TX3
RX4 RX4
TX4 TX4
IN OUT
IN OUT
E3ETMX E8ETMX
Indicators


System
Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the ETMX.
Table 8-18 Types and descriptions of the ETMX interfaces
IN LC Connected to the optical demultiplexer unit or the

OADM unit to receive WDM signals
OUT LC Connected to the optical multiplexer unit or the

OADM unit to transmit WDM signals
TX1-X4 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit

service signals
RX1-RX4 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive

service signals
8.3.6 Valid Slots

The ETMX occupies one slot.
NOTE
The ETMX must be installed in any slot of IU1-IU4, IU9-IU12 or IU5 and IU8 when it is configured with
cross-connections of 2.5 Gbit/s services or wavelength cross-connection protection. Currently the OptiX
BWS 1600G does not support cross-connections between groups.
8.3.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the ETMX configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 8-19 Display of the ETMX optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
NOTE
8.3.9 ETMX Board Specifications

ETMX board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-20 and Table 8-21 list the specifications of optical module on the client of the ETMX.
Table 8-20 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ETMX (SDH/SONET)
Optical interface - I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

type
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type - MLM SLM SLM SLM

System
Target distance - 2 km (1.2 15 km (9 mi.) 40 km (25 80 km (50

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1266 - 1360 1260 - 1360 1280 - 1335 1500 - 1580

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -3 0 +3 +3

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -10 -5 -2 -2

launched power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm NA 1 1 1
spectrum width
Minimum SMSR dB NA 30 30 30
Dispersion ps/nm NA NA NA 1600

tolerance
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD APD
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Receiver overload dBm -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-21 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ETMX (OTU1)
Optical - P1I1-1D1 P1S1-1D1 P1L1-1D1 P1L1-1D2

interface
type

format

System
Optical - MLM SLM SLM SLM

source type
Target - 2 km (1.2 15 km (9 mi.) 40 km (25 80 km (50

Operating nm 1266-1360 1260-1360 1280-1335 1500-1580

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -3 0 +3 +3
mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -10 -5 -2 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm NA 1 1 1
-20 dB
spectral
width
Minimum dB NA 30 30 30
SMSR
Maximum ps/nm NA NA NA 1600

dispersion
Eye pattern - Compliant with G.959.1

mask
Receiver - PIN PIN APD APD

type
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-1650 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Receiver dBm -3 0 -9 -9
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

System

Table 8-22 and Table 8-23 list the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the
ETMX.
Table 8-22 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the ETMX

power

power

191.35 - 196.05

width

691 691

System
Table 8-23 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the ETMX

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)

System
Power Consumption

– E3ETMX: 32.2 W
– E8ETMX: 31.2 W
– E3ETMX: 35.4 W
– E8ETMX: 34.3 W
8.4 ETMXS
ETMXS: 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion unit
with AFEC (SuperWDM).

The available hardware versions of the ETMXS are E3 and E8.
Version
Table 8-24 lists the version description of the ETMXS
Table 8-24 Version description of the ETMXS
Item Description
Current board hardware version E3 and E8
Board hardware version E1, E2, E3 and E8. Currently the E1 and E2 are out
of production.
Similarity E1, E2, E3 and E8 work in the same way.
Difference l E8ETMXS supports the AFEC-2 encoding,

E2ETMXS and E3ETMXS support the AFEC
encoding, the AFEC and AFEC-2 encoding mode
cannot be interconnected.
l The WDM-side of E8ETMXS supports 10.71
Gbit/s, E2ETMXS and E3ETMXS support 10.71
Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s.
l E8ETMXS and E3EMTXdoesnot support cross-
connection function, but E1ETMXS and
E2ETMXS support.
Replacement E2ETMXS can replace E1ETMXS.

E8ETMXS cannot replace E2ETMXS and
E3ETMXS.

System
Type
NA
8.4.2 Application
The ETMXS is a type of optical transponder unit. The ETMXS multiplexes four STM-16/OTU1
signals into an OTU2 signals. The services of two different types can be accessed at the same
time. The ETMXS converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1.
Figure 8-12 Application of the ETMXS in WDM system
STM-16/ STM-16/
OC-48/ 1 MUX DMUX 1 OC-48/
OTU1 OTU1
ETMXS G.694.1 G.694.1 ETMXS
STM-16/ STM-16/
OC-48/ 4 DMUX MUX 4 OC-48/
OTU1 OTU1

The main functions and features supported by the ETMXS are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-25 Functions and features of the ETMXS

Feature
Basic function l The client side receives four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals and
multiplexes them into one OTU2 optical signal. The services of
two different types can be accessed at the same time. Converts
the optical signal received on the client side into the standard
WDM signal compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
tributary signals so as to realize the asynchronous multiplexing
of client-side tributary signals into the OTU2 signal.
encoding.

System

Feature
FEC function E3ETMXS supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.

975.1.
E8ETMXS support the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.
975.1.
NOTE

Alarms and l Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate
performance events faults.
monitoring l Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including
Performance Events Reference ETMX/ETMXS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference ETMX/ETMXS Board Performance
Event List.

Loopback l Inloop on the WDM side

Inloop and Outloop.

System

Feature
Protection scheme Supports:

Regenerating OTU E2ETMXS/E3ETMXS: E4TMR, E4TMRS

E8ETMXS: E8TMR, E8TMRS

The ETMXS unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
module, or the service en/de-capsulation and processing module, the control and communication
Figure 8-13 is the functional block diagram of the ETMXS unit.
Figure 8-13 Functional block diagram of the ETMXS

RX1
OTN
RX3 O/E Service E/O OUT
RX4
processing
SDH/SONET
TX1 en/de-capsulation
TX2 E/O O/E IN
TX3
TX4
processing module
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
The client side of the ETMXS unit can access the following types of optical signals:

In the signal flow of the ETMXS unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ETMXS to the WDM
side of the ETMXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the cross-connect
of OTU2 signals.
optical interface.
l Receive direction
signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical
demultiplexing and cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of OTU1/
STM-16/OC-48 signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
OC-48, or OTU1 optical signals.
electrical signals to standard STM-16, OC-48, or OTU1 optical signals.

System
NOTE
When the E2ETMXS/E3ETMXS unit accesses OTU1 signals on the client side, the FEC function is
not supported. Hence, the FEC function should be disabled at the receive end of the equipment that
is connected to the client side of the ETMXS unit. When the E8ETMXS unit accesses OTU1 signals
on the client side. the FEC funtion could be setting.
capsulation module, and service processing module. The service encapsulation module
realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals.
board.
8.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ETMXS front panel.

Figure 8-14 shows the front panel of the ETMXS.

System
Figure 8-14 ETMXS front panel
ETMXS ETMXS
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
RX1 RX1
TX1 TX1
RX2 RX2
TX2
TX2
RX3
RX3
TX3
TX3
RX4
RX4
TX4
TX4
IN OUT
IN OUT
E3ETMXS E8ETMXS
Indicators


System
Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the ETMXS.
Table 8-26 Types and descriptions of the ETMXS interfaces


TX1-X4 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit

service signals

service signals
8.4.6 Valid Slots

The ETMXS occupies one slot.
NOTE
The ETMXS must be installed in any slot of IU1-IU4, IU9-IU12 or IU5 and IU8 when it is configured with
cross-connections of 2.5 Gbit/s services or wavelength cross-connection protection. Currently the OptiX
BWS 1600G does not support cross-connections between groups.
8.4.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the ETMXS configuration
in an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 8-27 Display of the ETMXS optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
NOTE
8.4.9 ETMXS Board Specifications

ETMXS board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-28 and Table 8-29 list the specifications of optical module on the client side of the
ETMXS.
Table 8-28 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ETMXS (SDH/SONET)

type

System

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1266 - 1360 1260 - 1360 1280 - 1335 1500 - 1580

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
spectrum width

tolerance
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-29 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the ETMXS (OTU1)

interface
type

format

System

source type

Operating nm 1266-1360 1260-1360 1280-1335 1500-1580

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm NA 1 1 1
-20 dB
spectral
width
SMSR

dispersion

mask

type
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-1650 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

System

Table 8-30 list the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the ETMXS.
ETMXS

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio

deviation

spectral width

dispersion
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

System
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
– E3ETMXS: 34.5 W
– E8ETMXS: 38.8 W
– E3ETMXS: 37.9 W
– E8ETMXS: 42.7 W
8.5 FDG
FDG: 2-port Gigabit Ethernet wavelength conversion board with FEC.

The available hardware version of the FDG is E2.
Version
Table 8-31 lists the version description of the FDG.
Table 8-31 Version description of the FDG
Item Description
Current board E2
hardware version
Board hardware E1 and E2. Currently the E1 is out of production.

version
Similarity The E2 works in the same way as the E1.
Difference NA
Replacement The E2FDG can replace the E1FDG.

System
Type
NA
8.5.2 Application
The FDG is a type of optical transponder unit. The FDG multiplexes two channels of GE service
signals into a channel of OTU1 signals and converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-15 Application of the FDG in WDM system
GE 1 MUX DMUX 1 GE
FDG G.694.1 G.694.1 FDG

GE 2 2 GE
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the FDG are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-32 Functions and features of the FDG

Feature
Basic function Multiplexes two channels of GE service signals into a channel of

OTU1 signals. Converts the signals into a WDM standard wavelength
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is identical.

Channel spacing l NRZ, fixed wavelength: 100 GHz

FEC function Adopts the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.

System

Feature

monitoring l Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate
faults.
Performance Events Reference FDG Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference FDG Board Performance Event List.

Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E4TRC1, E1TRC2

System

The FDG unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
module, the service en/de-capsulation and processing module, the control and communication
Figure 8-16 is the functional block diagram of the FDG unit.
Figure 8-16 Functional block diagram of the FDG unit
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2 O/E E/O OUT
GE Service
TX1 E/O O/E IN
TX2
Client-side Service en/de-capsulation and WDM-side

optical module processing module optical module
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the FDG unit accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the FDG unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the FDG to the WDM side
of the FDG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives two channels of optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service en/de-
capsulation and processing module. The module performs processes such as multiplexing,
clock generating and frame processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1
signals.
conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 2.67 Gbit/s OTU1 optical signals

System
at DWDM standard wavelengths. The OTU1 optical signals are output through the OUT
optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the G.694.1-compliant 2.67 Gbit/s OTU1 optical
signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM line side through the IN optical
After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation and
processing module. The module performs processes such as decapsulation, clock recovery
and demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-X2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals.
– Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.
– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard OTU1 optical signals at 2.67
standard OTU1 optical signals at 2.67 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock signals with the
The module consists of the GE en/de-capsulation module and the service processing
module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of GE signals and service convergence.

System

board.
8.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FDG front panel.

Figure 8-17 shows the FDG front panel.
Figure 8-17 FDG front panel
FDG
RUN
ALM
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
IN OUT

System
Indicators

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the FDG.
Table 8-33 Types and descriptions of the FDG interfaces


TX1/TX2 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to

transmit service signals
RX1/RX2 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive

service signals
8.5.6 Valid Slots

The FDG occupies one slot.
8.5.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the FDG configuration in an
NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
There are three optical interfaces of the FDG.
Table 8-34 Display of the FDG optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
NOTE
8.5.9 FDG Board Specifications

FDG board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
laser safety level, mechanical specifications and power consumption.
NOTE

Table 8-35 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the FDG.
Table 8-35 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the FDG
Specifications


format


System
Specifications


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -21 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

FDG.

System
Table 8-36 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the FDG

power

power
Central frequency THz 192.10-196.00
Maximum -20dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1200-1650 1200-1650
Receiver overload dBm -9 0
Table 8-37 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the FDG
Maximum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum mean launched power dBm -10

System
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 0.2
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - APD
Receiver overload dBm -9
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
l Maximum power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 28.0

l Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F): 30.8
8.6 LBE
LBE: transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN).

System

The available hardware version of the LBE is E4.
Version
Table 8-38 lists the version description of the LBE
Table 8-38 Version description of the LBE
Item Description
Current board E4
hardware version
Board hardware E1, E2, E3 and E4. Currently the E1, E2 and E3 is out of production.
version
Similarity The E4 works in the same way as the E1, E2 and E3.
Difference The client side of the E4LBE, E3LBE and E2LBE supports the 10
Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical module but the
E1LBE does not.
Replacement The E4LBE can replace the E1LBE, E2LBE and E3LBE.
Type
NA
8.6.2 Application
The LBE is a type of optical transponder unit. The LBE accesses a channel of 10GE-LAN optical
signals on the client side and converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-18 Application of the LBE in WDM system
MUX DMUX
10GE-LAN LBE G.694.1 G.694.1 LBE 10GE-LAN
DMUX MUX

side side side side

System

The main functions and features supported by the LBE are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-39 Functions and features of the LBE

Feature
Basic function Accesses one channel of 10GE-LAN optical signals on the client
side. Converts signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.


FEC function Adopts Huawei AFEC encoding established on ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and l Provides the scrambling, CRC, defect indication and 10 GE

performance events service performance monitoring functions.
monitoring l Provides RMON statistics of Ethernet performance monitoring
function.
l Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
Performance Events Reference LBE/LBES Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LBE/LBES Board Performance
Event List.


System

Feature
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E4TMR, E4TMRS
Pluggable optical Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical
module module on the client side.

The LBE unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-19 is the functional block diagram of the LBE unit.

System
Figure 8-19 Functional block diagram of the LBE unit

RX O/E E/O OUT
10GE-LAN Service
TX E/O O/E IN
Client-side Service en/de-capsulation WDM-side

optical module and processing module optical module
Control
Power supply module CPU

Memory Communication
+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LBE unit accesses standard 10GE-LAN optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LBE unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LBE to the WDM side
of the LBE, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives optical signals from client equipment through the
RX interface, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the 10GE-LAN signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation and
processing module where encapsulation, encoding and performance reporting are
performed. Then, the signals are converted into standard OTU2 signals.
The WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the OTU2 signals. Then, the
module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s OTN optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths. The OTN optical signals are output through the OUT optical
interface.
l Receive direction

System
processing module where decoding, decapsulation, and performance reporting are
performed. Then, the signals are converted into 10GE-LAN signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion, and then outputs client-side
optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of 10GE-LAN optical signals.
– Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
10GE-LAN optical signals.
The module consists of the 10GE-LAN en/de-capsulation module and the service
processing module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of 10GE-LAN signals.
– 10GE-LAN en/de-capsulation module: Realizes the PHY layer processing, MAC frame
processing, and reports the performance monitoring state of service signals.
– Service processing module: Performs processes such as encapsulation/decapsulation of
FEC, encoding/decoding and scrambling/descrambling. The module encapsulates
signals into OTU2 frames.
board.
8.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LBE front panel.

System

Figure 8-20 shows the LBE front panel.
Figure 8-20 LBE front panel
LBE
RUN
ALM
RX
TX
IN OUT
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LBE.
Table 8-40 Types and descriptions of the LBE interfaces


TX LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit

service signals
RX LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive

service signals
8.6.6 Valid Slots

The LBE occupies one slot.
8.6.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LBE configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 8-41 Display of the LBE optical interfaces

IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 2
NOTE
8.6.9 LBE Board Specifications

LBE board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-42 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBE.
Table 8-42 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBE
Optical - 10G Base - 10G Base - 10G Base - 10G Base -

Interface type SR LR ER ZR
Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface bit rate

format
Optical source - MLM SLM SLM SLM

type
Target distance 0.3 km (0.18 10 km (6 mi.) 40 km (25 80 km (50

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 840-860 1290-1330 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength
range

System
Maximum dBm -1.3 -1 +2 +4

mean launched
power
Minimum mean dBm -7.3 -6 -4.7 0

launched power
Minimum dB 3 6 8.2 10
extinction ratio
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN APD
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -7.5 -14.4 -15.8 -24

sensitivity
Receiver dBm -1 +0.5 -1 -7

overload
Maximum dB -12 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

LBE.
Table 8-43 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBE

power

power

191.35 - 196.05

System

width

691 691
Table 8-44 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBE

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35

System
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
l Maximum power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 22.0 W
8.7 LBES
LBES: transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN) (SuperWDM).

The available hardware version of the LBES is E4.
Version
Table 8-45 lists the version description of the LBES.

System
Table 8-45 Version description of the LBES

Item Description
Current board E4
hardware version
Board hardware E1, E2, E3 and E4. Currently the E1, E2 and E3 are out of
version production.
Similarity The E4 works in the same way as the E1, E2 and E3.
Difference The client side of the E4LBES, E3LBES and E2LBES supports the
10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable (XFP) optical module but the
E1LBES does not.
Replacement The E4LBES can replace the E1LBES, E2LBES and E3LBES.
Type
NA
8.7.2 Application
The LBES is a type of optical transponder unit. The LBES accesses a channel of 10GE-LAN
optical signals at the client and converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-21 Application of the LBES in WDM system
MUX DMUX
10GE-LAN LBES G.694.1 G.694.1 LBES 10GE-LAN
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LBES are wavelength conversion and ALS.

System
Table 8-46 Functions and features of the LBES

Feature
Basic function Accesses one channel of 10GE-LAN optical signals on the client side.
Converts signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Encoding mode l Supports the RZ encoding.

l Adopts superWDM, supports differential phase return to zero
(DRZ) encoding.
Band type l Fixed wavelength: (RZ) 80 channels in C band

l Tunable wavelength: (DRZ) 160 channels in C band
Channel spacing l RZ: 100 GHz

l DRZ: 25 GHz or 50 GHz
FEC function Adopts Huawei AFEC encoding established on ITU-T G.975.


monitoring l Provides RMON statistics of Ethernet performance monitoring
function.
l Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
Performance Events Reference LBE/LBES Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LBE/LBES Board Performance
Event List.


System

Feature
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.


The LBES unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-22 is the functional block diagram of the LBES unit.

System
Figure 8-22 Functional block diagram of the LBES unit

RX O/E E/O OUT
10GE-LAN Service
TX E/O O/E IN

Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LBES unit accesses standard 10GE-LAN optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LBES unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LBES to the WDM side
of the LBES, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
the client-side optical module receives optical signals from client equipment through the
After O/E conversion, the 10GE-LAN signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation and
performed. Then, the signals are converted into standard OTU2 signals.
module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s OTN optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths. The OTN optical signals are output through the OUT optical
interface.
l Receive direction

System
processing module where decoding, decapsulation, and performance reporting are
performed. Then, the signals are converted into 10GE-LAN signals.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of 10GE-LAN optical signals.
10GE-LAN optical signals.
The module consists of the 10GE-LAN en/de-capsulation module and the service
processing module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of 10GE-LAN signals.
processing, and flow control of 10GE-LAN signals, and reports the performance
monitoring state of service signals.
board.
8.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LBES front panel.

System

Figure 8-23 shows the LBES front panel.
Figure 8-23 LBES front panel
LBES
RUN
ALM
RX
TX
IN OUT
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LBES.
Table 8-47 Types and descriptions of the LBES interfaces



service signals

service signals
8.7.6 Valid Slots

The LBES occupies one slot.
8.7.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LBES configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 8-48 Display of the LBES optical interfaces

IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 2
NOTE
8.7.9 LBES Board Specifications

LBES board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-49 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBES.
Table 8-49 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBES

Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface bit rate

format

type

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 840-860 1290-1330 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength
range

System

mean launched
power

launched power
extinction ratio
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -7.5 -14.4 -15.8 -24

sensitivity

overload
Maximum dB -12 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

LBES.
Table 8-50 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBES
Line code format - RZ RZ

power

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 12 12
Nominal central frequency THz 192.10 - 196.00 192.15 - 196.05

System

width
Table 8-51 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBES

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio

deviation

spectral width

dispersion

System
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

8.8 LBF
LBF: 10G universal transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board.

The available hardware versions of the LBF are E3 and E8.
Version
Table 8-52 lists the version description of the LBF.

System
Table 8-52 Version description of the LBF

Item Description
Current board E3 and E8

hardware version
Board hardware E1, E2, E3 and E8.

version
Similarity The E8 and E3 work in the same way as the E1 and E2.
Difference l E1LBF supports 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals on the WDM-side.

E2LBF, E3LBF and E8LBF support 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.1 Gbit/
s optical signals on the WDM-side.
l E8LBF supports the AFEC-2 encoding, E3LBF support the
AFEC encoding, the AFEC and AFEC-2 encoding mode cannot
be interconnected.
Replacement E3LBF can replace E2LBF and E1LBF.

E8LBF cannot replace E3LBF.
Type
NA
8.8.2 Application
The LBF is a type of optical transponder unit. The LBF accesses a channel of 10GE-LAN, 10GE-
WAN, STM-64, OC-192 or OTU2 optical signals on the client side and converts the signals into
a WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
For the application of the board system, see Figure 8-24.
Figure 8-24 Application of the LBF in WDM system
MUX DMUX
STM-64/OC-192/ STM-64/OC-192/
10GE-LAN/ LBF G.694.1 LBF 10GE-LAN/
10GE-WAN/ G.694.1 10GE-WAN/
OTU2 MUX OTU2
DMUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LBF are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-53 Functions and features of the LBF

Feature
Basic function l Accesses a channel of 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN, STM-64,

OC-192 or OTU2 optical signals on the client side. Converts the
10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN, STM-64, OC-192 or OTU2 signals
into a DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.
694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l E1LBF, E2LBF and E8LBF support 10GE-LAN signals
converging into signals adaptive to OTU2 interface. but E3LBF
does not support.


FEC function E3LBF supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8LBF supports the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE

faults.
Performance Events Reference LBF/LBFS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LBF/LBFS Board Performance
Event List.


System

Feature
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E3LBF: E4TMR, E4TMRS

E8LBF: E8TMR, E8TMRS

The LBF unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-25 is the functional block diagram of the LBF unit.

System
Figure 8-25 Functional block diagram of the LBF unit
OTN
Client side en/de-capsulation WDM side
RX O/E E/O OUT
SDH/SONET Service
TX E/O 10GE-LAN O/E IN

en/de-capsulation
Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LBF unit can access the following types of optical signals:
l 10GE-WAN optical signals
l 10GE-LAN optical signals
In the signal flow of the LBF unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LBF to the WDM side
of the LBF, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
According to the type of the signals accessed on the client side, the signals are sent to
different encapsulation modules where the signals are processed and performance is
reported, the service processing module encapsulates the signals into OTU2 or OTU2v
frames.
The OTU2 or OTU2v signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s

System
OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths. The OTN optical signals are output
l Receive direction
s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the
The service processing module decapsulates the signals. According to the type of the signals
decapsulated, the proper en/de-capsulation module processes the signals and reports
performance.
Module Function
l client-side optical module
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard STM-64, OC-192, 10GE-
LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2 optical signals.
– client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
standard STM-64, OC-192, 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2 optical signals.
Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s, and extracts clock from the electrical signals.
standard OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock
signals with the electrical service signals.
capsulation module, the 10GE-LAN en/de-capsulation module, and the service processing
module. The service encapsulation module realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in
different types.
– SDH/SONET en/de-capsulation module: Realizes the mapping of SDH/SONET and
10GE-WAN signals, and reports the performance monitoring state of service signals.
signals into OTU2 or OTU2v frames.

System
NOTE
The LBF board processes the accessed 10GE-LAN signals in any of the following three modes:
l The service signals are transmitted transparently (Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)). The OTU2
signals at 10.71 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side. In the case of the 10GE-LAN services in
this mode, the board supports only AFEC. (E8LBF doesnot support)
l The service signals are transmitted transparently (Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)). The
OTU2v signals at 11.1 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side. In the case of the 10GE-LAN services
in this mode, the board supports FEC and AFEC.
l The 10GE-LAN signals are converged into signals adaptive to OTU2 interfaces (MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)). The OTU2 signals at 10.71 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
In the case of the 10GE-LAN services in this mode, the board supports FEC and AFEC. (E3LBF
doesnot support)
The E3LBF/E8LBF board processes the accessed STM-64 and POS signals in the following modes:
l The OTU2 signals at 10.71 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
l The OTU2v signals at 11.1 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side. (E8LBF doesnot support)
The E3LBF/E8LBF board processes the accessed OTU2 signals in the following mode: The OTU2
signals at 10.71 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
board.
8.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LBF front panel.

Figure 8-26 shows the front panel of the LBF.

System
Figure 8-26 The front panel of the LBF
LBF LBF
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
RX
RX
TX
TX
IN OUT
IN OUT
E3LBF E8LBF
Indicators


System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LBF.
Table 8-54 Types and descriptions of the LBF interfaces

OUT LC Connected to the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM

unit to transmit WDM signals

service signals

service signals
8.8.6 Valid Slots

The LBF occupies one slot.
8.8.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LBF configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
There are four optical interfaces of the LBF.

System
Table 8-55 Display of the LBF optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 2
NOTE
8.8.9 LBF Board Specifications

LBF board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-56, Table 8-57 and Table 8-58 list the specifications of optical module on the client
side of the LBF.
Table 8-56 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBF (SDH/SONET)
Optical interface - I-64.1 - S-64.2b L-64.2

type
Optical source type - SLM SLM SLM SLM
Target distance 2 km (1.2 10 km (6 40 km (25 80km (50

mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1290-1330 1290-133 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength range 0
Maximum mean dBm -1 -1 +2 +4

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -6 -6 -1 0

launched power

System
extinction ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 1 0.3 0.3

spectrum width
Minimum side- dB 30 30 30 30
mode suppression
ratio (SMSR)
Eye pattern mask NA Compliant with G.691
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-165 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength range 0
Receiver dBm -11 -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Receiver overload dBm -1 -1 -1 -7
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-57 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBF (OTU2)
Optical interface type - P1I1-2D1 P1S1-2D2b P1L1-2D2
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type - SLM SLM SLM
Target distance - 2 km (1.2 mi.) 40 km (25 mi.) 80 km (50 mi.)
Operating wavelength nm 1290 - 1330 1530 - 1565 1530 - 1565

range
Maximum mean dBm -1 +2 +4

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -6 -1 0

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 6 8.2 9

ratio

System
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 0.3 0.3

spectral width
Minimum SMSR dB 30 30 30
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with G.959.1
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11 -14 -24
Receiver overload dBm -1 -1 -7
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27
Note: The actual transport distance of the P1I1-2D1 interface supported modules can reach
10 km.
Table 8-58 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBF (10GE-LAN)

Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface bit rate

format

type

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 840-860 1290-1330 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength
range

mean launched
power

System

launched power
extinction ratio
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -7.5 -14.4 -15.8 -24

sensitivity

overload
Maximum dB -12 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

LBF.
Table 8-59 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBF

power

power

191.35 - 196.05

System

width

691 691
Table 8-60 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBF

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35

System
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight:
– E3LBF: 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.)
– E8LBF: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
– E3LBF: 22.0 W
– E8LBF: 23.9 W
– E3LBF: 26.0 W
– E8LBF: 26.3 W
8.9 LBFS
LBFS: 10G universal transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board (SuperWDM).

The available hardware versions of the LBFS are E3 and E8.
Version
Table 8-61 lists the version description of the LBFS.

System
Table 8-61 Version description of the LBFS

Item Description

hardware version
Board hardware E1, E2, E3 and E8.

version
Similarity The E8 and E3 work in the same way as the E1 and E2.
Difference l E1LBFS supports 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals on the WDM-

side. E2LBFS and E3LBFS support 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.1 Gbit/
s optical signals on the WDM-side, E8LBFS supports 10.71
Gbit/s and 11.3 Gbit/s optical signals on the WDM-side.
l E8LBFS supports the AFEC-2 encoding, E3LBFS support the
be interconnected.
l E3LBFS and E8LBFS support FC 10G optical signals, but the
other versions don't support.
Replacement E8LBFS and E3LBFS can replace E2LBFS and E1LBFS.

E8LBFS cannot replace E3LBFS.
Type
NA
8.9.2 Application
The LBFS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LBFS accesses a channel of 10GE-LAN,
10GE-WAN, STM-64, OC-192, FC 10G or OTU2 optical signals on the client side and converts
the signals into a WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
For the application of the board system, see Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-27 Application of the LBFS in WDM system
MUX DMUX
STM-64/OC-192/ STM-64/OC-192/
10GE-LAN/ LBFS G.694.1 LBFS 10GE-LAN/
10GE-WAN/ G.694.1 10GE-WAN/
OTU2/FC 10G MUX OTU2/FC 10G
DMUX

side side side side

System

The main functions and features supported by the LBFS are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-62 Functions and features of the LBFS

Feature
Basic function l Accesses a channel of 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN, STM-64,

OC-192, FC 10G or OTU2 optical signals on the client side.
Converts the 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN, STM-64, OC-192, FC
10G or OTU2 signals into a DWDM standard wavelength
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l E1LBFS and E2LBFS support 10GE-LAN signals converging
into signals adaptive to OTU2v interface. but E3LBFS and
E8LBFS do not support.
l E1LBFS, E2LBFS and E8LBFS support 10GE-LAN signals
converging into signals adaptive to OTU2v interface. but
E3LBFS does not support.

(DRZ) encoding.


FEC function E3LBFS supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8LBFS supports the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE


System

Feature

faults.
Performance Events Reference LBF/LBFS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LBF/LBFS Board Performance
Event List.

Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E3LBFS: E4TMR, E4TMRS

E8LBFS: E8TMR, E8TMRS

The LBFS unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-28 is the functional block diagram of the LBFS unit.

System
Figure 8-28 Functional block diagram of the LBFS unit
OTN
Client side en/de-capsulation WDM side
RX O/E E/O OUT
SDH/SONET Service
TX E/O 10GE-LAN O/E IN

en/de-capsulation
Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LBFS unit can access the following types of optical signals:

l FC 10G optical signals
In the signal flow of the LBFS unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LBFS to the WDM side
of the LBFS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
reported, the service processing module encapsulates the signals into OTU2 or OTU2v
frames.

System
The OTU2 or OTU2v signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s 11.1 Gbit/s or
11.3 Gbit/s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths. The OTN optical signals
are output through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s 11.1 Gbit/s or
11.3 Gbit/s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side
through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
performance.
Module Function
l client-side optical module
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard STM-64, OC-192, 10GE-
LAN, 10GE-WAN, FC 10G or OTU2 optical signals.
– client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
standard STM-64, OC-192, 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN, FC 10G or OTU2 optical signals.
Gbit/s 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3 Gbit/s, and extracts clock from the electrical signals.
standard OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3 Gbit/s, and multiplexes
the clock signals with the electrical service signals.
capsulation module, the 10GE-LAN en/de-capsulation module, and the service processing
module. The service encapsulation module realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in
different types.
signals into OTU2 or OTU2v frames.

System
NOTE
The LBFS board processes the accessed 10GE-LAN signals in any of the following three modes:
l The service signals are transmitted transparently (Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)). The OTU2
signals at 10.71 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side. In the case of the 10GE-LAN services in
this mode, the unit supports only AFEC.
l The service signals are transmitted transparently (Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)). The
OTU2v signals at 11.1 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side. In the case of the 10GE-LAN services
in this mode, the unit supports FEC and AFEC.
l The 10GE-LAN signals are converged into signals adaptive to OTU2v interfaces (MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)). The OTU2v signals at 10.71 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
In the case of the 10GE-LAN services in this mode, the unit supports FEC and AFEC. (E3LBFS
doesnot support)
The E3LBFS/E8LBFS unit processes the accessed STM-64 and POS signals in the following modes:
l The OTU2v signals at 11.1 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
The E3LBFS board processes the accessed OTU2 signals in the following mode: The OTU2 signals
at 10.71 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
The E3LBFS/E8LBFS board processes the accessed FC 10G optical signals in the following mode:
The OTU2v signals at 11.3 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
board.
8.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LBFS front panel.

Figure 8-29 shows the front panel of the LBFS.

System
Figure 8-29 The front panel of the LBFS
LBFS LBFS
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
RX
RX
TX
TX
IN OUT
IN OUT
E3LBFS E8LBFS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LBFS.

System
Table 8-63 Types and descriptions of the LBFS interfaces




service signals

service signals
8.9.6 Valid Slots

The LBFS occupies one slot.
8.9.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LBFS configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 8-64 Display of the LBFS optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 2
NOTE
8.9.9 LBFS Board Specifications

LBFS Board Specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-65, Table 8-66, Table 8-67 and Table 8-68 list the specifications of optical module on
the client side of the LBFS.
Table 8-65 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBFS (SDH/SONET)

type

mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1290-1330 1290-133 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength range 0

launched power

launched power

System
extinction ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 1 0.3 0.3

spectrum width
mode suppression
ratio (SMSR)
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-165 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength range 0
Receiver dBm -11 -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-66 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBFS (OTU2)

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

System

spectral width

range
10 km.
Table 8-67 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBFS (10GE-LAN)

Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface bit rate

format

type

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 840-860 1290-1330 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength
range

mean launched
power

System

launched power
extinction ratio
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -7.5 -14.4 -15.8 -24

sensitivity

overload
Maximum dB -12 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-68 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LBFS (FC 10G)
Optical Interface type - - -
Optical source type - SLM SLM
Target distance - 2 km ( 1.2 mi.) 0.3 km ( 0.18 mi.)
Operating wavelength nm 1290-1330 840-860

range
Maximum mean launched dBm -1 -1.3

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -6 -7.3

power
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 1 -

width

System
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with the parameter template of Fiber

Channel physical interface (FC-PI-2)
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11 -7.5
Receiver overload dBm -1 -1

LBFS.
Table 8-69 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBFS

power

power

width

System
Table 8-70 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LBFS

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio

deviation

spectral width

dispersion
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range

sensitivity

System
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

– E3LBFS: 26.0 W
– E8LBFS: 29.3 W
– E3LBFS: 28.6 W
– E8LBFS: 32.2 W
8.10 LOG
LOG: 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board.

The available hardware version of the LOG is E3.
Version
Table 8-71 lists the version description of the LOG.
Table 8-71 Version description of the LOG
Item Description
Current Board E3
hardware version

System
Item Description
Board hardware E1, E2 and E3. Currently E1 and E2 are out of production.
version
Similarity The E3 works in the same way as the E1 and E2.
Difference l E1LOG/E3LOG accesses eight channels of GE/FC100 service

signals or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service signals on
the client side.
l E2LOG only accesses eight channels of GE service signals on
the client side.
l E1LOG does not support the transmission in the mode of NON-
IDLE stuffing bytes.
Replacement E3LOG cannot replace E1LOG and E2LOG.
Type
NA
8.10.2 Application
The LOG is a type of optical transponder unit. The LOG multiplexes eight channels of GE/
FC100 or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service signals on the client side into a channel of
G.694.1.
Figure 8-30 Application of the LOG in WDM system
GE/ GE/
FC200 FC200
LOG G.694.1 G.694.1 LOG
GE/ GE/
8 DMUX MUX 8
FC100 FC100

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LOG are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-72 Functions and features of the LOG

Feature
Basic function l The LOG mutiplexes up to eight channels of GE service signals

into a channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the signals into
WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The
reverse process is similar.
l Supports the intra-board cross-connection of eight client-side
services.
support).


FEC function Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.

Performance Events Reference LOG/LOGS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LOG/LOGS Board Performance
Event List.


System

Feature
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.


The LOG unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
module, the cross-connect and service processing module, the control and communication
Figure 8-31 is the functional block diagram of the LOG unit.

System
Figure 8-31 Functional block diagram of the LOG unit
Client side
GE WDM side
RX1
O/E Service
RX8
E/O OUT
processing
FC
en/de-capsulation
TX1
TX2
E/O O/E IN
TX8 Cross-connect
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOG unit can access the following optical signals:
In the signal flow of the LOG unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side
of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives eight channels GE/FC100 or four channels of GE/
FC100/FC200 of optical signals from the client equipment through the RX1-RX8 optical
interfaces. The module then performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the cross-connect
of OTU2 signals.

System
optical interface.
l Receive direction
demultiplexing and cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of GE/
FC100 or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 of electrical signals.
through the TX1-X8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE/FC100 or four
channels of GE/FC100/FC200 optical signals.
10.71 Gbit/s, and extracts clock from the electrical signals.
standard OTU2 optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock signals with
the electrical services signals.
The module consists of the GE en/de-capsulation module, FC en/de-capsulation module,
and the cross-connect and service processing module. The service encapsulation module
realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals, and the cross-connection and convergence of
services in different types.

System
Each protection group supports the cross-connections between a maximum of two units.
the backplanes. There are eight channels of signals between each unit and the backplane.
board.
8.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LOG front panel.

Figure 8-32 shows the LOG front panel.

System
Figure 8-32 LOG front panel
LOG
RUN
ALM
TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
TX3 RX3
TX4 RX4
TX5 RX5
TX6 RX6
TX7 RX7
TX8 RX8
IN OUT
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOG
Table 8-73 Types and descriptions of the LOG interfaces


TX1-TX8 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to


service signals
8.10.6 Valid Slots

The LOG occupies two slots.
NOTE
The LOG must be installed in any slot of IU1, IU3 or IU9, IU11 when it is configured with cross-connections
of GE services. Currently the OptiX BWS 1600G does not support cross-connections between groups.
8.10.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LOG configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot

The board occupies two slots. The slot number displayed on the T2000 is the number of the first
slot occupied by the board. For example, if the board is installed in IU1 and IU2, the slot number
displayed on the T2000 is IU1.

board front panel.
There are 9 optical interfaces of the LOG.
Table 8-74 Display of the LOG optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 2
TX2/RX2 3
TX3/RX3 4
TX4/RX4 5
TX5/RX5 6
TX6/RX6 7
TX7/RX7 8
TX8/RX8 9
NOTE
8.10.9 LOG Board Specifications

LOG board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-75 list the specifications of optical module on the client side of the LOG.

System
Table 8-75 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LOG (GE)
Specifications


format


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -21 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

Table 8-76 and Table 8-77 list the optical specifications on the WDM side of the LOG.

System
Table 8-76 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LOG

power

power

191.35 - 196.05

width

691 691
Table 8-77 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LOG

System

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption


System
8.11 LOGS
LOGS: 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board (SuperWDM).

The available hardware version of the LOGS is E3.
Version
Table 8-78 lists the version description of the LOGS.
Table 8-78 Version description of the LOG
Item Description
Current Board E3
hardware version
version
Difference l E1LOGS/E3LOGS accesses eight channels of GE/FC100

service signals or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service
signals on the client side.
l E2LOGS only accesses eight channels of GE service signals on
the client side.
l E1LOGS does not support the transmission in the mode of NON-
IDLE stuffing bytes.
Replacement E3LOGS cannot replace E1LOGS and E2LOGS.
Type
NA
8.11.2 Application
The LOGS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LOGS multiplexes eight channels of GE/
FC100 or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 service signals on the client side into a channel of
G.694.1.

System
Figure 8-33 Application of the LOGS in WDM system
GE/ GE/
FC200 FC200
LOGS G.694.1 G.694.1 LOGS
GE/ GE/
8 DMUX MUX 8
FC100 FC100

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LOGS are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-79 Functions and features of the LOGS
Function Description
and Feature
Basic l The LOGS mutiplexes up to eight channels of GE service signals into a

function channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the signals into WDM standard
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Supports the intra-board cross-connection of eight client-side services.
l Access the GE and FC100 services at the same time at 8-PORT mode.
And it can access the GE, FC100 and FC200 services at the same time at
4-PORT mode (only TX1/RX1 to TX4/RX4 support).
Encoding Adopts superWDM, supports differential phase return to zero (DRZ)

mode encoding.
Channel 25 GHz or 50 GHz

spacing
FEC function Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
Tunable DRZ: Supports tunable wavelength optical module.

wavelength l When Minimum tunable wavelength spacing is 25 GHz, the output WDM
THz, totally 160 wavelengths.
l When Minimum tunable wavelength spacing is 50 GHz, the output WDM
wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.10 THz and 196.05
THz, totally 80 wavelengths.

processing

System
and Feature
ESC function Supports ESC function, which can multiplex the supervisory information into
the service channel for transmission.
Alarms and l Provides RMON statistics of Ethernet performance monitoring function.

performance l Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
events
monitoring l Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including the
monitoring on laser bias current, laser cooling current, laser working
temperature and optical power.
Events Reference LOG/LOGS Board Alarm List.
Events Reference LOG/LOGS Board Performance Event List.

Loopback Supports:
For details about the loopback, refer to Supporting Tasks Performing Inloop
and Outloop.
Protection Supports:
scheme l Inter-board wavelength protection
For details about the working principles of the service protections, refer to
Feature Description.
Regenerating E4TMR, E4TMRS

OTU
Pluggable Supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical module on the
optical client side.
module

The LOGS unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
module, the cross-connect and service processing module, the control and communication

System
Figure 8-34 is the functional block diagram of the LOGS unit.
Figure 8-34 Functional block diagram of the LOGS unit

Client side
GE WDM side
RX1
O/E Service
RX8
E/O OUT
processing
FC
en/de-capsulation
TX1
TX2
E/O O/E IN
TX8 Cross-connect
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOGS unit can access the following types of optical signals:
In the signal flow of the LOGS unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOGS to the WDM side
of the LOGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives eight channels GE/FC100 or four channels of GE/
FC100/FC200 of optical signals from the client equipment through the RX1-RX8 optical
interfaces. The module then performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the cross-connect
of OTU2 signals.

System
optical interface.
l Receive direction
demultiplexing and cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels GE/FC100
or four channels of GE/FC100/FC200 of electrical signals.
through the TX1-X8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels GE/FC100 or four
channels of GE/FC100/FC200 optical signals.
– Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of internal
10.71 Gbit/s, and extracts clock from the electrical signals.
standard OTU2 optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock signals with
the electrical services signals.
The module consists of the GE en/de-capsulation module, FC en/de-capsulation module,
the cross-connect and service processing module. The service encapsulation module
realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals, and the cross-connection and convergence of
services in different types.

System
Each protection group supports the cross-connections between a maximum of two units.
the backplanes. There are eight channels of signals between each unit and the backplane.
board.
8.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LOGS front panel.

Figure 8-35 shows the LOGS front panel.

System
Figure 8-35 LOGS front panel
LOGS
RUN
ALM
TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
TX3 RX3
TX4 RX4
TX5 RX5
TX6 RX6
TX7 RX7
TX8 RX8
IN OUT
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOGS.
Table 8-80 Types and descriptions of the LOGS interfaces
IN LC Connected to the optical demultiplexer unit or

the OADM unit to receive WDM signals


RX1-RX8 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to

receive service signals
8.11.6 Valid Slots

The LOGS occupies two slots.
NOTE
The LOGS must be installed in any slot of IU1, IU3 or IU9, IU11 when it is configured with cross-
connections of GE services. Currently the OptiX BWS 1600G does not support cross-connections between
groups.
8.11.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LOGS configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
There are 9 optical interfaces of the LOGS.
Table 8-81 Display of the LOGS optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 2
TX2/RX2 3
TX3/RX3 4
TX4/RX4 5
TX5/RX5 6
TX6/RX6 7
TX7/RX7 8
TX8/RX8 9
NOTE
8.11.9 LOGS Board Specifications

LOGS board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

LOGS.

System
Table 8-82 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LOGS (GE)
Specifications


format


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -21 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

System
Table 8-83 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LOGS (FC)

type
Operating nm 770-860 1266-1360

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
spectrum width
suppression ratio
(SMSR)

Operating nm 770-860 1270-1580

wavelength range
Maximum dB NA NA
reflectance

Table 8-84 lists the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the LOGS.

System
Table 8-84 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LOGS

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio

deviation

spectral width

dispersion
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Laser Safety Level


System

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

8.12 LQM
LQM: 4 × Multi-rate ports wavelength conversion unit.

The available hardware version of the LQM is E2.
Version
Table 8-85 lists the version description of the LQM.
Table 8-85 Version description of the LQM
Item Description
Current Board E2
hardware version
Board hardware E1 and E2. Currently E1 is out of production.

version
Difference l The E1LQM board does not support the transmission in the
mode of NON-IDLE stuffing bytes, but the E2LQM board does.
l The E2LQM board supports the OTU1 optical single at client
side, but the E1LQM board does not support.
Replacement The E2LQM can replace the E1LQM.
Type
NA

System
8.12.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM multiplexes four 100 Mbit/s - 2.67Gbit/
s signals (the rate of E1LQM is 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and the rate of E2LQM is 100 Mbit/s
to 2.67 Gbit/s) from different sources into a channel of OTU1 signals and converts the signals
into WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-36 Application of the LQM in WDM system
1 MUX DMUX 1
100Mbit/s 100Mbit/s
LQM G.694.1 G.694.1 LQM
~2.5Gbit/s ~2.5Gbit/s
4 DMUX MUX 4

side side side side
Table 8-86 lists the service types supported by the LQM.
Table 8-86 Service types supported by the LQM
Service Type Rate Description Remarks
OC-3/STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s SONET/SDH The four pairs of optical

services interfaces on the client side are
available.
OC-12/STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s SONET/SDH The four pairs of optical

services interfaces on the client side are
available.
OC-48/STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s SONET/SDH The RX1 and TX1 interfaces on

services the client side are available.
FE (Fast 125 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet services The four pairs of optical
Ethernet) interfaces on the client side are
available.
GE 1.25 Gbit/s Ethernet services Any two pairs of optical

interfaces on the client side are
available.
ESCON 200 Mbit/s Enterprise system The four pairs of optical

connection services interfaces on the client side are
available.
FC100 (Fiber 1.06 Gbit/s Fiber channel Any two pairs of optical
Channel) services interfaces on the client side are
available.

System
Service Type Rate Description Remarks
FC200 2.12 Gbit/s Fiber channel The RX1 and TX1interfaces on

services the client side are available.
FICON (Fiber 1.06 Gbit/s Fiber connection Any two pairs of optical
Connection) services interfaces on the client side are
available.
FICON 2.12 Gbit/s Fiber connection The RX1 and TX1 interfaces on
EXPRESS services the client side are available.
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Digital video services The four pairs of optical
(Digital Video interfaces on the client side are
Broadcasting - available.
Asynchronous
Serial Interface)
OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s OTN services The RX1 and TX1interfaces on

the client side are available.
NOTE
l The LQM also supports the hybrid transmission of the services aforementioned with an overall
bandwidth of less than 2.67Gbit/s.
l Only E2LQM supports the OTU1 optical single at client side, but E1LQM does not support.

The main functions and features supported by the LQM are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-87 Functions and features of the LQM

Feature
Basic function In the transmit direction, the LQM unit multiplexes four 100 Mbit/s
- 2.67Gbit/s signals (the rate of E1LQM is 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
and the rate of E2LQM is 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) from different
sources into one channel of OTU1 signal. Then, this signal is
converted into the optical signal with ITU-T G.694.1-compliant
standard wavelength. In the receive direction, it performs the reverse.



System

Feature

faults.
Performance Events Reference LQM Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LQM Board Performance Event List.

Loopback l Inloop on the WDM side

Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E4TRC1

System
NOTE
l If the E1LQM board is deleted on the T2000, the configuration information will disappear and the
board will recover to default configuration after it is configured again on the T2000, that is, the service
at client side of the board is NULL.
l The E1LQM supports only manual timeslot assignment, and the E2LQM supports both manual and
automatic timeslot assignment. When the two boards are interconnected, the timeslot assignment mode
must be the same.
CAUTION
The E2LQM board supports regeneration of optical signals. When the E2LQM board is used as
regeneration board, only OTU1 service can be accessed at the client side, otherwise, the ESC
communication on the client side will be interrupted.

The LQM unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-37 is the functional block diagram of the LQM unit.
Figure 8-37 Functional block diagram of the LQM unit
Client side
RX1 WDM side
RX2 O/E E/O
RX3 OUT
RX4 Service Service
TX1
TX2 E/O O/E IN
TX3
TX4
Client-side Service en/de-capsulation and
WDM-side
optical module processing module
optical module
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM unit can access any optical signals (the rate of E1LQM range from
100 Mbit/s through 2.5 Gbit/s and the rate of E2LQM range from 100 Mbit/s through 2.67 Gbit/
s).
In the signal flow of the LQM unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side
of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
equipment through the RX1–RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the service en/de-
capsulation and processing module. The module performs processes such as multiplexing,
clock generating and frame processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1
signals.
conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 2.67 Gbit/s optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical
interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the G.694.1-compliant 2.67 Gbit/s optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM line side through the IN optical interface.
Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation and processing
module. The module performs processes such as decapsulation, clock recovery and
demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs four channels of electrical signals at any rate.
signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1–TX4
optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of four channels of optical signals in
any format.
electrical signals to optical signals in any format.
– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of optical signals at 2.67 Gbit/s, and
extracts clock from the electrical signals.
optical signals at 2.67 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock signals with the electrical
services signals.

System

The module consists of the service en/de-capsulation module and the service processing
module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in any format and service convergence.
– Service en/de-capsulation module: Processes the overheads of signals in any format,
and reports the performance monitoring state of service signals.
– Service processing module: Achieves the multiplexing from signals in any format to
signals in OTU1 format and the demultiplexing from signals in OTU1 format to signals
in any format, and performs processes such as encapsulation/decapsulation of FEC,
encoding/decoding and scrambling/descrambling.
board.
8.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQM front panel.

Figure 8-38 shows the LQM front panel.

System
Figure 8-38 LQM front panel
LQM
RUN
ALM
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX3
TX3
RX4
TX4
IN OUT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicators
Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQM.

System
Table 8-88 Types and descriptions of the LQM interfaces


TX1–TX4 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit

service signals
RX1–RX4 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive

service signals
8.12.6 Valid Slots

The LQM occupies one slot.
8.12.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LQM configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
There are five optical interfaces of the LQM.
Table 8-89 Display of the LQM optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1

System
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
NOTE
8.12.9 LQM Board Specifications

LQM board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-90, Table 8-91, Table 8-92 and Table 8-93 list the specifications of optical module on
the client side of the LQM.
Table 8-90 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LQM (GE)
Specifications


format


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

System
Specifications

Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -21 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Table 8-91 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LQM (SDH/SONET)
Optical Interface - S-4.1 L-4.1 I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

type
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source - MLM SLM MLM SLM SLM SLM

type
Target distance - 15 km 40 km 2 km 15 km (9 40 km 80 km
(9 mi.) (25 (1.2 mi.) (25 (50 mi.)
mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1274-1 1280-1 1266-1 1260-1 1280-1 1500-1

wavelength range 356 335 360 360 335 580

System
Maximum mean dBm -8 +2 -3 0 +3 +3

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -15 -3 -10 -5 -2 -2

launched power
Minimum dB 8.2 10 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm NA 1 NA 1 1 1
spectrum width
Minimum SMSR dB NA 30 NA 30 30 30
Dispersion ps/nm NA NA NA ni bupa NA 1600

tolerance touNA
Receiver type - APD APD PIN PIN APD APD
Operating nm 1200-1 1200-1 1200-1 1200-1 1200-1 1200-1

wavelength range 650 650 650 650 650 650
Receiver dBm -28 -28 -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Receiver overload dBm -8 -8 -3 0 -9 -9
Maximum dB -27 -14 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Remark - - - The optical interface type is just used as

a reference to the physical parameters of
the optical interface. It does not indicate
that the optical interface supports only
the service of this type.
This module can compatibly access
services such as the STM-16/OC-48 and
HDTV services.
Table 8-92 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LQM (FC)

type

System
Operating nm 770-860 1266-1360

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
spectrum width
suppression ratio
(SMSR)

Operating nm 770-860 1270-1580

wavelength range
Maximum dB NA NA
reflectance
Table 8-93 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LQM (ESCON and other
services)
Target distance - 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9 mi.)
Operating nm 1266-1360 1266-1360

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -14 -8

launched power

System

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2

ratio
spectrum width
suppression ratio
(SMSR)
Eye pattern mask NA NA
Receiver type - APD APD
Operating nm 1200-1650 1270-1650

wavelength range
Receiver overload dBm -14 -8
Maximum dB NA NA
reflectance
Remark: This module can compatibly access services such as the ESCON, DVB-ASI and FE
services.

LQM.
Table 8-94 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LQM
Maximum mean launched dBm -1

power

power

System
Maximum -20dB spectral nm 0.2

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Table 8-95 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LQM
Maximum mean launched power dBm +3
Minimum SMSR dB 35

System
Receiver type - APD
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
8.13 LU40
LU40: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion board with AFEC function

The available hardware version of the LU40 is E1.
Version
Table 8-96 lists the version description of the LU40.

System
Table 8-96 Version description of the LU40

Item Description
Board hardware version E1
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA
8.13.2 Application
The LU40 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LU40 realizes the conversion between
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals and ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendation-compliant
WDM signals.
Figure 8-39 Application of the LU40 in an WDM system
MUX DMUX
STM-256/ STM-256/
OC-768/ LU40 G.694.1 G.694.1 LU40 OC-768/
OTU3 OTU3
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LU40 are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-97 Functions and features of the LU40

Function and
Feature Description
Basic function The LU40 provides the STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signal wavelength

conversion function. The client side accesses one STM-256/OC-768/
OTU3 service signal; the WDM side outputs one 43.02 Gbit/s
standard-wavelength OTU3 signal with AFEC. The reverse process
is similar.
Encoding mode
Band type l ODB: 80 wavelengths in C band
Channel spacing l ODB: 50 GHz
FEC function Supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
Tunable wavelength l ODB: Supports 80 tunable wavelengths (192.10-196.05 THz).

function
Alarms and l Monitors B1, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
performance events l Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including
monitoring the monitoring on laser bias current, laser cooling current, laser
Performance Events Reference LU40 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LU40 Board Performance Event
List.

TDC function The board supports TDC (tunable dispersion compensator) module
to adjust dispersion precisely and use TDC dispersion real-time
adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission fibers caused
by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

System
Function and
Feature Description

Regenerating OTU E1LUR40
Pluggable optical -
module

The LU40 consists of five modules, the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-40 shows the principle block diagram of the LU40.
Figure 8-40 Principle block diagram of the LU40
OTN
en/de-capsulation
RX O/E E/O OUT
Service
processing
SDH/SONET
TX E/O en/de-capsulation O/E IN

Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack

System
Signal flow
The client side of the LU40 unit can access the following types of optical signals:
l Standard STM-256 optical signal
l Standard OC-768 optical signal
l OTU3 optical signal
The signal flows of the LU40 include the signal flow in the transmit direction and that in the
receive direction. The transmit direction refers to a direction from the client side of the LU40 to
the WDM side of the unit; the receive direction reverses the transmit direction.
l In the transmit direction:

The client-side optical module receives through RX the optical signals from client
equipment and performs O/E conversion.
According to the type of the signals accessed on the client-side, the signals are sent to
reported, the service processing module encapsulates the signals into OTU3 frames.
optical interface.
l In the receive direction:
The WDM-side optical module receives through IN the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant 43.02
Gbit/s standard WDM OTN frame optical wavelength signal accessed from the WDM line
and performs the O/E conversion.
performance.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the signal and outputs the
converted standard STM-256/OC-768 or OTU3 optical signal through TX.
Module function
– Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of a standard STM-256/OC-768 or
OTU3 optical signal.
– Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from an internal electrical signal
into a standard STM-256/OC-768 or OTU3 optical signal.
– WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of a 43.02 Gbit/s standard OTN
frame optical signal and the clipping amplification and clock extraction of the electrical
signal after conversion.

System
– WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from an internal electrical signal
into a 43.02 Gbit/s standard OTN frame optical signal and the multiplexing of the
electrical service signal and clock signal before conversion.
The module consists of the SDH/SONET en/de-capsulation module and the service
processing module, which encapsulates and decapsulates signals.
– Service processing module: Performs processes such as encapsulation/decapsulation,
encoding/decoding and scrambling/descrambling for AFEC. The module encapsulates
signals in OTU3 format.
board.
8.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LU40 front panel.

Figure 8-41 shows the front panel of the LU40.

System
Figure 8-41 LU40 front panel
LU40
RUN
ALM
Tx OUT
Rx IN
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LU40. Table 8-98 lists the type and
function of each interface.
Table 8-98 Types and descriptions of the LU40 interfaces

Connector


TX LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit service

signals
RX LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive service

signals
8.13.6 Valid Slots

The LU40 occupies two slots.
8.13.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LU40 configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 8-99 Display of the LU40 optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
RX/TX 2
NOTE
8.13.9 LU40 Board Specifications

LU40 board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-100 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the LU40.
Table 8-100 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LU40
Optical Interface type - VSR2000-3R2
Target distance - 2 km (1.2 mi.)
Operating wavelength range nm 1530-1565
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectrum width nm 1
Minimum side-mode suppression ratio (SMSR) dB 35

System
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver overload dBm +3

Table 8-101 lists the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the LU40.
Table 8-101 Specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the LU40
Line code format - ODB a
Minimum extinction ratio dB +8.2
Nominal Central frequency THz 192.10-196.05
Central frequency deviation GHz ±2.5
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Maximum dispersion ps/nm -500 to +500
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity (with FEC open) EOL dBm -16
Receiver overload (with FEC open) dBm 0
a: ODB can be used in 100G Hz system, the dispersion windows are -600 to 300 pd/nm and
-300 to 600 ps/nm.

System
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

l Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F):77.0 W
8.14 LU40S
LU40S: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion board with AFEC function (SuperWDM)

The available hardware version of the LU40S is E1.
Version
Table 8-102 lists the version description of the LU40S.
Table 8-102 Version description of the LU40S
Item Description
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA

System
8.14.2 Application
The LU40S is a type of optical transponder unit. The LU40S realizes the conversion between
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals and ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendation-compliant
WDM signals.
Figure 8-42 Application of the LU40S in an WDM system
MUX DMUX
STM-256/
STM-256/
OC-768/ LU40S G.694.1 G.694.1 LU40S OC-768/
OTU3
OTU3
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LU40S are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-103 Functions and features of the LU40S
Function and
Feature Description
Basic function The LU40S provides the STM-256/OTU3 signal wavelength

conversion function. The client side accesses one STM-256/OTU3
service signal; the WDM side outputs one 43.02 Gbit/s standard-
wavelength OTU3 signal with AFEC. The reverse process is similar.
Encoding mode Supports the eDQPSK encoding.
Band type eDQPSK: 80 wavelengths in C band
Channel spacing eDQPSK: 50 GHz
Tunable eDQPSK: Supports 80 tunable wavelengths (192.10-196.05 THz).

wavelength
function

processing

System
Function and
Feature Description
performance l Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including the
events monitoring on laser bias current, laser cooling current, laser working
monitoring temperature and optical power.
Performance Events Reference LU40S Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LU40S Board Performance Event List.

TDC function The board supports TDC (tunable dispersion compensator) module to
adjust dispersion precisely and use TDC dispersion real-time
adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission fibers caused by
changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

For details about the working principles of the service protections, refer
to Feature Description.
Regenerating OTU E1LUR40S
Pluggable optical -
module

The LU40S consists of five modules, the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical

System
Figure 8-43 shows the principle block diagram of the LU40S.
Figure 8-43 Principle block diagram of the LU40S
OTN
en/de-capsulation
RX O/E E/O OUT
Service
processing
SDH/SONET
TX E/O en/de-capsulation O/E IN

Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal flow
The client side of the LU40S unit can access the following types of optical signals:
l Standard STM-256 optical signal
l Standard OC-768 optical signal
l OTU3 optical signal
The signal flows of the LU40S include the signal flow in the transmit direction and that in the
receive direction. The transmit direction refers to a direction from the client side of the LU40S
to the WDM side of the unit; the receive direction reverses the transmit direction.
l In the transmit direction:

The client-side optical module receives through RX the optical signals from client
equipment and performs O/E conversion.
According to the type of the signals accessed on the client-side, the signals are sent to
reported, the service processing module encapsulates the signals into OTU3 frames.

System
optical interface.
l In the receive direction:
The WDM-side optical module receives through IN the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant 43.02
Gbit/s standard WDM OTN frame optical wavelength signal accessed from the WDM line
and performs the O/E conversion.
performance.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the signal and outputs the
converted standard STM-256/OC-768 or OTU3 optical signal through TX.
Module function
Performs O/E conversion of standard G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths.
– Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of a standard STM-256/OC-768 or
OTU3 optical signal.
– Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from an internal electrical signal
into a standard STM-256/OC-768 or OTU3 optical signal.
– WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of a 43.02 Gbit/s standard OTN
frame optical signal and the clipping amplification and clock extraction of the electrical
signal after conversion.
– WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from an internal electrical signal
into a 43.02 Gbit/s standard OTN frame optical signal and the multiplexing of the
electrical service signal and clock signal before conversion.
processing module, which encapsulates and decapsulates signals.
– Service processing module: Performs processes such as encapsulation/decapsulation,
encoding/decoding and scrambling/descrambling for AFEC. The module encapsulates
signals in OTU3 format.

System

board.
8.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LU40S front panel.

Figure 8-44 shows the front panel of the LU40S.
Figure 8-44 LU40S front panel
LU40S
RUN
ALM
Tx OUT
Rx IN

System
Indicators

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LU40S. Table 8-104 lists the type and
Table 8-104 Types and descriptions of the LU40S interfaces
Connector

OUT LC Connected to the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM

unit to transmit WDM signals

service signals
RX LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive service

signals
8.14.6 Valid Slots

The LU40S occupies two slots.
8.14.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LU40S configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


Table 8-105 lists the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on
the board front panel.
Table 8-105 Display of the LU40S optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
RX/TX 2
NOTE
8.14.9 LU40S Board Specifications

LU40S board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-106 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the LU40S.
Table 8-106 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LU40S
Optical Interface type - VSR2000-3R2
Target distance - 2 km (1.2 mi.)

System
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectrum width nm 1
Minimum side-mode suppression ratio (SMSR) dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver overload dBm +3

Table 8-107 lists the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the LU40S.
Table 8-107 Specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the LU40S
Line code format - eDQPSK
Minimum power dBm -5
Minimum extinction ratio dB NA
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm NA
Minimum SMSR dB 35

System
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

8.15 LUR40
LUR40: 40G transmit-receive line universal wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function

The available hardware version of the LUR40 is E1.
Version
Table 8-108 lists the version description of the LUR40.
Table 8-108 Version description of the LUR40
Item Description

System
Item Description
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA
8.15.2 Application
The LUR40 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LUR40 is used in an REG station to
regenerate corresponding optical signals.
Figure 8-45 Application of the LUR40 in an WDM system

WDM WDM
side side
DMUX LUR40 MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX LUR40 DMUX
WDM WDM
side side

The main functions and features supported by the LUR40 are regenerating, wavelength
conversion, tunable wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-109 Functions and features of the LUR40
Function and
Feature Description
Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate OTU3/OTU3e optical signals.
Regenerating rate 43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57 Gbit/s
Relative OTU E1LU40, E1TMX40

System
Function and
Feature Description
Encoding mode Supports the ODB or DRZ encoding.
Tunable wavelength l ODB: Supports 80 tunable wavelengths (192.10 - 196.05 THz).

function
ESC function -
Alarms and l Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
Performance Events Reference LUR40/LUR40S Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LUR40/LUR40S Board
Performance Event List.

Loopback -
Protection mode -

The LUR40 consists of five modules: the WDM-side optical module, the service en/de-
capsulation and processing module, the control and communication module, and the power
supply module.
Figure 8-46 shows the principle block diagram of the LUR40.

System
Figure 8-46 Principle block diagram of the LUR40
WDM side WDM side

O/E Overhead E/O
IN Decoding Encoding OUT
processing
Optical receive Optical transmit

module module
Service processing module
Control

Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
DC power supply from a SCC
subrack
Signal flow
The unit realizes the regeneration of a channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths
at the transmit and ends of the board are the signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
interface, and performs O/E conversion.
The service processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals.
During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTU3/OTU3e frames.
After being encoded, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57
Gbit/s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths. The optical signals are output
Module function
l Optical receive module
l Optical transmit module
– Performs the E/O conversion from electrical signals to standard OTN optical signals at
43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57 Gbit/s.

System

l Service processing module
The module consists of the decoding, the overhead processing and the encoding modules.
The service processing module encodes or decodes signals and processes overheads.
– Decoding module: Performs the FEC decoding mapping of signals, and reports the
performance detection state of the WDM-side signals.
– Encoding module: Performs encapsulation of FEC, encoding and scrambling. It
encapsulates signals into OTU3/OTU3e frames.
– Overhead processing module: Processes G.709 overheads, and reports the performance
detection state of the WDM-side signals.
board.
8.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LUR40 front panel.

Figure 8-47 shows the front panel of the LUR40.

System
Figure 8-47 LUR40 front panel
LUR40
RUN
ALM
IN OUT
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are twooptical interfaces on the front panel of the LUR40. Table 8-110 lists the type and
Table 8-110 Types and descriptions of the LUR40 interfaces

Connector


8.15.6 Valid Slots

The LUR40 occupies two slots.
8.15.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LUR40 configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 8-111 Display of the LUR40 optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
NOTE
8.15.9 LUR40 Board Specifications

LUR40 board specifications include specifications of optical module on the WDM sides, laser
safety level, mechanical specifications and power consumption.
NOTE

Table 8-112 lists the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the LUR40.
Table 8-112 Specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the LUR40
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN

System
-300 to 600 ps/nm.
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 3.09 kg (6.79 lb.)
Power Consumption
8.16 LUR40S
LUR40S: 40G transmit-receive line universal wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function
(SuperWDM)

The available hardware version of the LUR40S is E1.
Version
Table 8-113 lists the version description of the LUR40S.

System
Table 8-113 Version description of the LUR40S
Item Description
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA
8.16.2 Application
The LUR40S is a type of optical transponder unit. The LUR40S is used in an REG station to
Figure 8-48 Application of the LUR40S in an WDM system

WDM WDM
side side
DMUX LUR40S MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX LUR40S DMUX
WDM WDM
side side

The main functions and features supported by the LUR40S are regenerating, wavelength
conversion, tunable wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-114 Functions and features of the LUR40S
Function and
Feature Description
Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate OTU3/OTU3e optical signals.

System
Function and
Feature Description
Regenerating rate 43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57 Gbit/s
Relative OTU E1LU40S, E1TMX40S
Tunable wavelength eDQPSK: Supports 80 tunable wavelengths (192.10 - 196.05 THz).

function
ESC function -
Performance Events Reference LUR40/LUR40S Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LUR40/LUR40S Board

Loopback -
Protection mode -

The LUR40S consists of five modules: the WDM-side optical module, the service en/de-
capsulation and processing module, the control and communication module, and the power
supply module.
Figure 8-49 shows the principle block diagram of the LUR40S.

System
Figure 8-49 Principle block diagram of the LUR40S
WDM side WDM side

O/E Overhead E/O
processing

module module
Control

Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
DC power supply from a SCC
subrack
Signal flow
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTU3/OTU3e frames.
After being encoded, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57
Gbit/s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths. The optical signals are output
Module function
43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57 Gbit/s.

System

The module consists of the decoding, the overhead processing and the encoding modules.
The service processing module encodes or decodes signals and processes overheads.
encapsulates signals into OTU3/OTU3e frames.
detection state of the WDM-side signals.
board.
8.16.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LUR40S front panel.

Figure 8-50 shows the front panel of the LUR40S.

System
Figure 8-50 LUR40S front panel
LUR40S
RUN
ALM
IN OUT
Indicators

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LUR40S. Table 8-115 lists the type
and function of each interface.

System
Table 8-115 Types and descriptions of the LUR40S interfaces
Connector


8.16.6 Valid Slots

The LUR40S occupies two slots.
8.16.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LUR40S configuration
in an NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 8-116 Display of the LUR40S optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1

System
NOTE
8.16.9 LUR40S Board Specifications

LUR40S board specifications include specifications of optical module on the submarine sides,
NOTE
Specifications of Optical Module on the submarine Side

Table 8-117 lists the specifications of optical module on the submarine side of the LUR40S.
Table 8-117 Specifications of optical module on the submarine side of the LUR40S
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN

System
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 3.75 kg (8.24 lb.)
Power Consumption
8.17 LWC1
LWC1: STM-16/OTU1 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board

The available hardware version of the LWC1 is E4.
Version
Table 8-118 lists the version description of the LWC1.
Table 8-118 Version description of the LWC1

Item Description
Current board E4
hardware version
Board hardware E2, E3, and E4. Currently the E2 is out of production.
version
Similarity E4LWC1 works in the same way as E2LWC1 and E3LWC1.

System
Item Description
Difference l The client side of the E3LWC1/E4LWC1 accesses the STM-16/

OC48/OTU1 signals. The client side of the E2LWC1 accesses
the STM-16/OC48 signals.
l The E3LWC1/E4LWC1 supports the client-side SFP module but
the E2LWC1 does not.
l The E3LWC1/E4LWC1 supports the inloop on the WDM side,
outloop on the WDM side, the inloop on the client side and the
outloop on the client side. But the E2LWC1 does not support the
inloop on the WDM side.
Replacement The E4LWC1 can replace the E2LWC1 and E3LWC1.
Type
NA
8.17.2 Application
The LWC1 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWC1 accesses STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
optical signals compliant with ITU-T G.957 on the client side and converts the signals into OTU1
optical signals and outputs WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-51 Application of the LWC1 in WDM system
MUX DMUX
STM-16/ STM-16/
OC48/ LWC1 G.694.1 G.694.1 LWC1 OC48/
OTU1 OTU1
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LWC1 are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-119 Functions and features of the LWC1

Feature
Basic function Accesses STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals compliant with

ITU-T G.957 on the client side. Converts the signals into OTU1
optical signals and outputs a WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is identical.


function wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.10 THz and
196.05 THz, totally 80 wavelengths at an interval of 50 GHz.
Performance Events Reference LWC1 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LWC1 Board Performance Event
List.

Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

System

Feature

Regenerating OTU E4TRC1

The LWC1 unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-52 is the functional block diagram of the LWC1 unit.
Figure 8-52 Functional block diagram of the LWC1 unit

OTN
RX O/E en/de-capsulation E/O OUT
Service
processing
TX SDH/SONET IN
E/O O/E
en/de-capsulation

Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWC1 unit can access the following optical signals:

In the signal flow of the LWC1 unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWC1 to the WDM side
of the LWC1, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
reported. The service processing module encapsulates the signals into OTU1 frames.
optical interface.
l Receive direction
performance.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard STM-16, OC-48, or OTU1
optical signals.
standard STM-16, OC-48, or OTU1 optical signals.

System

capsulation module, and the service processing module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation
of signals in different types.
board.
8.17.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWC1 front panel.

Figure 8-53 shows the LWC1 front panel.

System
Figure 8-53 LWC1 front panel
LWC1
RUN
ALM
RX
TX
IN OUT
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWC1.
Table 8-120 Types and descriptions of the LWC1 interfaces



service signals

service signals
8.17.6 Valid Slots

The LWC1 occupies one slot.
8.17.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LWC1 configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


There are two optical interfaces of the LWC1.

System
Table 8-121 Display of the LWC1 optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 2
NOTE
8.17.9 LWC1 Board Specifications

LWC1 board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

LWC1.
Table 8-122 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LWC1 (SDH/SONET)

type

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1266 - 1360 1260 - 1360 1280 - 1335 1500 - 1580

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

System
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
spectrum width

tolerance
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-123 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LWC1 (OTU1)

interface
type

format

source type

Operating nm 1266-1360 1260-1360 1280-1335 1500-1580

wavelength
range

System
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm NA 1 1 1
-20 dB
spectral
width
SMSR

dispersion

mask

type
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-1650 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

LWC1.

System
Table 8-124 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LWC1

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
LWC1

System
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - APD
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
8.18 LWF
LWF: STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function.

System

The available hardware versions of the LWF are E7 and E8.
Version
Table 8-126 lists the version description of the LWF.
Table 8-126 Version description of the LWF

Item Description

hardware version
Board hardware E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7 and E8. Currently E2, E3, E4, E5 and E6 are
version out of production.
Similarity E7 and E8 work in the same way as E2, E3, E4, E5 and E6.
Difference l E2, E6, E8 and E3, E4, E5, E7 adopt different error correction
encoding methods. E2 and E6 adopts FEC, E3, E4 and E5 and
E7 adopts AFEC, E8 adopt AFEC-2, the FEC, AFEC and
AFEC-2 cannot be interconnected.
l E8, E7, E5, E4, E3 support MS-AIS detecting, but E2 and E6
does not.
l E3, E4, E5 and E7 support the AFEC mode setting and FEC mode
setting, E8 supports the AFEC-2 mode setting and FEC mode
setting.
l E4, E5, E6, E7 and E8 support client-side XFP module, but E2
and E3 do not.
l E8 and E6 support 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals on the WDM-side.
E7 support 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.1 Gbit/s optical signals on the
WDM-side.
Replacement l E6 can replace the E2, and E7 can replace the E3, E4,and E5.
l When connecting E8, E7, E5, E4 or E3 with E2, E6 on the WDM
side, set the error correction encoding of the E8, E7, E5, E4 or
E3 to FEC instead of FEC.
l E8 and E7, E6 cannot replace each other.
Type
NA
8.18.2 Application
The LWF is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWF realizes the conversion between
STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN optical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals.

System
Figure 8-54 Application of the LWF in WDM system
MUX DMUX
STM-64/ STM-64/
OC-192/ LWF G.694.1 G.694.1 LWF OC-192/
10GE-WAN 10GE-WAN
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LWF are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-127 Functions and features of the LWF

Feature
Basic function Accesses STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN optical signals on the client

side. Converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1.The reverse process is similar.


FEC function l E7LWF: supportS the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.

975.1.
l E8LWF: supportS the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.
975.1.
NOTE
The FEC encoding, AFEC encoding and AFEC-2 encoding cannot be
interconnected.

System

Feature
Performance Events Reference LWF/LWFS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LWF/LWFS Board Performance
Event List.

Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E7LWF: E4TMR, E4TMRS

E8LWF: E8TMR, E8TMRS

The LWF unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-55 is the functional block diagram of the LWF unit.

System
Figure 8-55 Functional block diagram of the LWF unit

RX O/E E/O OUT
SDH/SONET Service
TX E/O O/E IN

Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWF unit can access the following types of optical signals:

In the signal flow of the LWF unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWF to the WDM side
of the LWF, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
After O/E conversion, the SDH/SONET signals are sent to the service encapsulation and
performed. The signals are then converted into OTU2 signals.
module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s OTN optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical
interface.
l Receive direction

System
sOTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the service decapsulation and processing
module where decoding, decapsulation, and performance reporting are performed. Then,
the signals are converted into SDH/SONET signals.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard STM-64 or OC-192 optical
signals.
standard STM-64 or OC-192 optical signals.
processing module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in different types.
NOTE
The E7LWF board processes the accessed signals in any of the following two modes(The E8LWF
doesnot the OTU2v signal):

System

board.
8.18.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWF front panel.

Figure 8-56 shows the LWF front panel.

System
Figure 8-56 LWF front panel
LWF LWF
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
RX
RX
TX
TX
IN OUT
IN OUT
E7LWF E8LWF
Indicators


System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWF.
Table 8-128 Types and descriptions of the LWF interfaces


TX LC Connected to the client-side equipment to

RX LC Connected to the client-side equipment to

receive service signals
8.18.6 Valid Slots

The LWF occupies one slot.
8.18.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LWF configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 8-129 Display of the LWF optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 2
NOTE
8.18.9 LWF Board Specifications

LWF board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-130 lists the optical specifications on the client side of the LWF.
Table 8-130 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LWF

type

mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1290-1330 1290-133 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength range 0

launched power

launched power
extinction ratio

System
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 1 0.3 0.3

spectrum width
mode suppression
ratio (SMSR)
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-165 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength range 0
Receiver dBm -11 -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

Table 8-131 and Table 8-132 list the optical specifications on the WDM side of the LWF.
Table 8-131 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LWF

power

power

191.35 - 196.05

System

width

691 691
Table 8-132 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LWF

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35

System
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight:
– E7LWF: 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.)
– E8LWF: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption

– E7LWF: 22.0 W
– E8LWF: 23.9 W
– E7LWF: 26.0 W
– E8LWF: 26.3 W
8.19 LWFS
LWFS: STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function
(SuperWDM).

The available hardware versions of the LWFS are E7 and E8.

System
Version
Table 8-133 lists the version description of the LWFS.
Table 8-133 Version description of the LWFS

Item Description

hardware version
Board hardware E2, E3, E4, E5, E7 and E8. Currently E2, E3, E4 and E5 are out of
version production.
Similarity E7 and E8 work in the same way as E2, E3, E4 and E5.
Difference l E2 and the E3, E4, E5, E7 and E8 adopt different error correction
encoding methods. E2 adopts FEC, E3, E4, E5 and E7 adopts
AFEC, E8 adopt AFEC-2, the FEC, AFEC and AFEC-2 cannot
be interconnected.
l E8, E7, E5, E4 and E3 support MS-AIS detecting, but E2 does
not.
l E3, E4, E5 and E7 support the AFEC mode setting and FEC
mode setting, E8 supports the AFEC-2 mode setting and FEC
mode setting.
l E4, E5, E7 and E8 supports client-side XFP module, but E2 and
E3 do not.
l E8 and E6 support 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals on the WDM-
side. E7 support 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.1 Gbit/s optical signals on
the WDM-side.
Replacement l The E7 can replace the E2, E3, E4 and E5.

l When connecting the E8, E7, E5, E4 or E3 with the E2 on the
WDM side, set the error correction encoding of the E8, E7, E5,
E4 or E3 to FEC instead of FEC.
l E8 and E7 cannot replace each other.
Type
NA
8.19.2 Application
The LWFS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWFS realizes the conversion between
STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN optical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM
signals.

System
Figure 8-57 Application of the LWFS in WDM system
MUX DMUX
STM-64/ STM-64/
OC-192/ LWFS G.694.1 G.694.1 LWFS OC-192/
10GE-WAN 10GE-WAN
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LWFS are wavelength conversion and ALS.
Table 8-134 Functions and features of the LWFS

Feature
Basic function Accesses STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN optical signals on the client

side. Converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1.The reverse process is similar.

(DRZ) encoding.


FEC function E8LWF supports the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8LWF supports the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE


System

Feature
Performance Events Reference LWF/LWFS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LWF/LWFS Board Performance
Event List.

Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Regenerating OTU E7LWFS: E4TMR, E4TMRS

E8LWFS: E8TMR, E8TMRS

The LWFS unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-58 is the functional block diagram of the LWFS unit.

System
Figure 8-58 Functional block diagram of the LWFS unit

RX O/E E/O OUT
SDH/SONET Service
TX E/O O/E IN

Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWFS unit can access the following types of optical signals:

In the signal flow of the LWFS unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWFS to the WDM side
of the LWFS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
After O/E conversion, the SDH/SONET signals are sent to the service encapsulation and
performed. The signals are then converted into OTU2 signals.
module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s or 11.1 Gbit/s OTN optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical
interface.
l Receive direction

System
s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the service decapsulation and processing
module where decoding, decapsulation, and performance reporting are performed. Then,
the signals are converted into SDH/SONET signals.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard STM-64, OC-192 or 10GE-
WAN optical signals.
standard STM-64 or OC-192 optical signals.
processing module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in different types.
NOTE
The E7LWF unit processes the accessed signals in any of the following two modes(The E8LWFS
doesnot the OTU2v signal):

System

board.
8.19.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the unit front panel.

Figure 8-59 shows the LWFS front panel.

System
Figure 8-59 LWFS front panel
LWFS LWFS
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
RX
RX
TX
TX
IN OUT
IN OUT
E7LWFS E8LWFS
Indicators


System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWFS.
Table 8-135 Types and descriptions of the LWFS interfaces




service signals
8.19.6 Valid Slots

The LWFS occupies one slot.
8.19.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LWFS configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 8-136 Display of the LWFS optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 2
NOTE
8.19.9 LWFS Board Specifications

LWFS board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-137 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the LWFS.
Table 8-137 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LWFS

type

mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1290-1330 1290-133 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength range 0

launched power

launched power
extinction ratio

System
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 1 0.3 0.3

spectrum width
mode suppression
ratio (SMSR)
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-165 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength range 0
Receiver dBm -11 -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

Table 8-138 and Table 8-139 list the optical specifications on the WDM side of the LWFS.
Table 8-138 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LWFS

power

power

width

System
Table 8-139 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LWFS

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio

deviation

spectral width

dispersion

System
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
– E7LWFS: 26.0 W
– E8LWFS: 29.3 W
– E7LWFS: 28.6 W
– E8LWFS: 32.2 W
8.20 LWX
LWX: arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit.

The available hardware version of the LWX is E3.
Version
Table 8-140 lists the version description of the LWX.

System
Table 8-140 Version description of the LWX

Item Description
Current board E3
hardware version

version
Difference NA
Replacement The E3 can replace the E2.
Type
NA
8.20.2 Application
The LWX is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWX is mainly used to access the arbitrary
rate optical signals (34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s) at 770 nm to 1565 nm, and convert the signals into
DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-60 Application of the LWX in WDM system
MUX DMUX
34 Mbit/s to LWX G.694.1 34 Mbit/s to
2.7 Gbit/s G.694.1 LWX
2.7 Gbit/s
DMUX MUX

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the LWX are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-141 Functions and features of the LWX

Feature
Basic function l Accesses the arbitrary rate optical signal (34 Mbit/s-2.7 Gbit/s) at
770 nm-1565 nm.Converts the signal to DWDM standard
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.The reverse process
is similar.
l Accesses non-common services, such as PDH (34 Mbit/s, 45
Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s optical interface), enterprise system
connection (ESCON) (200 Mbit/s), fiber channel (FC) (1.06 Gbit/
s, 2.12 Gbit/s).
Band type l Tunable wavelength: 40 channels in C band
Channel spacing l NRZ, tunable wavelength: 100 GHz
FEC function -
Overhead processing -
ESC function -
Alarms and l Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults.

Performance Events Reference LWX Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference LWX Board Performance Event List.

Loopback Supports cross loopback.

Cross-Connect Loopback.

Regenerating OTU -

System

Feature

The LWX unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
module, the clock and data recovery module, the control and communication module, and the
power supply module.
Figure 8-61 is the functional block diagram of the LWX unit.
Figure 8-61 Functional block diagram of the LWX unit
RX O/E E/O OUT
Clock and data

recovery module
TX E/O O/E
IN
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back
SCC plane
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX unit can access any optical signals at a rate ranging from 34 Mbit/s
to 2.7 Gbit/s and at a wavelength from 770 nm to 1565 nm, such as:
l PDH (34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s optical interfaces)

l ESCON (200 Mbit/s)
l Fiber Channel (1.06Gbit/s)

System
In the signal flow of the LWX unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX to the WDM side
of the LWX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
After O/E conversion, the signals are sent to the clock and data recovery module where
recovering the clock data.
The WDM-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the signals. Then, the module
sends out the G.694.1-compliant 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the G.694.1-compliant 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s
optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM line side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the signals are sent to the clock and data recovery module where
recovering the clock data. Then, the signals are converted into signals in different formats.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of optical signals in any format.
optical signals in any format.
– WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of optical signals at 34 Mbit/s to 2.7
optical signals at 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s, and multiplexes the clock signals with the
l Clock and data recovery module
It realizes the recovery clock of signals in different types, and the transparent transmission
of SDH/SONET signals in any rates.

System

board.
8.20.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWX front panel.

Figure 8-62 shows the LWX front panel.
Figure 8-62 LWX front panel
LWX
RUN
ALM
RX
TX
IN OUT

System
Indicators

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX
Table 8-142 Types and descriptions of the LWX interfaces




service signals
8.20.6 Valid Slots

The LWX occupies one slot.
8.20.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the LWX configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


Table 8-143 Display of the LWX optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX/RX 3
NOTE
8.20.9 LWX Board Specifications

LWX board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-144 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the LWX.
Table 8-144 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the LWX
Optical interface rate - I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 1000BASE

-SX
Optical source type - MLM SLM SLM -
Target distance 2 km (1.2 15 km (9 mi.) 80 km (50 0.5 km (0.3

mi.) mi.) mi.)

System
Operating nm 1266-1360 1260-1360 1500-1580 770-860

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -3 0 +3 -2.5

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -10 -5 -2 -9.5

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 9

ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm NA 1 1 NA
spectrum width
Minimum side-mode dB NA 30 30 NA
suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/ NA NA 1600 NA

nm
Eye pattern mask - Compliant Compliant Compliant IEEE802.3

with G.957 with G.957 with G.957 z-
compliant
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD PIN
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-1650 1200-1650 770-860

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -18 -18 -28 -17
Receiver overload dBm -3 0 -9 0
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 NA

reflectance
Remark - This module can compatibly access 2.5 Gbit/ This

s or services at a lower rate such as the module can
STM-16/OC-48, FC200, FC100, STM-4/ compatibly
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1/OC-3, DVB-ASI access
and FE services. FC100 and
FC200
services.

LWX.

System
Table 8-145 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LWX

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Table 8-146 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the LWX

System
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - APD
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 0.9 kg (2 lb.)
Power Consumption
8.21 TMR
TMR: 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC and G.709.

System

The available hardware versions of the TMR are E4 and E8.
Version
lists the version description of the TMR.
Table 8-147 Version description of the TMR

Item Description

version
Board hardware E1, E2, E3, E4 and E8

version
Similarity E4TMR and E8TMR work in the same way as E3TMR, E2TMR
and E1TMR.
Difference l E4TMR and E3TMR support the 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.1 Gbit/s
regenerating rates, E8TMR supports the 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.3
Gbit/s.
l E8TMR supports the AFEC-2 encoding, E4TMR support the
be interconnected.
Replacement E4TMR can replace E3TMR, E2TMR and E1TMR.

E8TMR cannot replace E4TMR.
Type
NA
8.21.2 Application
The TMR is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMR is mainly used to realize the
regeneration of the unidirectional optical signals. The TMR is used in an REG station to
Figure 8-63 Application of the TMR in WDM system

WDM WDM
side side
DMUX TMR MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX TMR DMUX
WDM WDM
side side

System

The main functions and features supported by the TMR are regenerating, tunable wavelength
and ALS.
Table 8-148 Functions and features of the TMR

Feature
Basic function Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals.

The TMR can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.
Regenerating rate 10.71 Gbit/s, 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3 Gbit/s
Relative OTU l E4TMR: E3LBF, E3LBFS, E4TMX, E4TMXS, E7LWF,

E7LWFS, E4LBE, E4LBES, E3LOG, E3LOGS, E3ELOG,
E3ELOGS, E3ETMX, E3ETMXS,
l E8TMR: E8LBF, E8LBFS, E8LWF, E8LWFS, E8ELOG,
E8ELOGS, E8ETMX, E8ETMXS.


FEC function E4TMR adopts the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8TMR supports the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
ESC function -

System

Feature
Performance Events Reference TMR/TMRS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference TMR/TMRS Board Performance
Event List.

Loopback -
Protection mode -
Pluggable optical
module

The TMR unit consists of five parts: the optical receive module, the optical transmit module,
the service processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply
module.
Figure 8-64 is the functional block diagram of the TMR unit.

System
Figure 8-64 Functional block diagram of the TMR unit
WDM side WDM side

O/E Overhead E/O
processing

module module
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s, 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3
Gbit/s OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths.
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function

System
10.71 Gbit/s, 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3 Gbit/s.
The module consists of the decoding module, the overhead processing module and the
encoding module. The module encodes and decodes signals and processes overheads.
– Decoding module: Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding mapping of signals, and reports
the performance detection state of the WDM-side signals.
– Encoding module: Performs encapsulation of FEC/AFEC, encoding and scrambling. It
encapsulates signals into OTU2 frames.
detection state of the signals.
board.
8.21.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMR front panel.

Figure 8-65 shows the TMR front panel.

System
Figure 8-65 TMR front panel
TMR TMR
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
IN OUT
IN OUT
E4TMR E8TMR
Indicators


System
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMR.
Table 8-149 Types and descriptions of the TMR interfaces


8.21.6 Valid Slots

The TMR occupies one slot.
8.21.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the TMR configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 8-150 Display of the TMR optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1

System
NOTE
8.21.9 TMR Board Specifications

TMR board specifications include specifications of optical module on the WDM side, laser
NOTE

TMR.
Table 8-151 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the
E4TMR

power

power

191.35 - 196.05

width

691 691

System
Table 8-152 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the TMR

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN

System
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

– E4TMR: 19.5 W
– E8TMR: 20.3 W
– E4TMR: 21.5 W
– E8TMR: 22.3 W
8.22 TMRS
TMRS: 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC and G.709
(SuperWDM).

The available hardware versions of the TMRS are E4 and E8.
Version
Table 8-153 lists the version description of the TMRS.
Table 8-153 Version description of the TMRS
Item Description

hardware version
Board hardware E1, E2, E3, E4 and E8

version
Similarity E4TMRS and E8TMRS work in the same way as E3TMRS,

E2TMRS and E1TMRS.

System
Item Description
Difference l E4TMRS and E3TMRS support the 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.1 Gbit/
s regenerating rates, E8TMRS supports the 10.71 Gbit/s and 11.3
Gbit/s.
l E8TMRS supports the AFEC-2 encoding, E4TMRS support the
be interconnected.
Replacement E4TMRS can replace E3TMRS, E2TMRS and E1TMRS.

E8TMRS cannot replace E4TMRS.
Type
NA
8.22.2 Application
The TMRS is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMRS is mainly used to realize the
regeneration of the unidirectional optical signals. The TMRS is used in an REG station to
Figure 8-66 Application of the TMRS in WDM system

WDM WDM
side side
DMUX TMRS MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX TMRS DMUX
WDM WDM
side side

The main functions and features supported by the TMRS are regenerating, tunable wavelength
and ALS.

System
Table 8-154 Functions and features of the TMRS

Feature

The TMRS can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.
Regenerating rate 10.71 Gbit/s, 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3 Gbit/s
Relative OTU l E4TMRS: E3LBF, E3LBFS, E4TMX, E4TMXS, E7LWF,

E7LWFS, E4LBE, E4LBES, E3LOG, E3LOGS, E3ELOG,
l E8TMRS: E8LBF, E8LBFS, E8LWF, E8LWFS, E8ELOG,

(DRZ) encoding.


FEC function E4TMRS adopts the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1.
E8TMRS supports the AFEC-2 encoding specified in ITU-T G.
975.1.
NOTE

ESC function -
Performance Events Reference TMR/TMRS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference TMR/TMRS Board Performance
Event List.

System

Feature

Loopback -
Protection mode -
Pluggable optical -
module

The TMRS consists of five parts: the optical receive module, the optical transmit module, the
service processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply
module.
Figure 8-67 is the functional block diagram of the TMRS unit.
Figure 8-67 Functional block diagram of the TMRS unit
WDM side WDM side

O/E Overhead E/O
processing

module module
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 10.71 Gbit/s, 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3
Gbit/s OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths.
Module Function
10.71 Gbit/s, 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3 Gbit/s.
– Decoding module: Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding mapping of signals, and reports
the performance detection state of the WDM-side signals.
– Encoding module: Performs encapsulation of FEC/AFEC, encoding and scrambling. It
detection state of signals.
board.
8.22.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMRS front panel.

System

Figure 8-68 shows the TMRS front panel.
Figure 8-68 TMRS front panel
TMRS TMRS
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
IN OUT
IN OUT
E4TMRS E8TMRS
Indicators

System

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMRS.
Table 8-155 Types and descriptions of the TMRS interfaces


8.22.6 Valid Slots

The TMRS occupies one slot.
8.22.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the TMRS configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 8-156 Display of the TMRS optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
NOTE
8.22.9 TMRS Board Specifications

TMRS board specifications include specifications of optical module on the WDM side, laser
NOTE

TMRS.
Table 8-157 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the TMRS

power

power

width

System
TMRS

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio

deviation

spectral width

dispersion

System
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

– E4TMRS: 23.5 W
– E8TMRS: 24.1W
– E4TMRS: 25.5 W
– E8TMRS: 26.5 W
8.23 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion board.

The available hardware version of the TMX is E4.
Version
Table 8-159 lists the version description of the TMX.

System
Table 8-159 Version description of the TMX
Item Description
Current board hardware E4

version
Board hardware version E1, E2, E3 and E4. Currently the E1, E2 and E3 are out of
production.
Similarity The E4 work in the same way as the E1, E2 and E3.
Difference The E2, E3 and E4 supports the inloop on the WDM side,
outloop on the WDM side, the inloop on the client side and the
outloop on the client side. But the E1 only supports the outloop
on the WDM side.
Replacement The E4 can replace the E1, E2 and E3.
Type
NA
8.23.2 Application
The TMX is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48
signals into an OTU2 signals and converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-69 Application of the TMX in WDM system
STM-16/ 1 MUX DMUX 1 STM-16/

OC-48 OC-48
TMX G.694.1 G.694.1 TMX
STM-16/ DMUX MUX 4 STM-16/
4
OC-48 OC-48
side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the TMX are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-160 Functions and features of the TMX

Feature
Basic function l Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48 service signals into

a channel of OTU2 signals. Converts the signals into WDM
process is similar.
tributary signals.


Performance Events Reference TMX/TMXS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference TMX/TMXS Board Performance
Event List.


System

Feature
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Power protection Supports centralized power protection a.

refer to Product Description Equipment-Level Protection.

The TMX unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-70 is the functional block diagram of the TMX unit.

System
Figure 8-70 Functional block diagram of the TMX unit

Client side
RX1 WDM side
RX2 O/E E/O
RX3 OUT
RX4
SDH/SONET Service
TX1
TX2 E/O O/E IN
TX3
TX4
Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX unit can access the following types of optical signals:

In the signal flow of the TMX unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side
of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
capsulation and processing module. The module performs processes such as encapsulation,
of OTU2 signals.
optical interface.
l Receive direction

System
and demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48 signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of standard STM-16 or
OC-48 optical signals.
electrical signals to standard STM-16 or OC-48 optical signals.
processing module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in any format and service
convergence.

System
board.
8.23.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX front panel.

Figure 8-71 shows the TMX front panel.
Figure 8-71 TMX front panel
TMX
RUN
ALM
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX3
TX3
RX4
TX4
IN OUT

System
Indicators

Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX.
Table 8-161 Types and descriptions of the TMX interfaces




service signals
8.23.6 Valid Slots

The TMX occupies two slots.
8.23.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the TMX configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


Table 8-162 Display of the TMX optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
NOTE
8.23.9 TMX Board Specifications

TMX board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM sides,
NOTE

Table 8-163 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX.
Table 8-163 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX

type

System

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1266 - 1360 1260 - 1360 1280 - 1335 1500 - 1580

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
spectrum width

tolerance
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

TMX.

System
Table 8-164 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the TMX

power

power

191.35 - 196.05

width

691 691
Table 8-165 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the TMX

System

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Power Consumption


System
8.24 TMXS
TMXS: 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
(SuperWDM)

The available hardware version of the TMXS is E4.
Version
Table 8-166 lists the version description of the TMXS.
Table 8-166 Version description of the TMXS

Item Description
Current board E4
hardware version
Board hardware E1, E2, E3 and E4. Currently the E1, E2 and E3 are out of production.
version
Similarity The E4 work in the same way as the E1, E2 and E3.
Difference The E2, E3 and E4 supports the inloop on the WDM side, outloop
on the WDM side, the inloop on the client side and the outloop on
the client side. But the E1 only supports the outloop on the WDM
side.
Replacement The E4 can replace the E1, E2 and E3.
Type
NA
8.24.2 Application
The TMXS is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMXS multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48
signals into an OTU2 signals and converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-72 Application of the TMXS in WDM system
STM-16/ 1 MUX DMUX 1 STM-16/

OC-48 OC-48
TMXS G.694.1 G.694.1 TMXS
STM-16/ DMUX MUX 4 STM-16/
4
OC-48 OC-48
side side side side

System

The main functions and features supported by the TMXS are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-167 Functions and features of the TMXS

Feature
Basic function l Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48 service signals into

a channel of OTU2 signals. Converts the signals into WDM
process is similar.
tributary signals.
encoding.

Performance Events Reference TMX/TMXS Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference TMX/TMXS Board Performance
Event List.

System

Feature

Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.


The TMXS unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-73 is the functional block diagram of the TMXS unit.

System
Figure 8-73 Functional block diagram of the TMXS unit

Client side
RX1 WDM side
RX2 O/E E/O
RX3 OUT
RX4
SDH/SONET Service
TX1
TX2 E/O O/E IN
TX3
TX4
Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMXS unit can access the following types of optical signals:

In the signal flow of the TMXS unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMXS to the WDM side
of the TMXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
of OTU2 signals.
optical interface.
l Receive direction

System
and demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48 signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
– Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of standard STM-16 or
OC-48 optical signals.
electrical signals to standard STM-16 or OC-48 optical signals.
processing module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in any format and service
convergence.

System
board.
8.24.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMXS front panel.

Figure 8-74 shows the TMXS front panel.
Figure 8-74 TMXS front panel
TMXS
RUN
ALM
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2
RX3
TX3
RX4
TX4
IN OUT

System
Indicators

Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMXS.
Table 8-168 Types and descriptions of the TMXS interfaces




service signals
8.24.6 Valid Slots

The TMXS occupies two slots.
8.24.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the TMXS configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


Table 8-169 Display of the TMXS optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
NOTE
8.24.9 TMXS Board Specifications

TMXS board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

Table 8-170 lists the specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMXS.
Table 8-170 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMXS

type

System

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1266 - 1360 1260 - 1360 1280 - 1335 1500 - 1580

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
spectrum width

tolerance
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

Table 8-171 lists the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the TMXS.

System
TMXS

launched power

launched power
Minimum dB +13 +13

extinction ratio

deviation

spectral width

dispersion
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength range

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Laser Safety Level


System
345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
8.25 TMX40
TMX40: 40G Tributary Multiplexing-Demultiplexing Line Wavelength Conversion Unit With
AFEC Function

The available hardware version of the TMX40 is E1.
Version
Table 8-172 lists the version description of the TMX40.
Table 8-172 Version description of the TMX40

Item Description
Similarity -
Difference -
Replacement -
Type
NA
8.25.2 Application
The TMX40 is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX40 multiplexes four STM-64/
OC-192/10GE-WAN/10GE-LAN/OTU2/OTU2e signals into an OTU3/OTU3e signals and
converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.

System
Figure 8-75 Application of the TMX40 in WDM system
STM-64/ 1 STM-64/
MUX DMUX 1
OC-192/
OC-192/
10GE-WAN/ 10GE-WAN/
TMX40 G.694.1 G.694.1 TMX40
10GE-LAN/ 10GE-LAN/
OTU2/ OTU2/
4 DMUX MUX 4 OTU2e
OTU2e

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the TMX40 are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.
Table 8-173 Functions and features of the TMX40

Feature
Basic function l Multiplexes four channels of STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN/10GE-

LAN/OTU2/OTU2e service signals into a channel of OTU3/
OTU3e signals. Converts the signals into WDM standard
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is
similar.
tributary signals.
Encoding mode Supports the ODB or DRZ encoding.
FEC function Supports AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.709.
Tunable l ODB: Supports 80 tunable wavelengths (192.10-196.05 THz).

wavelength
function

processing

System

Feature
performance events l Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including the
monitoring monitoring on laser bias current, laser cooling current, laser
Performance Events Reference TMX40/TMX40S Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference TMX40/TMX40S Board Performance
Event List.

TDC function The board supports TDC (tunable dispersion compensator) module to
adjust dispersion precisely and use TDC dispersion real-time
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Power protection -
Regenerating OTU E1LUR40

The TMX40 unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical

System
Figure 8-76 is the functional block diagram of the TMX40 unit.
Figure 8-76 Functional block diagram of the TMX40 unit
Client side
RX1 WDM side
RX2 O/E E/O
RX3 OUT
RX4 Service en/de- Service
capsulation processing
TX1
TX2 E/O O/E IN
TX3
TX4
Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX40 unit can access the following types of optical signals:
l OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
In the signal flow of the TMX40 unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX40 to the WDM
side of the TMX40, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
of OTU3/OTU3e signals.

System
The OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/
O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57 Gbit/s
l Receive direction
s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM line side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation
and processing module. The module performs processes such as decapsulation, clock
recovery and demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs four channels of electrical signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
OC-192, 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
electrical signals to standard STM-64, OC-192, 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2/
OTU2e optical signals.
The module consists of the Service en/de-capsulation and processing module and the
service processing module. The service encapsulation module realizes the en/de-
capsulation of signals in different types.
– Service en/de-capsulation and processing module: Realizes the mapping of STM-64,
OC-192, 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2/OTU2e optical signals, and reports the
signals into OTU3/OTU3e frames.

System
NOTE
The E1TMX40 board processes the accessed STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN/OTU2 signals in any of

the following two modes:
l The OTU3e signals at 44.57 Gbit/s are output on the WDM side.
The E1TMX40 board processes the accessed 10GE-LAN/OTU2e signals in only one mode:
board.
8.25.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX40 front panel.

Figure 8-77 shows the TMX40 front panel.

System
Figure 8-77 TMX40 front panel
TMX40
RUN
ALM
RX1
TX1
IN OUT
RX2
TX2
RX3
TX3
RX4
TX4
Indicators
Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX40.

System
Table 8-174 Types and descriptions of the TMX40 interfaces




service signals
8.25.6 Valid Slots

The TMX40 occupies two slots.
8.25.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the TMX40 configuration
in an NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 8-175 Display of the TMX40 optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
NOTE
8.25.9 TMX40 Board Specifications

TMX40 board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

side of the TMX40.
Table 8-176 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX40 (SDH/10GE-
WAN)

type

mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1290-1330 1290-133 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength range 0

System

launched power

launched power
extinction ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 1 0.3 0.3

spectrum width
mode suppression
ratio (SMSR)
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-165 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength range 0
Receiver dBm -11 -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-177 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX40 (OTU2)

range

launched power

System

launched power

ratio

spectral width

range
10 km.
Table 8-178 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX40 (10GE-LAN)

Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface bit rate

format

type

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 840-860 1290-1330 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength
range

System

mean launched
power

launched power
extinction ratio
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -7.5 -14.4 -15.8 -24

sensitivity

overload
Maximum dB -12 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

Table 8-179 lists the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the TMX40.
TMX40

System
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
-300 to 600 ps/nm.
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 4.75 kg (10.45 lb)
Power Consumption

8.26 TMX40S
TMX40S: 40G Tributary Multiplexing-Demultiplexing Line Wavelength Conversion Unit With
AFEC Function(Super WDM)

The available hardware version of the TMX40S is E1.

System
Version
Table 8-180 lists the version description of the TMX40S.
Table 8-180 Version description of the TMX40S

Item Description
Similarity -
Difference -
Replacement -
Type
NA
8.26.2 Application
The TMX40S is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX40S multiplexes four STM-64/
OC-192/10GE-WAN/10GE-LAN/OTU2/OTU2e signals into an OTU3/OTU3e signals and
converts the signals into WDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
Figure 8-78 Application of the TMX40S in WDM system
STM-64/ 1 STM-64/
MUX DMUX 1 OC-192/
OC-192/
10GE-WAN/ 10GE-WAN/
TMX40S G.694.1 G.694.1 TMX40S
10GE-LAN/ 10GE-LAN/
OTU2/ OTU2/
4 DMUX MUX 4 OTU2e
OTU2e

side side side side

The main functions and features supported by the TMX40S are wavelength conversion, tunable
wavelength and ALS.

System
Table 8-181 Functions and features of the TMX40S

Feature
Basic function l Multiplexes four channels of STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN/

10GE-LAN/OTU2/OTU2e service signals into a channel of
OTU3/OTU3e signals. Converts the signals into WDM standard
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process
is similar.
tributary signals.
FEC function Supports AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.709.
Tunable wavelength eDQPSK: Supports 80 tunable wavelengths (192.10-196.05 THz).

function
Performance Events Reference TMX40/TMX40S Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference TMX40/TMX40S Board


System

Feature
Loopback Supports:
Inloop and Outloop.

Power protection -
Regenerating OTU E1LUR40S

The TMX40S unit consists of five parts: the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical
Figure 8-79 is the functional block diagram of the TMX40S unit.

System
Figure 8-79 Functional block diagram of the TMX40S unit
Client side
RX1 WDM side
RX2 O/E E/O
RX3 OUT
RX4 Service en/de- Service
capsulation processing
TX1
TX2 E/O O/E IN
TX3
TX4
Control

+5 V
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX40S unit can access the following types of optical signals:
l OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
In the signal flow of the TMX40S unit, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX40S to the WDM
side of the TMX40S, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
of OTU3/OTU3e signals.
The OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/
O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 43.02 Gbit/s or 44.57 Gbit/s

System
l Receive direction
s OTN optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM line side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation
and processing module. The module performs processes such as decapsulation, clock
recovery and demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs four channels of electrical signals.
signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4
optical interfaces.
Module Function
The module consists of two parts: the client receiver and the client-side transmitter.
OC-192,10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
electrical signals to standard STM-64, OC-192, 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2/
OTU2e optical signals.
The module consists of the Service en/de-capsulation and processing module and the
service processing module. The service encapsulation module realizes the en/de-
capsulation of signals in different types.
– Service en/de-capsulation and processing module: Realizes the mapping of STM-64,
OC-192, 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WAN or OTU2/OTU2e optical signals, and reports the
signals into OTU3/OTU3e frames.

System
NOTE
The E1TMX40S board processes the accessed STM-64/OC-192/10GE-WAN/OTU2 signals in any

of the following two modes:
The E1TMX40S board processes the accessed 10GE-LAN/OTU2e signals in only one mode:
board.
8.26.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX40S front panel.

Figure 8-80 shows the TMX40S front panel.

System
Figure 8-80 TMX40S front panel
TMX40S
RUN
ALM
RX1
TX1
IN OUT
RX2
TX2
RX3
TX3
RX4
TX4
Indicators

Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX40S.

System
Table 8-182 Types and descriptions of the TMX40S interfaces



TX1-TX4 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit

service signals

service signals
8.26.6 Valid Slots

The TMX40S occupies two slots.
8.26.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the TMX40S configuration
in an NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 8-183 Display of the TMX40S optical interfaces

IN/OUT 1

System
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
NOTE
8.26.9 TMX40S Board Specifications

TMX40S board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
NOTE

side of the TMX40S.
Table 8-184 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX40S (SDH/10GE-
WAN)

type

mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 1290-1330 1290-133 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength range 0

launched power

System

launched power
extinction ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 1 0.3 0.3

spectrum width
mode suppression
ratio (SMSR)
Operating nm 1200-1650 1200-165 1200-1650 1200-1650

wavelength range 0
Receiver dBm -11 -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 8-185 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX40S (OTU2)

range

launched power

launched power

System

ratio

spectral width

range
10 km.
Table 8-186 Specifications of optical module on the client side of the TMX40S (10GE-LAN)

Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface bit rate

format

type

mi.) mi.) mi.)
Operating nm 840-860 1290-1330 1530-1565 1530-1565

wavelength
range

System

mean launched
power

launched power
extinction ratio
Operating nm 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650 1200 - 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -7.5 -14.4 -15.8 -24

sensitivity

overload
Maximum dB -12 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

Table 8-187 lists the specifications of optical module on the WDM side of the TMX40S.
TMX40S

System
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 4.75 kg (10.45 lb)
Power Consumption
l Maximum power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 85 W

8.27 TRC1
TRC1: STM-16/OTU1 line regenerating wavelength conversion board

The available hardware version of the TRC1 is E4.
Version
Table 8-188 lists the version description of the TRC1.

System
Table 8-188 Version description of the TRC1

Item Description
Current board E4
hardware version
Board hardware E2, E3, and E4. Currently the E2 is out of production.
version
Similarity E4TRC1 works in the same way as E2TRC1 and E3TRC1.
Difference NA
Replacement E4TRC1 can replace E2TRC1 and E3TRC1.
Type
NA
8.27.2 Application
The TRC1 is a type of optical transponder unit. The TRC1 is mainly used to realize the
regeneration of the unidirectional optical signals. The TRC1 is used in an REG station to
Figure 8-81 Application of the TRC1 in WDM system

WDM WDM
side side
DMUX TRC1 MUX
G.694.1 G.694.1
MUX TRC1 DMUX
WDM WDM
side side

The main functions and features supported by the TRC1 are regenerating, tunable wavelength
and ALS.

System
Table 8-189 Functions and features of the TRC1

Feature

The TRC1 can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.
Regenerating rate 2.67 Gbit/s
Relative OTU E4LWC1, E2FDG


FEC function Supports the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.
ESC function -
Performance Events Reference TRC1 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference TRC1 Board Performance Event List.

Loopback -
Protection mode -

The TRC1 consists of five parts: the optical receive module, the optical transmit module, the
service processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply
module.

System
Figure 8-82 is the functional block diagram of the TRC1 unit.
Figure 8-82 Functional block diagram of the TRC1 unit
WDM side WDM side

O/E Overhead E/O
processing

module module
Control

Power supply
module
Required
Fuse voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant 2.67 Gbit/s OTU1 optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths.
Module Function

System

2.67 Gbit/s.
detection state of signals.
board.
8.27.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TRC1 front panel.

Figure 8-83 shows the TRC1 front panel.

System
Figure 8-83 TRC1 front panel
TRC1
RUN
ALM
IN OUT
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TRC1.

System
Table 8-190 Types and descriptions of the TRC1 interfaces



8.27.6 Valid Slots

The TRC1 occupies one slot.
8.27.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the TRC1 configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 8-191 Display of the TRC1 optical interfaces

IN/OUT 1
NOTE

System
8.27.9 TRC1 Board Specifications

TRC1 board specifications include specifications of optical module on the WDM side, laser
NOTE

Table 8-192 and Table 8-193 list the specifications of optical module of fixed wavelength
optical module on the WDM side of the TRC1.
Table 8-192 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the TRC1

power

power

width
Minimum SMSR dB 35

System
Table 8-193 Specifications of tunable wavelength optical module on the WDM side of the TRC1
Minimum SMSR dB 35
Receiver type - APD
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

System


System
Hardware Description 9 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board
9 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer

Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical multiplexers and optical
demultiplexers.
9.1 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit
9.2 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
9.3 ITL
ITL: interleaver unit
9.4 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit
9.5 V40
V40: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

System
9 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board Hardware Description
9.1 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit

The available hardware version of the D40 is E3.
Version
Table 9-1 lists the version description of the D40.
Table 9-1 Version description of the D40

Item Description

version
Board hardware version E1 and E3. Currently the E1 is out of production.
Difference The E3 is used for C-band. The E1 is used for L-band and
C-band.
Replacement The E3D40 can replace the E1D40.
Type
Table 9-2 lists the types of the D40.
Table 9-2 Type description of the D40

Board Type Description
D40 02 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
03 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
13 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD_PLUS channels.
14 Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN_PLUS channels.
9.1.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40 realizes the demultiplexing of one
optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 9-1.

System
Figure 9-1 Position of the D40 in the WDM system

1 1
Client OTU OTU Client
service M40 OA OA D40 service
OTU OTU
40 40
1 1
OTU OTU
Client Client
D40 OA OA M40
service OTU OTU service
40 40
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can transmit and receive signals for the same wavelength at the same time. In
Figure 9-1, every two OTUs, one to transmit and the other to receive signals of each channel, are actually one
OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring and alarms and performance events monitoring.
Table 9-3 Functions and features of the D40

Feature
Basic function Demultiplexes main path signal to 40 channels compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1 of service with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
Online optical Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical
performance signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit
monitoring through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the
services.
Alarms and Supports:

performance events l Optical power detecting
monitoring
l Alarm and performance event reporting
Performance Events Reference D40 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference D40 Board Performance Event List.
Power protection -

The D40 unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the detection and temperature control

System
Figure 9-2 is the functional block diagram of the D40 unit.
Figure 9-2 Functional block diagram of the D40 unit
Optical module
Demultiplexer
D01
Splitter
D02
IN
D40
MON
PIN Temperature Temperature

detection control
Detection and temperature control module
Control
Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Optical module
– Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-
wavelength optical signals.
– The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input
optical power detection.
– The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides
them to the MON interface for detection.
l Detection and temperature control module

System
– Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.

– Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
– Collects the information of alarms, performance events, and working states of each
functional module of the unit.
board.
9.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40 front panel.

NOTE
The front panel of the board is silk-screened with a frequency range that indicates the operating band type
of the board.
For example, the values 196.00 and 192.10 indicate the frequencies of the first and the last wavelengths
that can be multiplexed by this board.
Figure 9-3 shows the D40 front panel.

System
Figure 9-3 D40 front panel
01 196.00 11 195.00 21 194.00 31 193.00 01 196.05 11 195.05 21 194.05 31 193.05

02 195.90 12 194.90 22 193.90 32 192.90 02 195.95 12 194.95 22 193.95 32 192.95
03 195.80 13 194.80 23 193.80 33 192.80 03 195.85 13 194.85 23 193.85 33 192.85
04 195.70 14 194.70 24 193.70 34 192.70 04 195.75 14 194.75 24 193.75 34 192.75
05 195.60 15 194.60 25 193.60 35 192.60 05 195.65 15 194.65 25 193.65 35 192.65
06 195.50 16 194.50 26 193.50 36 192.50 06 195.55 16 194.55 26 193.55 36 192.55
07 195.40 17 194.40 27 193.40 37 192.40 07 195.45 17 194.45 27 193.45 37 192.45
08 195.30 18 194.30 28 193.30 38 192.30 08 195.35 18 194.35 28 193.35 38 192.35
09 195.20 19 194.20 29 193.20 39 192.20 09 195.25 19 194.25 29 193.25 39 192.25
10 195.10 20 194.10 30 193.10 40 192.10 10 195.15 20 194.15 30 193.15 40 192.15
D40 D40
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
196.00 196.05
MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05D06 MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06
D07 D08 D09 D10 D11D12 D13 D14 D07 D08 D09D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
D15 D16D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D15 D16D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22
D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36
D37 D38 D39 D40 D37 D38 D39 D40

192.10 192.15
C_EVEN C_ODD

System
D40 D40
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
196.025 196.075
MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06
D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36
D37 D38 D39 D40 D37 D38 D39 D40

192.125 192.175
C_EVEN_PLUS C_ODD_PLUS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel.

System
Table 9-4 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces

D01-D40 LC Connected to the optical transponder boards to

transmit the demultiplexed signals.
IN LC Connected to the ITL for odd/even multiplexing or the

optical amplifier unit to receive the signals to be
demultiplexed.
MON LC Connected to the MCA or an optical spectrum analyzer

to accomplish in-service monitoring of optical
spectrum.
The MON port is a 9/100 tap of the total composite
signal at the IN port (10.5 dB lower than the actual
signal power).
There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 9-5, Table 9-6, Table 9-7 and
Table 9-8 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40
board.
Table 9-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4002
board (C_EVEN)
Interface Frequency Wavelengt Interfac Frequency Wavelength
(THz) h (nm) e (THz) (nm)
D01 196.00 1529.55 D21 194.00 1545.32
D02 195.90 1530.33 D22 193.90 1546.12
D03 195.80 1531.12 D23 193.80 1546.92
D04 195.70 1531.90 D24 193.70 1547.72
D05 195.60 1532.68 D25 193.60 1548.51
D06 195.50 1533.47 D26 193.50 1549.32
D07 195.40 1534.25 D27 193.40 1550.12
D08 195.30 1535.04 D28 193.30 1550.92
D09 195.20 1535.82 D29 193.20 1551.72
D10 195.10 1536.61 D30 193.10 1552.52
D11 195.00 1537.40 D31 193.00 1553.33
D12 194.90 1538.19 D32 192.90 1554.13
D13 194.80 1538.98 D33 192.80 1554.94
D14 194.70 1539.77 D34 192.70 1555.75

System
Interface Frequency Wavelengt Interfac Frequency Wavelength

(THz) h (nm) e (THz) (nm)
D15 194.60 1540.56 D35 192.60 1556.55
D16 194.50 1541.35 D36 192.50 1557.36
D17 194.40 1542.14 D37 192.40 1558.17
D18 194.30 1542.94 D38 192.30 1558.98
D19 194.20 1543.73 D39 192.20 1559.79
D20 194.10 1544.53 D40 192.10 1560.61
board (C_ODD)
Interface Frequency Wavelength Interfac Frequency Wavelength
(THz) (nm) e (THz) (nm)
D01 196.05 1529.16 D21 194.05 1544.92
D02 195.95 1529.94 D22 193.95 1545.72
D03 195.85 1530.72 D23 193.85 1546.52
D04 195.75 1531.51 D24 193.75 1547.32
D05 195.65 1532.29 D25 193.65 1548.11
D06 195.55 1533.07 D26 193.55 1548.91
D07 195.45 1533.86 D27 193.45 1549.72
D08 195.35 1534.64 D28 193.35 1550.52
D09 195.25 1535.43 D29 193.25 1551.32
D10 195.15 1536.22 D30 193.15 1552.12
D11 195.05 1537.00 D31 193.05 1552.93
D12 194.95 1537.79 D32 192.95 1553.73
D13 194.85 1538.58 D33 192.85 1554.54
D14 194.75 1539.37 D34 192.75 1555.34
D15 194.65 1540.16 D35 192.65 1556.15
D16 194.55 1540.95 D36 192.55 1556.96
D17 194.45 1541.75 D37 192.45 1557.77
D18 194.35 1542.54 D38 192.35 1558.58
D19 194.25 1543.33 D39 192.25 1559.39

System
Interface Frequency Wavelength Interfac Frequency Wavelength

(THz) (nm) e (THz) (nm)
D20 194.15 1544.13 D40 192.15 1560.20
board (C_ODD_PLUS)
Interface Frequency Wavelengt Interface Frequency Wavelengt
(THz) h (nm) (THz) h (nm)
D01 196.075 1528.968 D21 194.075 1544.725
D02 195.975 1529.748 D22 193.975 1545.521
D03 195.875 1530.529 D23 193.875 1546.318
D04 195.775 1531.311 D24 193.775 1547.116
D05 195.675 1532.094 D25 193.675 1547.915
D06 195.575 1532.877 D26 193.575 1548.715
D07 195.475 1533.661 D27 193.475 1549.515
D08 195.375 1534.446 D28 193.375 1550.317
D09 195.275 1535.232 D29 193.275 1551.119
D10 195.175 1536.019 D30 193.175 1551.922
D11 195.075 1536.806 D31 193.075 1552.725
D12 194.975 1537.594 D32 192.975 1553.530
D13 194.875 1538.383 D33 192.875 1554.335
D14 194.775 1539.173 D34 192.775 1555.142
D15 194.675 1539.964 D35 192.675 1555.949
D16 194.575 1540.755 D36 192.575 1556.757
D17 194.475 1541.548 D37 192.475 1557.566
D18 194.375 1542.341 D38 192.375 1558.375
D19 194.275 1543.135 D39 192.275 1559.186
D20 194.175 1543.929 D40 192.175 1559.997

System
board (C_ENEV_PLUS)
Interface Frequency Wavelength Interface Frequency Wavelength
(THz) (nm) (THz) (nm)
D01 196.025 1529.358 D21 194.025 1545.123
D02 195.925 1530.139 D22 193.925 1545.920
D03 195.825 1530.920 D23 193.825 1546.717
D04 195.725 1531.702 D24 193.725 1547.516
D05 195.625 1532.485 D25 193.625 1548.315
D06 195.525 1533.269 D26 193.525 1549.115
D07 195.425 1534.054 D27 193.425 1549.916
D08 195.325 1534.839 D28 193.325 1550.717
D09 195.225 1535.625 D29 193.225 1551.520
D10 195.125 1536.412 D30 193.125 1552.323
D11 195.025 1537.200 D31 193.025 1553.128
D12 194.925 1537.989 D32 192.925 1553.933
D13 194.825 1538.778 D33 192.825 1554.739
D14 194.725 1539.568 D34 192.725 1555.545
D15 194.625 1540.359 D35 192.625 1556.353
D16 194.525 1541.151 D36 192.525 1557.161
D17 194.425 1541.944 D37 192.425 1557.970
D18 194.325 1542.737 D38 192.325 1558.780
D19 194.225 1543.532 D39 192.225 1559.591
D20 194.125 1544.327 D40 192.125 1560.403
9.1.6 Valid Slots

The D40 occupies two slots.
9.1.7 Bar Code


System
Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the D40 configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot

The board occupies two slots. The slot number displayed on the T2000 is the number of the
second slot occupied by the board. For example, if the board is installed in IU1 and IU2, the slot
number displayed on the T2000 is IU2.

board front panel.
Table 9-9 Display of the D40 optical interfaces
D01-D40 2-41
IN 1
MON 42
9.1.9 D40 Board Specifications

D40 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
specifications and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-10 lists the optical specifications the D40.
Table 9-10 Optical interface parameter specifications of the D40
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5
Optical reflectance dB < -40
Operating wavelength range nm 1528.97 to 1560.61

(Comply with ITU-T Grid)
Isolation (adjacent channels) dB > 25

System
Isolation (non-adjacent channels) dB > 25
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB < 0.5
Maximum channel insertion loss dB <3

difference
-1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2
-20 dB spectral width nm ≤ 1.4
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
9.2 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit

The available hardware versions of the FIU is E3.
Version
Table 9-11 lists the version description of the FIU.
Table 9-11 Version description of the FIU
Item Description
Current board hardware version E3

System
Item Description
Board hardware version E1, E2 and E3. Currently the E1 and E2 are out of
production.
Similarity The E2 and E3 works in the same way as the E1.
Difference The E1FIU and E2FIU support the multiplexing or

demultiplexing of C band and L band. The E3FIU
supports the multiplexing or demultiplexing of C band.
The E2FIU supports input optical power reporting, but
the E1FIU and E3FIU does not.
Replacement The E3FIU can replace the E1FIU.
Type
Table 9-12 lists the types of the FIU.
Table 9-12 Type description of the FIU
Unit Type Description
FIU 03 Supports the multiplexing or demultiplexing of C band and

supervisory signals (1510 nm). The FIU-03 is used in the comman
system.
06 Supports the multiplexing or demultiplexing of C band and

supervisory signals (1510 nm). The FIU-06 is used in the long hop
system when the optical power is high.
9.2.2 Application
The FIU is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. The FIU realizes the multiplexing
and demultiplexing of the signals transmitted by the main optical path and the optical supervisory
channel.
For the position of the FIU in the WDM system, see Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Position of the FIU in the WDM system

OTU OTU
MUX OA OA DMUX
OTU OTU
SC1 FIU FIU SC1
OTU OTU
DMUX OA OA MUX
OTU OTU

System
NOTE
OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the FIU are multiplexing or demultiplexing, and
alarms and performance events monitoring.
Table 9-13 Functions and features of the FIU

and Feature
Basic l FIU-03: Multiplexes or demultiplexes the C-band channel and

function supervisory channel. Applys for system II, system III, system V, system
VI and system VIII.
l FIU-06: Multiplexes or demultiplexes the C-band channel and
supervisory channel. Aapplys for system VI.
Alarms and Supports: Alarm and performance event reporting

performance For details about the alarm of the board, refer to Alarms and Performance
events Events Reference FIU Board Alarm List.
monitoring
Events Reference FIU Board Performance Event List.
Power -
protection

The FIU unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the optical power detection module, the
control and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 9-5 is the functional block diagram of the FIU unit.

System
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the FIU unit
Optical module
Splitter
RC
RM
Multiplexer OUT
MON
TC
TM
Demultiplexier IN
PIN
Optical power detection module
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
l The multiplexing module multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the
RC optical interface and the supervisory optical signals received through the RM optical
interface into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of signals is output through
the OUT optical interface.
l The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
demultiplexing module. The module demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main
path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and outputs them through the TC and
TM optical interfaces respectively.
Module Function
l Optical module
– Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory
channel signals.
– The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and provides
l Optical power detection module

System
Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.
board.
9.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FIU front panel.

Figure 9-6 shows the FIU front panel.

System
Figure 9-6 FIU front panel
FIU FIU
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
MON MON
IN OUT OUT
TC RC RC
TM RM
TC IN
CAUTION CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
INSTRUMENTS
TM RM
FIU-03 FIU-06
Indicators

Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the FIU-03 front panel.
Table 9-14 list the type and function of each interface.

System
Table 9-14 Types and functions of the FIU-03 interfaces
TC LC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to transmit C-

band channels
RC LC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to receive C-

band channels
IN/OUT LC Connected to the line-side ODF to receive or transmit

line signals
RM/TM LC Connected to the optical supervisory unit to receive or

transmit the supervisory channel at 1510 nm

spectrum.
signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power).
There are seven optical interfaces on the FIU-06 front panel.
Table 9-15 Types and functions of the FIU-06 interfaces
TC LC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to transmit C-

band channels
RC LSH/APC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to receive C-

band channels
IN LC Connected to the line-side ODF to receive line signals
OUT LSH/APC Connected to the line-side ODF to transmit line signals
RM LC Connected to the optical supervisory unit to receive

the supervisory channel at 1510 nm
TM LC Connected to the optical supervisory unit to transmit

the supervisory channel at 1510 nm

spectrum.
signal power).

System
9.2.6 Valid Slots

The FIU occupies one slot.
9.2.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the FIU configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 9-16 Display of the FIU optical interfaces

RC/TC 1
IN/OUT 3
RM/TM 4
NOTE
9.2.9 FIU Board Specifications

FIU board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 9-17 lists the optical specifications the FIU.

System
Table 9-17 Optical interface parameter specificationsof FIU (C+1510)

Operating wavelength range nm C band: 1528.97 to 1567.13 / 1529.16 to

(Comply with ITU-T Grid) 1560.61 a
Supervisory channel in C band: 1500 to

1520
Insertion loss dB IN to TC: ≤ 1.0
RC to OUT: ≤ 1.0
IN to TM (@λM): < 1.5 b
RM to OUT(@λM): < 1.5
Isolation dB IN to TM (@λC): > 40 c
IN to TC (@λM): > 12
Return loss dB > 40
a: The value before "/" is for the FIU03; the value after "/" is for the FIU06.
b: @λM, indicates the measured value of the 1510-nm optical supervisory signals.
c: @λC, indicates the measured value of the C-band optical signals.
NOTE
The E2FIU board can detect input optical power in a range of –35 dBm to +7 dBm; the E3FIU board cannot
detect input optical power.
Laser Safety Level

The laser hazard level of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M (The maximum output
optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW)).
345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

System
9.3 ITL
ITL: interleaver unit

The available hardware versions of the ITL are E3.
Version
Table 9-18 lists the version description of the ITL.
Table 9-18 Version description of the ITL
Item Description
Current board hardware version E3
Board hardware version E1, E2 and E3. Currently the E1 and E2 are out of
production.
Difference The E1ITL is available in one type for L-band: ITL-L.

It is applied to types I and II systems. The E2ITL and
E3ITL are available in four types for C-band.
Replacement The E3ITL can replace the E1ITL and E2ITL.
Type
Table 9-19 lists the types of the ITL.
Table 9-19 Type description of the ITL
ITL 01 Achieves the symmetrical 100 GHz/50 GHz conversion. The optical
module of ITL01 consists of two interleavers.
05 Achieves the symmetrical 100 GHz/50 GHz conversion. The optical

module of E2ITL05 consists of one interleaver and one coupler.
NOTE
l If wavelength spacing is 100 GHz and signals at a rate of 40 Gbit/s (in eDQPSK code pattern ) or lower
are received, no ITL is required.
l If wavelength spacing is 50 GHz and signals at a rate of 40 Gbit/s are received, the ITL01 must be
configured and only the ITL01 can be configured.

System
9.3.2 Application
The ITL is used to multiplex or demultiplex the odd channels and even channels.
The cooperation of the ITL01, ITL02 and ITL03 can realize the transmission of 192 channels
in C-band.
For the position of the ITL01, ITL02 and ITL03 in the WDM system, see Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Position of the ITL01, ITL02 and ITL03 in the WDM system
1 C_ODD C_ODD 1
OTU OTU
M48 D48
OTU OTU
Client 48 ITL ITL 48 Client
service 1 C_EVEN 01 01 C_EVEN 1 service
OTU OTU
M48 D48
OTU OTU
48 48
C_ODD_ OA OA C_ODD_
1 PLUS PLUS 1
OTU OTU
M48 D48
OTU OTU
C_EVEN_
service 1 02 02 C_EVEN_ 1 service
OTU PLUS PLUS OTU
M48 D48
OTU OTU
48 ITL ITL 48
03 03
1 C_ODD C_ODD 1
OTU OTU
D48 M48
OTU OTU
service 1 C_EVEN 01 01 C_EVEN 1 service
OTU OTU
D48 M48
OTU OTU
48 48
C_ODD_ OA OA C_ODD_
1 PLUS PLUS 1
OTU OTU
D48 M48
OTU OTU
service C_EVEN_ 02 02 C_EVEN_ service
1 PLUS PLUS 1
OTU OTU
D48 M48
OTU OTU
48 48
For the position of the ITL05 in the WDM system, see Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8 Position of the ITL05 in the WDM system

1 1
OTU C_ODD C_ODD OTU
M40 D40
OTU OTU
Client 40 40 Client
OA OA
service 1 1 service
OTU C_EVEN C_EVEN OTU
M40 D40
OTU OTU
40 40
ITL ITL
1 1
OTU C_ODD C_ODD OTU
D40 M40
OTU OTU
Client 40 OA OA 40 Client
service 1 1 service
OTU C_EVEN C_EVEN OTU
D40 M40
OTU OTU
40 40

System
NOTE
OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the ITL are multiplexing and demultiplexing.
Table 9-20 Functions and Features of the ITL

Feature
Basic function The ITL multiplexes and demultiplexes the C_ODD and C_EVEN
signals.
Power protection -

The ITL unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the temperature control and detection
Figure 9-9 is the functional block diagram of the ITL01.
Figure 9-10 is the functional block diagram of the ITL05.

System
Figure 9-9 Functional block diagram of the ITL01
Optical module
TO
TE
Interleaver IN
RO
RE
Interleaver OUT
Temperature Temperature
control detection
Temperature control and detection module
Control
Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack

System
Figure 9-10 Functional block diagram of the ITL05
Optical module
TO
TE
Interleaver IN
RO
RE
Coupler OUT
Temperature Temperature
control detection
Temperature control and detection module
Control
Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
l ITL01
The unit accesses the multiplexed optical signals through the IN optical interface, and sends
them to one interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal
spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical
interfaces respectively.
The other interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO
and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical
signals is output through the OUT optical interface.
l ITL05
The unit accesses the multiplexed optical signals through the IN optical interface, and sends
them to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal
spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical
interfaces respectively.
The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is
output through the OUT optical interface.

System
Module Function
l Optical module
ITL01/ITL05: Performs the transformation between C-band optical signals in 100 GHz
spacing and C-band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.
l Temperature control and detection module
Monitors and controls in real time the operating temperature of the interleaver.
board.
9.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ITL front panel.

Figure 9-11 shows the ITL front panel.

System
Figure 9-11 ITL front panel
ITL
RUN
ALM
TE RE
TO RO
IN OUT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the ITL front panel.

System
Table 9-21 Types and functions of the ITL01/ITL05 interfaces

TE LC Connected to the D40 to transmit the optical signals

with the channel spacing of 100 GHz (C_EVEN
multiplexed signals)
TO LC Connected to the D40 to transmit the optical signals

with the channel spacing of 100 GHz (C_ODD
RE LC Connected to the M40 or the V40 to receive the optical

signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
(C_EVEN multiplexed signals)
RO LC Connected to the M40 or the V40 to receive the optical

signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz (C_ODD
IN LC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to receive the

optical signals with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
(C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals)
OUT LC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to transmit the

optical signals with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
(C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals)
9.3.6 Valid Slots

The ITL occupies one slot.
Valid slots for the board are IU1-IU6, IU8-IU13.
9.3.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the ITL configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 9-22 Display of the ITL optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
RE/TE 2
RO/TO 3
NOTE
9.3.9 ITL Board Specifications

ITL board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 9-23 and Table 9-24 list the optical specifications the ITL01 and ITL05.
Table 9-23 Optical interface parameter specifications of the ITL01
Operating wavelength range nm C band: 1528.97 to 1567.13
Input channel spacing a GHz 100
Output channel spacing a GHz 50
Insertion loss dB < 3.0

difference
Isolation dB > 25
Directivity dB > 45
Polarization mode dispersion ps < 0.5

(PMD)
Input optical power range dBm ≤ 26
a: Input and output are defined according to the multiplexing process of the ITL.

System
Table 9-24 Optical interface parameter specifications of the ITL05
Input channel spacing a GHz 100
Output channel spacing a GHz 50
Insertion loss RE-OUTRO- dB <4

OUT
IN-TEIN-TO dB < 2.5
Maximum RE/RO-OUT dB <1

channel
insertion loss IN-TE/TO dB <1
difference
Isolation IN-TEIN-TO dB > 25
Directivity dB > 45
Polarization mode dispersion ps < 0.5

(PMD)
Input optical power range dBm ≤ 26
a: Input and output are defined according to the multiplexing process of the ITL.
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption


System
9.4 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit

The available hardware version of the M40 is E3.
Version
Table 9-25 lists the version description of the M40.
Table 9-25 Version description of the M40

Item Description

version
Difference The E3 is used for C-band. The E1 is used for L-band and C-
band.
Replacement The E3M40 can replace the E1M40.
Type
Table 9-26 lists the types of the M40.
Table 9-26 Type description of the M40

M40 01 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
02 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
13 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD_PLUS channels into one main path.
14 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN_PLUS channels into one main path.
9.4.2 Application
The M40 is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40 realizes the multiplexing of a maximum
of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one main path.
For the position of the M40 in the WDM system, see Figure 9-12.

System
Figure 9-12 Position of the M40 in the WDM system

1 1
service M40 OA OA D40 service
OTU OTU
40 40
1 1
OTU OTU
Client Client
D40 OA OA M40
40 40
NOTE
OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the M40 are multiplexing, online optical
Table 9-27 Functions and features of the M40

Feature
Basic function Multiplexes 40 channels compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 with the
channel spacing of 100 GHz into one main path.
services.

performance l Optical power detecting
events monitoring
Performance Events Reference M40 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference M40 Board Performance Event List.
Power protection -

The M40 unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the detection and temperature control

System
Figure 9-13 is the functional block diagram of the M40 unit.
Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of the M40 unit
Optical module
Multiplexer
M01
Splitter
M02
OUT
M40
MON
Temperature Temperature PIN

control detection
Detection and temperature control module
Control
Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels
of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then
output them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
– Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.
– The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for output

System
– Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.

– Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.
board.
9.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40 front panel.

NOTE
of the board.
Figure 9-14 shows the M40 front panel.

System
Figure 9-14 M40 front panel
01 196.00 11 195.00 21 194.00 31 193.00 01 196.05 11 195.05 21 194.05 31 193.05

02 195.90 12 194.90 22 193.90 32 192.90 02 195.95 12 194.95 22 193.95 32 192.95
03 195.80 13 194.80 23 193.80 33 192.80 03 195.85 13 194.85 23 193.85 33 192.85
04 195.70 14 194.70 24 193.70 34 192.70 04 195.75 14 194.75 24 193.75 34 192.75
05 195.60 15 194.60 25 193.60 35 192.60 05 195.65 15 194.65 25 193.65 35 192.65
06 195.50 16 194.50 26 193.50 36 192.50 06 195.55 16 194.55 26 193.55 36 192.55
07 195.40 17 194.40 27 193.40 37 192.40 07 195.45 17 194.45 27 193.45 37 192.45
08 195.30 18 194.30 28 193.30 38 192.30 08 195.35 18 194.35 28 193.35 38 192.35
09 195.20 19 194.20 29 193.20 39 192.20 09 195.25 19 194.25 29 193.25 39 192.25
10 195.10 20 194.10 30 193.10 40 192.10 10 195.15 20 194.15 30 193.15 40 192.15
M40 M40
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
196.00 196.05
MON OUTM01M02 M03M04 M05M06 MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06
M07 M08M09M10 M11M12 M13 M14 M07 M08 M09M10 M11M12 M13M14
M15 M16 M17M18 M19 M20M21 M22 M15 M16M17M18 M19M20 M21M22
M23 M24M25 M26 M27M28 M29 M30 M23 M24 M25M26 M27M28 M29 M30
M31 M32 M33M34 M35 M36 M31 M32 M33M34 M35 M36
M37 M38 M39 M40 M37 M38 M39 M40

192.10 192.15
C_EVEN C_ODD

System
M40 M40
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
196.025 196.075
MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06
M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14
M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36
M37 M38 M39 M40 M37 M38 M39 M40

192.125 192.175
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the M40 front panel.

System
Table 9-28 Types and functions of the M40 interfaces
M01 - M40 LC Connected to the optical transponder boards to receive

the signals to be multiplexed.
OUT LC Connected to the ITL for odd/even multiplexing or the

optical amplifier board to transmit multiplexed signals.

spectrum.
signal power).
There are 40 output interfaces on the M40 front panel. Table 9-29, Table 9-30, Table 9-31 and
Table 9-32 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40
board.
Table 9-29 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M4001
board (C_ODD)
Interfac Frequency Wavelength Interfa Frequency Wavelength

e (THz) (nm) ce (THz) (nm)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15

System

M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20
board (C_EVEN)
Interfac Frequency Wavelength Interfac Frequency Wavelength
e (THz) (nm) e (THz) (nm)
M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55
M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

System
board (C_ODD_PLUS)
M01 196.075 1528.968 M21 194.075 1544.725
M02 195.975 1529.748 M22 193.975 1545.521
M03 195.875 1530.529 M23 193.875 1546.318
M04 195.775 1531.311 M24 193.775 1547.116
M05 195.675 1532.094 M25 193.675 1547.915
M06 195.575 1532.877 M26 193.575 1548.715
M07 195.475 1533.661 M27 193.475 1549.515
M08 195.375 1534.446 M28 193.375 1550.317
M09 195.275 1535.232 M29 193.275 1551.119
M10 195.175 1536.019 M30 193.175 1551.922
M11 195.075 1536.806 M31 193.075 1552.725
M12 194.975 1537.594 M32 192.975 1553.530
M13 194.875 1538.383 M33 192.875 1554.335
M14 194.775 1539.173 M34 192.775 1555.142
M15 194.675 1539.964 M35 192.675 1555.949
M16 194.575 1540.755 M36 192.575 1556.757
M17 194.475 1541.548 M37 192.475 1557.566
M18 194.375 1542.341 M38 192.375 1558.375
M19 194.275 1543.135 M39 192.275 1559.186
M20 194.175 1543.929 M40 192.175 1559.997
board (C_EVEV_PLUS)
M01 196.025 1529.358 M21 194.025 1545.123
M02 195.925 1530.139 M22 193.925 1545.920
M03 195.825 1530.920 M23 193.825 1546.717

System

M04 195.725 1531.702 M24 193.725 1547.516
M05 195.625 1532.485 M25 193.625 1548.315
M06 195.525 1533.269 M26 193.525 1549.115
M07 195.425 1534.054 M27 193.425 1549.916
M08 195.325 1534.839 M28 193.325 1550.717
M09 195.225 1535.625 M29 193.225 1551.520
M10 195.125 1536.412 M30 193.125 1552.323
M11 195.025 1537.200 M31 193.025 1553.128
M12 194.925 1537.989 M32 192.925 1553.933
M13 194.825 1538.778 M33 192.825 1554.739
M14 194.725 1539.568 M34 192.725 1555.545
M15 194.625 1540.359 M35 192.625 1556.353
M16 194.525 1541.151 M36 192.525 1557.161
M17 194.425 1541.944 M37 192.425 1557.970
M18 194.325 1542.737 M38 192.325 1558.780
M19 194.225 1543.532 M39 192.225 1559.591
M20 194.125 1544.327 M40 192.125 1560.403
9.4.6 Valid Slots

The M40 occupies two slots.
9.4.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the M40 configuration in an
NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 9-33 Display of the M40 optical interfaces
M01-M40 2-41
OUT 1
MON 42
9.4.9 M40 Board Specifications

M40 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 9-34 lists the optical specifications the M40.
Table 9-34 Optical interface parameter specifications of the M40
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5

Isolation (non-adjacent channels) dB > 25

difference

System
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
9.5 V40
V40: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

The available hardware version of the V40 is E3.
Version
Table 9-35 lists the version description of the V40.
Table 9-35 Version description of the V40

Item Description
Curren board hardware E3

version

version
Difference NA
Replacement The E3V40 can replace the E1V40.
Type
Table 9-36 lists the types of the V40.

System
Table 9-36 Type description of the V40
V40 01 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
05 Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN_PLUS channels into one main path.
06 Multiplexes 40 C_ODD_PLUS channels into one main path.
9.5.2 Application
The V40 is a type of optical multiplexer unit with VOA. The V40 realizes the multiplexing of
a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber and adjusts
the output optical power of each wavelength signal.
For the position of the V40 in the WDM system, see Figure 9-15.
Figure 9-15 Position of the V40 in the WDM system

1 1
service V40 OA OA D40 service
OTU OTU
40 40
1 1
OTU OTU
Client Client
D40 OA OA V40
40 40
NOTE
OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the V40 are multiplexing, online optical
Table 9-37 Functions and features of the V40

Feature
Basic function Multiplexes 40 channels with the channel spacing of 100 GHz into the
main path. Adjusts the output optical power of each wavelength signal.

System

Feature
services.

events monitoring
Events Reference V40 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference V40 Board Performance Event List.
Power protection -

The V40 unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the detection and temperature control
Figure 9-16 is the functional block diagram of the V40 unit.

System
Figure 9-16 Functional block diagram of the V40 unit
Optical module
VOA Multiplexer
M01
Splitter
M02 VOA
OUT
M40 VOA
MON
VOA Temperature Temperature PIN

control control detection
Detection and control module
Control
Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The
multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel
of multiplexed optical signals, and then output them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
– Performs the optical power adjustment to the single-wavelength optical signals before
multiplexing.
– Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.

System
– Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.

– Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.
board.
9.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the V40 front panel.

NOTE
of the board.
Figure 9-17 shows the V40 front panel.

System
Figure 9-17 V40 front panel
01 196.05 11 195.05 21 194.05 31 193.05

02 195.95 12 194.95 22 193.95 32 192.95
03 195.85 13 194.85 23 193.85 33 192.85
01 196.00 11 195.00 21 194.00 31 193.00 04 195.75 14 194.75 24 193.75 34 192.75
02 195.90 12 194.90 22 193.90 32 192.90 05 195.65 15 194.65 25 193.65 35 192.65
03 195.80 13 194.80 23 193.80 33 192.80 06 195.55 16 194.55 26 193.55 36 192.55
04 195.70 14 194.70 24 193.70 34 192.70 07 195.45 17 194.45 27 193.45 37 192.45
05 195.60 15 194.60 25 193.60 35 192.60 08 195.35 18 194.35 28 193.35 38 192.35
09 195.25 19 194.25 29 193.25 39 192.25
06 195.50 16 194.50 26 193.50 36 192.50
07 195.40 17 194.40 27 193.40 37 192.40 10 195.15 20 194.15 30 193.15 40 192.15
08 195.30 18 194.30 28 193.30 38 192.30
09 195.20 19 194.20 29 193.20 39 192.20
10 195.10 20 194.10 30 193.10 40 192.10
V40
V40
RUN
RUN
ALM
ALM
196.05
MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06
196.00
MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06
M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14

M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22
M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14
M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22
M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30

M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36
M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30
M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36
M37 M38 M39 M40

192.15
M37 M38 M39 M40
192.10
C_EVEN C_ODD

System
V40 V40
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
196.025 196.075
MONOUTM01M02 M03M04 M05M06 MONOUTM01M02 M03M04 M05M06
M07 M08M09M10 M11M12 M13M14 M07 M08M09M10 M11M12 M13M14


M31 M32M33M34 M35M36 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36
M37 M38M39 M40 M37 M38M39 M40

192.125 192.175
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the V40 front panel.

System
Table 9-38 Types and functions of the V40 interfaces
M01-M40 LC Connected to the optical transponder boards to receive

the signals to be multiplexed.
OUT LC Connected to the ITL for odd/even multiplexing or the

optical amplifier board to transmit multiplexed signals.

spectrum.
signal power).
There are 40 output interfaces on the V40 front panel. Table 9-39, Table 9-40, Table 9-41 and
Table 9-42 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the V40
board.
Table 9-39 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the V4001
board (C_EVEN)

M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32
M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12
M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92
M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72
M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51
M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32
M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12
M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92
M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72
M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52
M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33
M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13
M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94
M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75
M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55

System

M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36
M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17
M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98
M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79
M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61
board (C_ODD)
M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92
M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72
M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52
M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32
M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11
M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91
M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72
M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52
M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32
M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12
M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93
M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73
M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54
M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34
M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15
M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96
M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77
M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58
M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39
M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20

System
board (C_EVEV_PLUS)
M01 196.025 1529.358 M21 194.025 1545.123
M02 195.925 1530.139 M22 193.925 1545.920
M03 195.825 1530.920 M23 193.825 1546.717
M04 195.725 1531.702 M24 193.725 1547.516
M05 195.625 1532.485 M25 193.625 1548.315
M06 195.525 1533.269 M26 193.525 1549.115
M07 195.425 1534.054 M27 193.425 1549.916
M08 195.325 1534.839 M28 193.325 1550.717
M09 195.225 1535.625 M29 193.225 1551.520
M10 195.125 1536.412 M30 193.125 1552.323
M11 195.025 1537.200 M31 193.025 1553.128
M12 194.925 1537.989 M32 192.925 1553.933
M13 194.825 1538.778 M33 192.825 1554.739
M14 194.725 1539.568 M34 192.725 1555.545
M15 194.625 1540.359 M35 192.625 1556.353
M16 194.525 1541.151 M36 192.525 1557.161
M17 194.425 1541.944 M37 192.425 1557.970
M18 194.325 1542.737 M38 192.325 1558.780
M19 194.225 1543.532 M39 192.225 1559.591
M20 194.125 1544.327 M40 192.125 1560.403
board (C_ODD_PLUS)
M01 196.075 1528.968 M21 194.075 1544.725
M02 195.975 1529.748 M22 193.975 1545.521
M03 195.875 1530.529 M23 193.875 1546.318

System

M04 195.775 1531.311 M24 193.775 1547.116
M05 195.675 1532.094 M25 193.675 1547.915
M06 195.575 1532.877 M26 193.575 1548.715
M07 195.475 1533.661 M27 193.475 1549.515
M08 195.375 1534.446 M28 193.375 1550.317
M09 195.275 1535.232 M29 193.275 1551.119
M10 195.175 1536.019 M30 193.175 1551.922
M11 195.075 1536.806 M31 193.075 1552.725
M12 194.975 1537.594 M32 192.975 1553.530
M13 194.875 1538.383 M33 192.875 1554.335
M14 194.775 1539.173 M34 192.775 1555.142
M15 194.675 1539.964 M35 192.675 1555.949
M16 194.575 1540.755 M36 192.575 1556.757
M17 194.475 1541.548 M37 192.475 1557.566
M18 194.375 1542.341 M38 192.375 1558.375
M19 194.275 1543.135 M39 192.275 1559.186
M20 194.175 1543.929 M40 192.175 1559.997
9.5.6 Valid Slots

The V40 occupies two slots.
9.5.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the V40 configuration in an
NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


Table 9-43 shows the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on
Table 9-43 Display of the V40 optical interfaces

M01-M40 2-41
OUT 1
MON 42
9.5.9 V40 Board Specifications

V40 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 9-44 lists the optical specifications the V40.
Table 9-44 Optical interface parameter specifications of the V40

Insertion loss dB < 8.0 a

Isolation (non-adjacent dB > 25

channels)
Attenuation range dB 0 to 15
Loss accuracy dB ≤1 (0 to 10 dB)
≤1.5 (>10 dB)

System
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.5

(PDL)
Maximum channel insertion dB <3

loss difference
a: Tested value when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. Before delivery, the VOA
value of each channel in the V40 is set as 3 dB. Thus, the value of insertion loss may be 11
dB in testing.
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

System
Hardware Description 10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board
10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing

Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical add/drop multiplexers.
10.1 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop unit
10.2 MR8
MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
10.3 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing unit
10.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing unit
10.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing unit
10.6 WSMD4
WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing and demultiplexing board
10.7 WSMD2

System
10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board Hardware Description
10.1 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop unit

The available hardware version of the MR2 is E3.
Version
Table 10-1 lists the version description of the MR2.
Table 10-1 Version description of the MR2
Item Description

version
Difference NA
Replacement The E3MR2 can replace the E2MR2.
Type
NA
10.1.2 Application
The MR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR2 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of two signals.
For the position of the MR2 in the WDM system, see Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 Position of the MR2 in the WDM system
Client service Client service
OTU OTU OTU OTU
OA OA
MR2 MR2
OA OA

System

The main functions and features supported by the MR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
Table 10-2 Functions and features of the MR2

Feature
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplex two channels of signals from the
multiplexed signals.
Used for C_EVEN.
Concatenate function Provides the optical interface to concatenate other MR2s.
Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped
signals.

The MR2 unit consists of three parts: the OADM module, the control and communication
Figure 10-2 is the functional block diagram of the MR2 unit.

System
Figure 10-2 Functional block diagram of the MR2 unit

D01 D02 MO MI A01 A02
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
SCC Backplane
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The unit receives the multiplexed optical signals from the upstream station through the IN optical
interface. The drop optical module drops two wavelengths from the signals through the D01 and
D02 optical interfaces. The signals after the processing in the drop module are output through
the MO optical interface.
The unit receives the signals from the main optical path through the MI optical interface. The
add module multiplexes the signals with the two wavelengths input through the A01 and A02
optical interfaces. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
– Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.
– Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other optical add/drop
multiplexer units, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

System

board.
10.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the MR2 front panel.

Figure 10-3 shows the MR2 front panel.
Figure 10-3 MR2 front panel
MR2
RUN
ALM
AO1 AO2
DO1 DO2
OUT MO
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
IN MI

System
Indicators

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the MR2 front panel.
Table 10-3 Types and functions of the MR2 interfaces
IN/OUT LC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to receive or

transmit the multiplexed signals
A01/A02 LC Connected to the optical transponder units to add one

channel into the multiplexed signals respectively
D01/D02 LC Connected to the optical transponder units to drop one

channel from the multiplexed signals respectively
MI/MO LC Concatenated another MR2 to add or drop others

channel in the multiplexed signals
10.1.6 Valid Slots

The MR2 occupies one slot.
10.1.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the MR2 configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


System

board front panel.
Table 10-4 Display of the MR2 optical interfaces

MO/MI 1
IN/OUT 2
A01/ D01 3
A02/ D02 4
NOTE
10.1.9 MR2 Board Specifications

MR2 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 10-5 lists the optical specifications the MR2.
Table 10-5 Optical interface parameter specifications of the MR2

Central wavelength nm Comply with ITU-T Grid
-1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2
Insertion loss of Add/Drop channels dB <2
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.0

MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation of Add/Drop adjacent dB > 25

channels
Return loss dB ≥ 40

System
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

10.2 MR8
MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

The available hardware version of the MR8 is E1.
Version
Table 10-6 lists the version description of the MR8.
Table 10-6 Version description of the MR8
Item Description
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA

System
10.2.2 Application
The MR8 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR8 realizes the adding/
dropping and multiplexing of eight signals.
For the position of the MR8 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-4 Position of the MR8 in the DWDM system

Client side Client side
8 8
OTU OTU OTU OTU
OA OA
MR8 MR8
OA OA

The main functions and features supported by the MR8 are adding/dropping and multiplexing
of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.
Table 10-7 Functions and features of the MR8

Feature
Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed
signals.
Cascade interface Provides the optical interface to concatenate other MR8s.
Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

The MR8 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
Figure 10-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8.

System
Figure 10-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8
D1 D8 MO MI A1 A8
Drop optical Add optical

IN OUT
module module
OADM optical module
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply (controlled by SCC)
from a backplane SCC
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The
rest wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module
– Performs the add/drop multiplexing of eight wavelengths.
– Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

System

board.
10.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the MR8 front panel.

Figure 10-6 shows the MR8 front panel.
Figure 10-6 MR8 front panel
MR8
RUN
ALM
IN OUT
MI MO
A1 A2
A3 A4
A5 A6
A7 A8
D1 D2
D3 D4
D5 D6
D7
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

System
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 20 optical interfaces on the MR8 front panel. Table 10-8 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 10-8 Types and functions of the MR8 interfaces

Interface Type Function
A1-A8 LC Connected to the optical transponder units to add one

channel into the multiplexed signals respectively
D1-D8 LC Connected to the optical transponder units to drop one

channel from the multiplexed signals respectively
IN/OUT LC Connected to the optical amplifier unit to receive or

transmit the multiplexed signals
MI/MO LC Concatenated another MR8 to add or drop others

channel in the multiplexed signals
10.2.6 Valid Slots

The MR8 occupies one slot.
10.2.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the MR8 configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


System

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are
listed in Table 10-9.
Table 10-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 displayed on the NM
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
A5/D5 5
A6/D6 6
A7/D7 7
A8/D8 8
MI/MO 9
IN/OUT 10
NOTE
10.2.9 MR8 Board Specifications

MR8 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 10-10 lists the optical specifications of the MR8.
Table 10-10 Optical specifications of the MR8
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Central wavelength nm Comply with ITU-T Grid
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion loss dB ≤4

System
Item Unit Value
IN-D3 Adjacent channel isolation dB >25

IN-D4
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >35
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion loss dB ≤4
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ≤3.5

MI-OUT
Isolation dB >13
Optical return loss dB >40
Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are
four groups of wavelengths:
Table 10-11 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8

Gr Wavelength (nm)
ou
p A1/ A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D5 A6/D6 A7/D7 A8/D8
D1
1535.0 1529.5
1 4 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68 1531.90 1531.12 1520.34 6
2 1538.1 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.6

9 8
3 1541.3 1540.56 1539.77 1538.98 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.8

5 2
4 1544.5 1543.73 1542.94 1542.15 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.9

3 8

System
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 2.20 lb (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 2.1 W
l The maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F): 2.5 W
10.3 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing unit

The available hardware version of the RMU9 is E1.
Version
Table 10-12 lists the version description of the RMU9.
Table 10-12 Version description of the RMU9
Item Description
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA

System
10.3.2 Application
The RMU9 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The RMU9 realizes the adding
of eight channels of signals. It works with the WSD9 to realize the wavelength grooming of the
nodes in the WDM network.
The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through the
interfaces of RMU9.
If the added signal is a mutli-channel signal, it will be received after being multiplexed by the
optical multiplexer unit or the add and drop multiplexing unit.
If the added signal is a single-channel signal, it will be directly received after being converted
by the OTU.
For the flexible application of the RMU9 in the WDM system, refer to the Product
Description.
For the position of the RMU9 in the WDM system, see Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7 Position of the RMU9 in the WDM system

Client service
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
DMUX MUX
DCM
OA WSD9 RMU9 OA
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
DCM
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
Client service
NOTE
OTU.

System

The main functions and features supported by the RMU9 are adding and multiplexing.
Table 10-13 Functions and features of the RMU9

Feature
Basic function Adds eight single-channel signals or multi-channel signals to the main
path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 realizes
the dynamic input of eight channel signals.
services.

events monitoring
Performance Events Reference RMU9 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference RMU9 Board Performance Event List.
Power protection Supports secondary power protection.

to Product Description Equipment-Level Protection.

The RMU9 unit consists of three parts: the optical module, the control and communication
Figure 10-8 is the functional block diagram of the RMU9 unit.

System
Figure 10-8 Functional block diagram of the RMU9 unit

AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA
Optical multiplexing module
TOA MONO
ROA OUT
EXPI MONI
Optical module
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack
Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE
l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise,
the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same
as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services
in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the
AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface.
The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical
amplifier unit. If no cascading is required, input the optical signals directly into the ROA optical
interface.
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the
optical wavelength signals added on the unit through the ROA optical interface, the multiplexed
signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

System
Module Function
l Optical module
– Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the unit.
– Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power.
– The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output
them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
– Converts the -48 V/-60 V DC power into the power required by each module of the
board.
– Supports secondary power supply backup.
10.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the RMU9 front panel.

Figure 10-9 shows the RMU9 front panel.

System
Figure 10-9 RMU9 front panel
RMU9
RUN
ALM
EXPI
OUT
ROA
TOA
MONO
MONI
AM1
AM2
AM3
AM4
AM5
AM6
AM7
AM8
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the RMU9 front panel.
Table 10-14 Types and functions of the RMU9 interfaces
AM1-AM8 LC Receives the multiplexed signals of several optical

wavelength signals desired to add from the optical
multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing
unit; or receives a single wavelength desired to add
from the OTU.
OUT LC Transmits the main path signal.
EXPI LC Receives the main path signal.
MONI LC Connected to the MCA or an optical spectrum analyzer

spectrum.
The MONI port is a 3/80 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPI port (14.3 dB lower than the actual
signal power).
MONO LC Connected to the MCA or an optical spectrum analyzer

spectrum.
The MONO port is a 3/76 tap of the total composite
signal at the TOA port (14 dB lower than the actual
signal power).
TOA LC Used as the cascade output interface. If the cascading

is not needed, directly input the optical signals to the
ROA optical interface.
ROA LC Used as the cascade input interface. If the cascading is

not needed, directly receive the optical signals output
from the TOA optical interface.
10.3.6 Valid Slots

The RMU9 occupies one slot.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the RMU9 configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


Table 10-15 Display of the RMU9 optical interfaces

EXPI 1
OUT 2
AM1-AM8 3-10
TOA/ROA 11
MONI 12
MONO 13
NOTE
10.3.8 RMU9 Board Specifications

RMU9 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 10-16 lists the optical specifications the RMU9.
Table 10-16 Optical interface parameter specifications of the RMU9

Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB < 8.5
AMx a-TOA dB < 12.5 b
ROA-OUT dB < 1.5
Operating wavelength range (Comply with nm 1529.53 to 1560.61

ITU-T Grid)
Optical return loss dB > 40
Attenuation range dB 0 to 45

System
Polarization dependence loss dB < 0.5
Attenuation accuracy dB <1
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

10.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing unit

The available hardware version of the WSD9 is E2.
Version
Table 10-17 lists the version description of the WSD9.
Table 10-17 Version description of the WSD9
Item Description

version
Board hardware version E1 and E2. Currrent E1 is out of service.

System
Item Description
Difference The E1WSD9 supports the 100 GHz channel spacing, and the
E2WSD9 supports the 50 GHz or 100 GHz channel spacing.
Replacement The E2WSD9 can replace the E1WSD9.
Type
None
10.4.2 Application
WSD9 is a 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing unit. The WSD9 realizes the
dropping of eight channels of signals. It works with the WSM9 or RMU9 to realize the
wavelength grooming of the nodes in the WDM network.
The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through
the interfaces of the WSD9 based on the configuration.
If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it will be sent to the optical demultiplexer unit
or optical add and drop multilexing unit for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals
enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the client-side equipment at the local station.
If the dropped signal is a single-channel signal, it will be directly sent to the OTU at the local
station.
For the flexible application of the WSD9 in the WDM system, refer to the Product
Description.
For the position of the WSD9 in the WDM system, see Figure 10-10.

System
Figure 10-10 Position of the WSD9 in the WDM system

Client service
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
DMUX MUX
DCM
OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
DCM
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
Client service
NOTE
Figure 10-10, every two OTUs, one to transmit and the other to receive signals of each channel, are actually
one OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the WSD9 are dynamic demultiplexing, online
optical performance monitoring and alarms and performance events monitoring.
Table 10-18 Functions and features of the WSD9

Feature
Basic function The WSD9 is mainly used to achieve the dynamic and configurable
demultiplexing of any wavelengths to any ports. Any node on chain or
ring networks can output the combination of any wavelengths on the
line and allocate the output wavelengths to any port so as to realize the
completely dynamic configuration in terms of wavelength allocation.

System

Feature
services.

events monitoring
Performance Events Reference WSD9 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference WSD9 Board Performance Event List.


The WSD9 unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the temperature and optical power
detection module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 10-11 is the functional block diagram of the WSD9 unit.

System
Figure 10-11 Functional block diagram of the WSD9 unit

DM1 DM2 DM8
Splitter Splitter
IN EXPO
WSS module
MONI MONO
Optical module
PIN Temperature
detection
Temperature and optical power detection module
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
SCC Backplane
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The unit receives the multiplexed signals of the main optical path through the IN optical interface.
The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be dropped are output through the DM1-
DM8 optical interfaces. Other wavelengths are output through the EXPO optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
– Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM1-DM8 or EXPO.
– The WSS optical module contains a VOA module, which realizes the optical power
adjustment on a wavelength level.
l Temperature and optical power detection module

System
– Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.

– Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.
board.
10.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSD9 front panel.

Figure 10-12 shows the WSD9 front panel.

System
Figure 10-12 WSD9 front panel
WSD9
RUN
ALM
MONIMONODM1DM2DM3DM4
IN EXPODM5DM6DM7DM8
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSD9 front panel.
Table 10-19 Types and functions of the WSD9 interfaces
DM1-DM8 LC Transmits the multiplexed signal demultiplexed from

the main path to the optical demultiplexing unit
(optical add and drop multiplexer unit) .
EXPO LC Transmits the main path signal.
IN LC Receives the main path signal.

spectrum.
l E1WSD9
signal at the IN port (23 dB lower than the actual
signal power).
l E2WSD9
signal at the EXPI port (14.3 dB lower than the
actual signal power).

spectrum.
l E1WSD9
The MONO port is a 3/194 tap of the total
composite signal at the EXPO port (18.1 dB lower
than the actual signal power).
l E2WSD9
signal power).
10.4.6 Valid Slots

The WSD9 occupies two slots.

System

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the WSD9 configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 10-20 Display of the WSD9 optical interfaces
IN 1
EXPO 2
DM1-DM8 3-10
10.4.8 WSD9 Board Specifications

WSD9 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 10-21 lists the optical specifications the WSD9.
Table 10-21 Optical interface parameter specifications of the WSD9
Channel spacing GHz 100/50
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1561

Operating wavelength number - 40
0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2
Insertion loss a dB < 8.0
Insertion loss uniformity dB 1.5

System
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 35
Directivity dB 35
Reconfiguration time second ≤3
Attenuation range of each of dB 0 to 15

dropping wavelengths
Attenuation precision of each of dB ≤1 (0 to 10 dB)

≤1.5 (>10 dB)
a: This is the insertion loss when the build-in VOA is set to 0.
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

10.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing unit

The available hardware version of the WSM9 is E2.
Version
Table 10-22 lists the version description of the WSM9.

System
Table 10-22 Version description of the WSM9

Item Description
Current board E2
Board hardware E1 and E2. Current E1 is out of service.

version
Difference The E1WSM9 supports the 100 GHz channel spacing, and the E2WSM9
supports the 50 GHz or 100 GHz channel spacing.
Replacement The E2WSM9 can replace the E1WSM9.
Type
None
10.5.2 Application
WSM9 is a 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing unit. The WSM9 realizes the
adding of eight channels of signals. It works with the WSD9 to realize the wavelength grooming
of the nodes in the WDM network.
The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through the
interfaces of WSM9.
If the added signal is a mutli-channel signal, it will be received after being multiplexed by the
optical multiplexer unit or the add and drop multiplexing unit.
If the added signal is a single-channel signal, it will be directly received after being converted
by the OTU.
For the flexible application of the WSM9 in the WDM system, refer to the Product Description.
For the position of the WSM9 in the WDM system, see Figure 10-13.

System
Figure 10-13 Position of the WSM9 in the WDM system

Client service
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
DMUX MUX
DCM
OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
DCM
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
Client service
NOTE
Figure 10-13, every two OTUs, one to transmit and the other to receive signals of each channel, are actually
one OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the WSM9 are dynamic multiplexing, online
Table 10-23 Functions and features of the WSM9

Feature
Basic function The WSM9 is mainly used to achieve the dynamic and configurable
multiplexing of any wavelengths to any ports. Any node on chain or ring
networks can combine any wavelengths added on the client side and
then allocate the received wavelengths to any ports so as to realize the

System

Feature
services.

events monitoring
Performance Events Reference WSM9 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference WSM9 Board Performance Event List.


The WSM9 unit consists of four parts: the optical module, the temperature and optical power
Figure 10-14 is the functional block diagram of the WSM9 unit.

System
Figure 10-14 Functional block diagram of the WSM9 unit

AM1 AM2 AM8
Splitter Splitter
EXPI OUT
WSS module
MONI MONO
Optical module
PIN Temperature
detection
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The unit receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. After the main optical path input through the EXPI
optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn
optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module
– Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through AM1-AM8 or EXPI.
– The WSS optical module contains a VOA module, which realizes the optical power
adjustment on a wavelength level.

System
l Temperature and optical power detection module
– Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.
– Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.
board.
10.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSM9 front panel.

Figure 10-15 shows the WSM9 front panel.

System
Figure 10-15 WSM9 front panel
WSM9
RUN
ALM
MONIMONOAM1AM2 AM3AM4
EXPIOUT AM5 AM6AM7 AM8
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSM9 front panel.

System
Table 10-24 Types and functions of the WSM9 interfaces
AM1-AM4 LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be added at the local

station from the optical multiplexing unit (optical add
and drop multiplexer unit).
EXPI LC Receives the main path signal.

spectrum.
l E1WSM9
l E2WSM9

spectrum.
l E1WSM9
signal at the OUT port (12.6 dB lower than the
l E2WSM9
signal power).
10.5.6 Valid Slots

The WSM9 occupies two slots.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the WSM9 configuration in
an NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


Table 10-25 Display of the WSM9 optical interfaces
EXPI 1
OUT 2
AM1-AM8 3-10
10.5.8 WSM9 Board Specifications

WSM9 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 10-26 lists the optical specifications the WSM9.
Table 10-26 Optical interface parameter specifications of the WSM9
Channel spacing GHz 100/50

0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2
Insertion loss a dB < 8.0
Directivity dB 35

System
Attenuation range of each of dB 0 to 15

Attenuation precision of each of dB <1 (0 to 10 dB)

<1.5 (>10 dB)
Polarization dependence loss dB
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
10.6 WSMD4

The available hardware version of the WSMD4 is E1.
Version
Table 10-27 lists the version description of the WSMD4.
Table 10-27 Version description of the WSMD4
Item Description

System
Item Description
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
Table 10-28 lists the type description of the WSMD4.
Table 10-28 Type description of the WSMD4

WSMD4 01 The unit processes the C-band even wavelength signals.
02 The unit processes the C-band odd wavelength signals.
10.6.2 Application
WSMD4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. WSMD4 is mainly used in an
OADM station to achieve the dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any wavelengths to
any ports. WSMD4s can be combined to achieve the flexible wavelength control at each node
in a DWDM network.
For the position of the WSMD4 in the WDM system, see Figure 10-16 and Figure 10-17.

System
Figure 10-16 Position of the WSMD4 in a WDM system (a simple network application)
Client service
O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U
DMUX DMUX MUX

DCM
DM1 DM2 AM1 AM2

OA IN DM3 AM3 OUT OA
WSMD4 WSMD4
OA OUT AM3 DM3 IN OA

AM1 AM2 DM1 DM2
DCM
MUX DMUX DMUX
O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U
Client service

System
Figure 10-17 Position of the WSMD4 in a WDM system (a four-dimensional network

application)
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
MUX DMUX MUX DMUX

DCM
AM1 DM1 AM1 DM1

OA IN DM4 AM4 OUT OA
WSMD4 WSMD4
OA OUT AM4 DM4 IN
AM2 DM2 DM3AM3 AM2 DM2 OA
AM3
DM3
DCM DCM
DM3 DM3
DM2AM2 AM3 AM3 DM2AM2 OA
OA IN DM4 AM4 OUT
WSMD4 WSMD4
OUT AM4 DM4 IN OA
OA
AM1 DM1 AM1 DM1
DCM
MUX DMUX MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
NOTE
Figure 10-16 and Figure 10-17, every two OTUs, one to transmit and the other to receive signals of each channel,
are actually one OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the WSMD4 are dynamic demultiplexing, online

System
Table 10-29 Functions and features of the WSMD4

Feature
Basic function The WSMD4 is mainly used to achieve the dynamic and configurable
demultiplexing of any wavelengths to any ports. Any node on chain or
ring networks can output the combination of any wavelengths on the
line and allocate the output wavelengths to any port so as to realize the
services.

events monitoring
Performance Events Reference WSMD4 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference WSMD4 Board Performance Event List.
Power Adjusts the attenuation of any wavelength independently to control and

equalization equalize the power of each wavelength.
Channel spacing 100 GHz


The WSMD4 consists of the RDU optical module, the WSS optical module, the temperature
and optical power detection module, and the control and communication module.
Figure 10-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4.

System
Figure 10-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4

DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4
Splitter Splitter
IN OUT
RDU module WSS module
MONI MONO
Optical module
PIN
Temperature
detection
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
SCC Backplane
DC power supply from a
subrack
Signal flow
The unit receives one multiplexed main-path wavelength through IN. The optical signals that
need be dropped to or pass through the local station are output through DM1-DM4.
The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals that need be added from or to pass through
the local station are input through AM1-AM4. The multiplexed main-path wavelength is output
through OUT.
Module function
l ROADM demux unit (RDU) optical module
– The module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM1-DM4.
Realizes the broadcasting from wavelength signals to four ports.
– The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input
– The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends
them to MONI for detection.

System
l Wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module

– The module selects any combination of wavelengths and inputs it through AM1-AM4.
– The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that achieves the optical power
adjustment of channel level.
them to MONO for detection.
board.
10.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSMD4 front panel.

Figure 10-19 shows the WSMD4 front panel.

System
Figure 10-19 WSMD4 front panel
WSMD4
RUN
ALM
DM1 DM2 AM1 AM2
DM3 DM4 AM3 AM4
IN MONI OUT MONO
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the WSMD4 front panel.
Table 10-30 Types and functions of the WSMD4 interfaces
DM1-DM4 LC Outputs service signals.

l Transmits to the optical demultiplexing unit (OD)
the multiplexed signal of multiple wavelengths to
be dropped from the local station.
l Transmits the multiplexed signal of multiple
wavelengths to the AMn interface on another
WSMD4 at the local station.
AM1-AM4 LC Inputs service signals.

l Receives from the optical multiplexing unit (OM)
or optical add/drop multiplexer unit (OADM) the
multiplexed signal of multiple optical wavelengths
to be added.
l Receives the multiplexed signal of multiple
wavelengths from the DMn interface on another
WSMD4 at the local station.
l Adds a single-wavelength signal from the OTU.

spectrum.
signal at the IN port (14.3 dB lower than the actual
signal power).

spectrum.
signal power).
10.6.6 Valid Slots

The WSMD4 occupies two slots.

System

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the WSMD4 configuration
in an NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 10-31 Display of the WSMD4 optical interfaces

IN 1
DM1 2
AM1 3
OUT 4
DM2-DM4 5-7
AM2-AM4 8-10
MONO 11
MONI 12
10.6.8 WSMD4 Board Specifications

WSMD4 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 10-32 lists the optical specifications the WSMD4.

System
Table 10-32 Optical interface parameter specifications of the WSMD4

Parameters Unit Indices
Operating wavelength range (Comply nm 1529.16 to 1560.61

with ITU-T Grid)
1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2
Channel attenuation range dB 0 to 15
Insertion loss AMxa-OUT dB ≤ 8b
IN-DMxa dB ≤8
Directivity dB 35
Attenuation range of each of dropping dB 0 to 15

wavelengths
Attenuation precision of each of dropping dB ≤1 (0 to 10 dB)

wavelengths
≤1.5 (>10 dB)
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1
a: AMx represents the AM1–AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1–DM4 interface.
b: This is the insertion loss when the build-in VOA is set to 0.
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)

System
Power Consumption
10.7 WSMD2

The available hardware version of the WSMD2 is E1.
Version
Table 10-33 lists the version description of the WSMD2.
Table 10-33 Version description of the WSMD2

Item Description
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
None
10.7.2 Application
WSMD2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. WSMD2 is mainly used in an
OADM station to achieve the dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any wavelengths to
the port. WSMD2s can be combined to achieve the flexible wavelength control at each node in
a DWDM network.
For the position of the WSMD2 in the WDM system, see Figure 10-20.

System
Figure 10-20 Position of the WSMD2 in a WDM system
Client service
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
DMUX MUX
DCM
OA OA
WSMD2 WSMD2
OA OA
DCM
O DMUX
T
U
O O
T T
U U
Client service

The main functions and features supported by the WSMD2 are dynamic demultiplexing, online
Table 10-34 Functions and features of the WSMD2

Feature
Basic function The WSMD2 is mainly used to achieve the dynamic and
configurable demultiplexing of any wavelengths to the port. Any
node on chain or ring networks can output the combination of any
wavelengths on the line and allocate the output wavelengths to the
port so as to realize the completely dynamic configuration in terms
of wavelength allocation.
The board processes the C-band even wavelength signals.

System

Feature
performance signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
monitoring unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical
services.

performance events l Optical power detecting
monitoring
Performance Events Reference WSMD2 Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference WSMD2 Board Performance Event
List.
Power equalization Adjusts the attenuation of any wavelength independently to control

and equalize the power of each wavelength.
Channel spacing 100 GHz
Power protection -

The WSMD2 consists of the WSS optical module, the temperature and optical power detection
module, and the control and communication module.
Figure 10-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2.

System
Figure 10-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2

DM EXPO AM EXPI
Splitter Splitter
IN OUT
Splitter WSS module
MONI MONO
Optical module
PIN Temperature
detection
Control

Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
SCC Backplane
DC power supply from a
subrack
Signal flow
The unit receives one multiplexed main-path wavelength through IN. The optical signals that
need be dropped to or pass through the local station are output through DM.
The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals that need be added from or to pass through
the local station are input through AM. The multiplexed main-path wavelength is output through
OUT.
Module function
l Wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module
– The module selects any combination of wavelengths and inputs it through AM.
– The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that achieves the optical power
adjustment of channel level.

System
them to MONO for detection.
board.
10.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSMD2 front panel.

Figure 10-22 shows the WSMD2 front panel.

System
Figure 10-22 WSMD2 front panel
WSMD2
RUN
ALM
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
AM EXPI
DM EXPO
OUT MONO
IN MONI
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the WSMD2 front panel.

System
Table 10-35 Types and functions of the WSMD2 interfaces

DM LC Outputs service signals. Transmits to the optical

demultiplexing unit (OD) the multiplexed signal of
multiple wavelengths to be dropped from the local
station.
AM LC Inputs service signals.

l Receives from the optical multiplexing unit (OM)
or optical add/drop multiplexer unit (OADM) the
multiplexed signal of multiple optical wavelengths
to be added.
l Adds a single-wavelength signal from the OTU.
EXPI/EXPO LC Concatenated another WSMD2 to add or drop others

channel in the multiplexed signals.

spectrum.
signal at the IN port (17 dB lower than the actual signal
power).

spectrum.
signal power).
10.7.6 Valid Slots

The WSMD2 occupies one slot.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the WSMD2 configuration
in an NM system.
Display of the Slot


System

Table 10-36 Display of the WSMD2 optical interfaces
IN 1
DM 2
AM 3
OUT 4
EXPO 5
EXPI 6
MONO 7
MONI 8
10.7.8 WSMD2 Board Specifications

WSMD2 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 10-37 lists the optical specifications the WSMD2.
Table 10-37 Optical interface parameter specifications of the WSMD2
Operating wavelength range (Comply with nm 1529.16 to 1560.61

ITU-T Grid)
Channel attenuation range dB 0 to 15
Insertion loss AM-OUT dB ≤ 8a

EXPI-OUT
IN-DM dB ≤4
IN-EXPO

System
Directivity dB 35
Attenuation range of each of dropping dB 0 to 15

wavelengths
Attenuation precision of each of dropping dB ≤1 (0 to 10 dB)

wavelengths
≤1.5 (>10 dB)
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 1.0kg (2.2lb.)
Power Consumption

System
Hardware Description 11 Optical Amplifier Board
11 Optical Amplifier Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical amplifier boards.
11.1 HBA
HBA: high-power optical booster amplifier unit
11.2 OAU
OAU: optical amplifier unit
11.3 OBU
OBU: optical booster unit
11.4 OPU
OPU: optical preamplifier unit
11.5 RPC
RPC: Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

System
11 Optical Amplifier Board Hardware Description
11.1 HBA
HBA: high-power optical booster amplifier unit

The available hardware version of the HBA is E2.
Version
Table 11-1 lists the version description of the HBA.
Table 11-1 Version description of the HBA
Item Description
Current Board E2
hardware version

version
Difference The E1 is used for C-band. The E2 is used for generic C-band and
extend C-band.
Replacement The E2HBA can replace the E1HBA.
Type
Table 11-2 lists the types of the HBA.
Table 11-2 Type description of the HBA
E2HBA - The gain is 29 dB. The system frequency ranges from 1529 nm to
1568 nm.
The gain is 35 dB. The system frequency ranges from 1545 nm to

1561 nm.
11.1.2 Application
The HBA is mainly used to amplify C-band signals with high power.

System
Figure 11-1 Application of the HBA in WDM system
OTU OTU
MUX HBA RPC OAU DMUX
OTU OTU
Client SC1 FIU FIU Client
SC1 service
service OTU OTU
DMUX OAU RPC HBA MUX
OTU OTU

The main functions and features supported by the HBA are optical signals amplifying, online
optical performance monitoring, software upgrade online and alarms and performance events
monitoring.
Table 11-3 Functions and features of the HBA

Feature
Basic function Amplifies the power of C-band and extend C-band optical signals.
Increases the output optical power of the signals.
Typical gain Provieds two types of gain: 29 dB or 35 dB, the gain corresponds to the
system (1529 nm to 1568 nm). The maximum output power is 27 dBm.
NOTE
For the E2HBA, the gain can be set to 29 dB or 35 dB on the T2000. When the
gain is set to 35 dB, the corresponding frequency should be in the range of 1545
nm and 1561 nm.
services.
Gain lock function Adding/dropping of one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation
does not affect the signal gain of other channels.
Alarms and Checks and reports current gain, input or output optical power, pump
performance laser drive current, pump laser operating temperature, and EDFA optical
events monitoring module temperature.
Performance Events Reference HBA Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference HBA Board Performance Event List.

System

Feature


The HBA unit consists of four parts: the EDFA optical module, the drive and detection module,
the control and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 11-2 is the functional block diagram of the HBA unit.
Figure 11-2 Functional block diagram of the HBA unit
EDFA optical module

Splitter
IN OUT
MON
Detecting for
Pumping PIN temperature and
current
pumping current
Drive and detection module
Control
Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack
Signal Flow
One multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the erbium-doped
fiber amplifier (EDFA) optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power
of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output
through the OUT interface.

System
Functional Modules
l EDFA optical module
– Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to realize the optical power amplification function.
– The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical
power detection.
l Drive and detection module
– Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
– Detects in real time the drive current, backlight current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
– Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
– Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
board.
11.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the HBA front panel.

Figure 11-3 shows the HBA front panel.

System
Figure 11-3 HBA front panel
HBA
RUN
ALM
MON
IN
OUT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the HBA.

System
Table 11-4 Types and functions of the HBA interfaces
IN LC Connected to the optical multiplexer unit, the OADM

unit or the ITL to receive the signals that are to be
amplified.
OUT LSH/APC Connected to the FIU or the line-side ODF to transmit

the amplified signals.

spectrum.
signal power).
11.1.6 Valid Slots

The HBA occupies two slots.
11.1.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the HBA configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 11-5 Display of the HBA optical interfaces

IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3
11.1.9 HBA Board Specifications

HBA board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 11-6 lists the optical specifications of the HBA.
Table 11-6 Optical specifications of the HBA
Item Un Performance parameters

it
Channel gain dB 29 35
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 to 1568 1545 to 1561
Total input power range dB -25 to -2 -25 to -8

m
Noise figure (NF) dB < 6.5 < 6.5
Output reflectance dB < -45
Output power range dB 4 to 27 10 to 27

m
Gain response time to add/drop the ms < 10 < 10

channel
Gain flatness dB ≤2 ≤ 2.5
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB < 0.5 < 0.5
Laser Safety Level


System
345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weigh: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
11.2 OAU
OAU: optical amplifier unit

The available hardware version of the OAU is E5.
Version
Table 11-7 lists the version description of the OAU.
Table 11-7 Version description of the OAU

Item Description
Current board E5
hardware version
Board hardware E3, E4 and E5. E3 and E4 are out of production.

version
Similarity E4 and E5 work in the same way as E3.
Difference l The E4OAU can amplify the optical signals in generic C band
and extended band at the same time. The total wavelengths range
from 1528.96 nm to 1567.13 nm.
l The E5OAU can amplify the input optical signals in generic C
band. The total wavelengths range from 1529.16 nm to 1560.61
nm.
Replacement The E5OAU can replace the E3OAU.
Type
Table 11-8 lists the types of the OAU.

System
Table 11-8 Type description of the OAU

Board Type Description Gain Range
E5OAU C00 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band 16 dB to 25.5 dB

with the wavelength range of 1529.16
nm-1560.61 nm.
C01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band 20 dB to 31 dB

nm-1560.61 nm.

nm-1560.61 nm.

nm-1560.61 nm.

nm-1560.61 nm.
11.2.2 Application
The OAU is used to amplify optical signals. The OAU can be used in both the transmit direction
and the receive direction.
Figure 11-4 Application of the OAU in WDM system
OTU OTU
Client MUX DMUX Client
OAU OAU
service OTU service
OTU
OTU OTU
Client DMUX MUX Client
OAU OAU
service OTU service
OTU

The main functions and features supported by the OAU are optical signals amplifying, gain
adjusting, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock function, transient control function
and alarms and performance events monitoring.

System
Table 11-9 Functions and features of the OAU

Feature
Basic function The E5OAU can amplify the input optical signals in generic C band.
The total wavelengths range from 1529.16 nm to 1560.61 nm.
Transmission The transmission distance can reach up to 80 km to 120 km (50 mi. to

distance 75 mi.) without regeneration.
Gain adjusting Gain can be adjusted continuously from the minimum to the maximum.
The gain of the C-band wavelength channels on the E5OAU can be
adjusted within the gain boudary, that is, within the range from -2.5 dB
to +2.5 dB.
NOTE
11.2.9 OAU Board Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
You can set Nominal Gain (dB) on the NMS to the required gain value of an OA
board.
services.
Gain lock function Adding/dropping of one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation
does not affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the
function fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth
upgrading and expansion.
Alarms and l Detects and reports optical power.

performance l Detects and controls pump laser temperature.
events monitoring
l Detects pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current,
and ambient temperature of board.
Performance Events Reference OAU Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference OAU Board Performance Event List.
NOTE
When the nominal gain of the E5OAUC00 board is 16 dB, the threshold of the
IN_PWR_HIGH alarm must be set to 3.8 dBm.


System

The OAU unit consists of four parts: the EDFA optical module, the drive and detection module,
Figure 11-5 is the functional block diagram of the OAU unit.
Figure 11-5 Functional block diagram of the OAU unit

TDC RDC MON
EDFA optical module
IN VOA
EDFA optical module

Pumping PIN Detecting for
current temperature and
pumping current
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The OAU can be connected to a dispersion compensation module (DCM) by using the TDC/
RDC optical interface.
Functional Modules

System
power detection.
– The module is equipped with a electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA), whose
variable attenuation achieves gain adjusting of a board.
board.
11.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OAU front panel.

Figure 11-6 shows the OAU front panels.

System
Figure 11-6 OAU front panels
OAU
RUN
ALM
MON
IN TDC RDC OUT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the OAU.

System
Table 11-10 Types and functions of the OAU interfaces
IN LC In the transmit direction, connected to the optical

multiplexer unit, the OADM unit or the ITL to receive
the signals that are to be amplified.
In the receive direction, connected to the FIU or the

line-side ODF to receive the signals that are to be
amplified.
OUT LC In the transmit direction, connected to the FIU or the

line-side ODF to transmit the amplified signals.
In the receive direction, connected to the optical

demultiplexer unit, the OADM unit or the ITL to
receive the signals that are to be amplified.
RDC LC If the DCM is required, connected to the DCM to

receive the dispersion compensated signals.
If the DCM is not required, connected to the TDC

interface directly by a fiber jumper.
TDC LC If the DCM is required, connected to the DCM to

transmit the signals that are to be dispersion
compensated.
If the DCM is not required, connected to the RDC

interface directly by a fiber jumper.

spectrum.
signal power).
11.2.6 Valid Slots

The OAU occupies two slots.
11.2.7 Bar Code

Board.

System

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the OAU configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 11-11 Display of the OAU optical interfaces
IN 1
OUT 4
RDC/TDC 5
MON 6
NOTE
11.2.9 OAU Board Specifications

OAU board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 11-12, Table 11-13, Table 11-14, Table 11-15, Table 11-16 list the optical specifications
of the OAU.
Table 11-12 Optical specifications of the E5OAUC00
Item Unit Performance parameter
Nominal gain - 16 dB 22 dB 25.5 dB
Operating wavelength range nm 1529.16 - 1529.16 - 1529.16 -

1560.61 1560.61 1560.61

System
Total input power range dBm -20 to 2 -26 to -4 -32 to -7.5
Single 40 channels dBm -32 to -14 -32 to -20 -32 to -23.5

channel
input 80 channels dBm -32 to -17 -32 to -23 -32 to -26.5
power 160 channels dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -26 -32 to -29.5
range
Noise figure (NF) a dB <8 < 5.5 < 5.5
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Input reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Pump leakage at input end dBm < -30 < -30 < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerable dB -27 -27 -27

at input end

at output end
Maximum total output power dBm 18 18 18
Gain response time to add/drop ms < 10 < 10 < 10

the channel
Maximum channel gain b dB 14.5 - 17.5 20.5 - 23.5 24 - 27
Gain flatness dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5

(PDL)
a: The value for noise figure is varying with the gain which can be tunable. Only the typical
value is given here.
b: As for the E5OAUC00 amplifier, the total gain is 27.5 dB. The internal insertion loss ranges
from 2 dB to 11.5 dB, and thus the gain varies from 16 dB to 25.5 dB.
Nominal gain - 20 dB 26 dB 31 dB

1560.61 1560.61 1560.61
Total input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11

System
Single 40 channels dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27

channel
input 80 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
power 160 channels dBm -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32
range
Noise figure (NF) a dB <9 <7 <6

at input end

at output end

the channel
Maximum channel gain b dB 20 - 23 23 - 29 29 - 31

(PDL)
b: As for the E5OAUC01amplifier, the total gain is 33 dB. The internal insertion loss ranges
from 2 dB to 13 dB. Thus, the gain varies from 20 dB to 31 dB.
Item Unit performance parameters
Operating wavelength range nm 1529.16 - 1560.61
Input power range dBm -32 to -3
Output power range dBm -12 to 17
Single channel input power dBm -25 to -19

range

System
Item Unit performance parameters
Maximum single channel dBm 1

output power
Maximum total output power dBm 17
Channel gain dB 20 - 31
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 6 (The gain value is 26 dB)
≤ 7 (The gain value is 23 dB)
≤ 8 (The gain value is 20 dB)
Gain flatness dB <2

1560.61 1560.61 1560.61
Total input power range dBm -32 to -4 -32 to -9 -32 to -16
Single 40 channels dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32

channel
input 80 channels dBm -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32
range
Noise figure (NF) a dB < 7.0 < 6.0 < 6.0

at input end

at output end

the channel

System

(PDL)
b: As for the E5OAUC03 amplifier, the total gain is 38 dB. The internal insertion loss ranges

1560.61 1560.61 1560.61
Total input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -7 -32 to -11
Single 40 channels dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27

channel
input 80 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30
range
Noise figure (NF) a dB <9 <7 <6

at input end

at output end

the channel

System

(PDL)
b: As for the E5OAUC05 amplifier, the total gain is 36 dB. The internal insertion loss ranges
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
11.3 OBU
OBU: optical booster unit

The available hardware versions of the OBU is E5.
Version
Table 11-17 lists the version description of the OBU.

System
Table 11-17 Version description of the OBU

Item Description
Current board E5
hardware version
version
Similarity E4 and E5 work in the same way as the E3.
Difference l The E5OBU can amplify the input optical signals in generic C
nm.
l The E4OBU can amplify the optical signals in generic C band
and extended band at the same time. The total wavelengths range
from 1528.96 nm to 1567.13 nm.
Replacement The E5OBU can replace the E3OBU.
Type
Table 11-18 lists the types of the OBU.
Table 11-18 Type description of the OBU

Board Type Description Channel Gain
E5OBU C03 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band 21 dB to 25 dB

nm-1560.61 nm.

nm-1560.61 nm.
NOTE
The single channel input power range of the E5OBUC03 is different from that of the E5OBUC05. For
details, refer to Table 11-22 and Table 11-23.
11.3.2 Application
The OBU is used to amplify optical signals. The OBU is usually used in the transmitting
direction.

System
Figure 11-7 Application of the OBU in WDM system
OTU OTU
OBU OPU
service OTU service
OTU
OTU OTU
OPU OBU
service OTU service
OTU

The main functions and features supported by the OBU are optical signals amplifying, online
optical performance monitoring, gain lock function, transient control function and alarms and
performance events monitoring.
Table 11-19 Functions and features of the OBU

Feature
Basic function l The E5OBU can amplify the input optical signals in generic C
nm.
NOTE
11.3.9 OBU Board Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal
gain.
Transmission distance The transmission distance can reach up to 80 km to 120 km (50 mi.
to 75 mi.) without regeneration.
services.
Gain lock function Adding/dropping of one or more channels or optical signal

fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels.
The output power variation of each channel of the optical amplifiers
is less than 2 dB when the input signals of EDFA reduce from 80
channels to one channel.
Transient control When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the
function fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the
smooth upgrading and expansion.

System

Feature

performance events l Detects and controls pump laser temperature.
monitoring
l Detects pump driving current, back facet current, cooling
current, and ambient temperature of board.
Performance Events Reference OBU Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference OBU Board Performance Event
List.


The OBU unit consists of four parts: the EDFA optical module, the drive and detection module,
Figure 11-8 is the functional block diagram of the OBU unit.
Figure 11-8 Functional block diagram of the OBU unit
EDFA optical module

Splitter
IN OUT
MON
Detecting for
current
pumping current
Control
Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
Functional Modules
power detection.
board.
11.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU front panel.

Figure 11-9 shows the OBU front panels.

System
Figure 11-9 OBU front panels
OBU
RUN
ALM
MON
IN OUT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the OBU.

System
Table 11-20 Types and functions of the OBU interfaces
IN LC Connected to the optical multiplexer unit, the OADM

amplified.
OUT LC Connected to the FIU or the line-side ODF to transmit


spectrum.
signal power).
11.3.6 Valid Slots

The OBU occupies two slots.
11.3.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the OBU configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 11-21 Display of the OBU optical interfaces
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3
11.3.9 OBU Board Specifications

OBU board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 11-22 and Table 11-23 list the optical specifications of the OBU.
Table 11-22 Optical specifications of the E5OBUC03
Total input power dBm -24 to -3
Single channel 40 channels dBm -24 to -19

input power
range 80 channels dBm -24 to -22
160 channels dBm -24
Noise figure (NF) dB <6
Input reflectance dB < -40
Pump leakage at input end dBm < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end dB -27
Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end dB -27
Gain response time to add/drop the channel ms < 10
Channel gain dB 23
Channel gain range dB 21 - 25
Gain flatness dB ≤2

System
Multi-channel gain tilt dB/ ≤2

dB
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB ≤ 0.5
Table 11-23 Optical specifications of the E5OBUC05
Total input power dBm -24 to 0

input power
range 80 channels dBm -24 to -19
160 channels dBm -24 to -22
Noise figure (NF) dB <7
Input reflectance dB < -40
Pump leakage at input end dBm < -30
Gain response time to add/drop the channel ms < 10
Channel gain dB 23

dB
Laser Safety Level


System

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

– E5OBU: 14.0 W
– E5OBU: 15.4 W
11.4 OPU
OPU: optical preamplifier unit

The available hardware versions of the OPU is E5.
Version
Table 11-24 lists the version description of the OPU.
Table 11-24 Version description of the OPU
Item Description
Board hardware E5
version
Similarity The E3 and E4 works in the same way as the E5. Currently E3 and
E4 are out of production.
Difference l The E5OPU can amplify the input optical signals in generic C-
nm.
Replacement The E5OPU can replace the E3OPU.
Type
NA

System
11.4.2 Application
The OPU is mainly used to amplify C-band signals. The OPU is usually used in the receiving
direction.
Figure 11-10 Application of the OPU in WDM system
OTU OTU
OBU OPU
service OTU service
OTU
OTU OTU
OPU OBU
service OTU service
OTU

The main functions and features supported by the OPU are optical signals amplifying, online
optical performance monitoring, gain lock function and alarms and performance events
monitoring.
Table 11-25 Functions and features of the OPU

Feature
Basic function l The E5OPU can amplify the input optical signals in generic C
nm.
NOTE
11.4.9 OPU Board Specifications only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal
gain.
services.
Gain lock function Adding/dropping of one or more channels or optical signal

fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels.
The output power variation of each channel of the optical amplifiers
is less than 2 dB when the input signals of EDFA reduce from 80
channels to one channel.

System

Feature

performance events l Detects and controls pump laser temperature.
monitoring
l Detects pump driving current, back facet current, cooling
current, and ambient temperature of board.
Performance Events Reference OPU Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference OPU Board Performance Event
List.


The OPU unit consists of four parts: the EDFA optical module, the drive and detection module,
Figure 11-11 is the functional block diagram of the OPU unit.
Figure 11-11 Functional block diagram of the OPU unit
EDFA optical module

Splitter
IN OUT
MON
Detecting for
current
pumping current
Control
Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
Functional Modules
power detection.
board.
11.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OPU front panel.

Figure 11-12 shows the OPU front panel.

System
Figure 11-12 OPU front panel
OPU
RUN
ALM
MON
IN OUT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the OPU.

System
Table 11-26 Types and functions of the OPU interfaces
IN LC Connected to the FIU or the line-side ODF to transmit

OUT LC Connected to the optical multiplexer unit, the OADM

amplified.

spectrum.
signal power).
11.4.6 Valid Slots

The OPU occupies two slots.
11.4.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the OPU configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 11-27 Display of the OPU optical interfaces
IN 1
OUT 2
MON 3
11.4.9 OPU Board Specifications

OPU board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 11-28 is lists the optical specifications of the OPU.
Table 11-28 Optical specifications of the E5OPU
Total input power dBm -32 to -8

input power range
Noise figure (NF) dB < 5.5
Input reflectance dB <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40
Pump leakage at input end dBm <-30
Gain response time to add/drop the channel ms <10
Channel gain dB 23

System

dB
Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB ≤0.5
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

11.5 RPC
RPC: Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

The available hardware version of the RPC is E3.
Version
Table 11-29 lists the version description of the RPC.
Table 11-29 Version description of the RPC
Item Description
Current Board hardware version E3
Board hardware version E1, E2 and E3. Currently the E1 is out of production.
Similarity The E3RPC03 works in the same way as the E1RPC02

and E2RPC03.

System
Item Description
Difference l The E1RPC02 and E2RPC03/E3RPC03 apply the

forward pumping. The E2RPC01/E3RPC01 apply
the the backward pumping.
l The E2RPC01/E3RPC01 support LOS detection.
Replacement They cannot be replaced by each other.
Type
Table 11-30 lists the types of the RPC.
Table 11-30 Type description of the RPC

RPC 01 Adopts the backward pumping technology.

Supports LOS detection.
03 Adopts the forward pumping technology.

Supports the great amplification of signals.
11.5.2 Application
The RPC is mainly used to generate pump light with multiple channels and high power to amplify
the input optical signals in C band and extended band. The total wavelengths range from 1529
nm to 1568 nm. The RPC is usually used with the EDFA amplifier.
For the application of the board in WDM system, see Figure 11-13 and Figure 11-14.
Figure 11-13 Application of the E3RPC01 in WDM system
OTU OTU
MUX OAU RPC OAU DMUX
OTU
OTU
Client Client
service service
OTU OTU
DMUX OAU RPC OAU MUX
OTU OTU
Figure 11-14 Application of the E3RPC03 in WDM system
OTU OTU
MUX OAU RPC OAU DMUX
OTU
OTU
Client Client
service service
OTU OTU
DMUX OAU RPC OAU MUX
OTU OTU

System

The main functions and features supported by the RPC are distributed online signal optical
amplification, online optical performance monitoring and alarms and performance events
monitoring.
Table 11-31 Functions and features of the RPC

Feature
Basic function Generates pump light with multiple channels and high power.
Provides energy for signal optical amplification in transmission.
Realizes long-haul, broad-bandwidth, low-noise, and distributed
online signal optical amplification.
services.
Alarms and Monitors performance indexes, including the:

performance events l Output power of the board
monitoring
l Pump cooling current
l Pump driving current
l Back-facet current
Performance Events Reference RPC Board Alarm List.
Performance Events Reference RPC Board Performance Event
List.
Auxiliary functions Provides such functions:

l Auto-locks pump power
l Switches on/off pump source
l Divides signal light
l Enables pump laser protection


System

The RPC unit consists of four parts: the Raman pumping module, the drive and detection module,
The RPC unit uses the stimulated Brillouin scattering effect of fibers to amplify the optical
signals during transmission.
The RPC01 unit is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction
of the signal light. Figure 11-15 is the functional block diagram of the RPC unit.
Figure 11-15 Functional block diagram of the backward pump RPC unit
Signal Splitter Signal

LINE SYS
Pump light
MON
Pump source
Raman pumping module
Pumping Detection for
PIN Detecting for
current and pump light
temperature
temperature power and
control current
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack
The RPC03 units are located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction
of the signal light. Figure 11-16 is the functional block diagram of the units.

System
Figure 11-16 Functional block diagram of the forward pump RPC unit
Splitter
Signal Signal
LINE SYS
Pump light
Pump source MON
Raman pumping module
Pumping Detection for
PIN Detecting for
current and pump light
temperature
temperature power and
control current
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
l Backward pump
The pump light generated by the Raman unit of the backward pump is in the opposite
direction of the signal light. On the line, the signal light that is amplified by the distributed
amplification is input through the LINE interface and output to the OTM station through
the SYS interface. The pump light that is generated by the Raman unit is output to the
optical line through the LINE interface in the opposite direction of the signal light.
l Forward pump
The pump light generated by the Raman unit of the forward pump is in the same direction
of the signal light. The signal light that is generated by the OTM station is input through
the SYS interface and output to the optical line through the LINE interface. The pump light
that is generated by the Raman unit is output to the optical line through the LINE interface
in the same direction of the signal light, to realize the distributed amplification of the optical
signal.
Functional Modules
l Raman pump optical module
– The pump source generates pump light of high power for the distributed light
amplification on the line.

System

temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
– Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
board.
11.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the RPC front panel.

Figure 11-17 shows the RPC front panels.

System
Figure 11-17 RPC front panels
RPC
RUN
ALM
LAS
LINE
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
SYS MON
Indicators
There are three indicators on the front panel.

l Pump Laser status indicator (LAS) - green

System
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the E3RPC01/E3RPC03.
Table 11-32 Types and functions of the E3RPC01/E3RPC03 interfaces

LINE LSH/APC Receives optical signals from the line. Transmits

pump light.
SYS LC Transmits amplified signals.
MON LC Connected to the MCA or an optical spectrum

analyzer to accomplish in-service monitoring of
optical spectrum.
signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power).
11.5.6 Valid Slots

The RPC occupies two slots.
11.5.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the RPC configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 11-33 Display of the RPC optical interfaces

LINE 1
SYS 2
EXT (only for E1RPC) 3
MON 4
11.5.9 RPC Board Specifications

RPC board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 11-34, and Table 11-35 list the optical specifications of the RPC.
Table 11-34 Optical specifications of the E3RPC01
Pump wavelength range nm 1400 - 1500
Maximum pump power dBm 28.5
Channel gain on G.652 fiber a dB > 10
Channel gain on LEAF fiber a dB > 12
Channel gain on TW RS fiber a dB > 13
Channel gain on G.653 fiber a dB NA
Effective noise figure on G.652 fiber dB ≤0
Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber dB ≤-1
Effective noise figure on TW RS fiber dB ≤ - 1.5
Effective noise figure on G.653 fiber dB NA
Output connector type - LSH / APC
a: This gain refers to on-off gain, that is, the power difference between RPC ON and RPC
OFF.

System
Table 11-35 Optical specifications of the E3RPC03
Pump wavelength range nm 1400 - 1500
Numbers of the Pump - ≤6
Maximum pump power dBm 29.5
Channel gain on LEAF fiber a dB NA
Channel gain on TW RS fiber a dB NA
Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber dB NA
Effective noise figure on TW RS fiber dB NA
Output connector type - LSH / APC
a: This gain refers to on-off gain, that is, the power difference between RPC ON and RPC
OFF.
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption


System
Hardware Description 12 System Control, Supervision and Communication Board
12 System Control, Supervision and

Communication Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of system control, supervision and
communication boards.
12.1 SCC
SCC: System control and communication board.
12.2 PMU
PMU: power and environment monitoring unit

System
12 System Control, Supervision and Communication Board Hardware Description
12.1 SCC
SCC: System control and communication board.

The available hardware version of the SCC is E4.
Version
Table 12-1 lists the version description of the SCC.
Table 12-1 Version description of the SCC

Item Description
Currrent board E4
hardware version
Board hardware E2 and E4

version
Similarity E4SCC and E2SCC work in the same way.
Difference E4SCC dosenot support CF card, but E2SCC does.
Replacement E4SCC can replace E2SCC.
Type
NA
12.1.2 Application
The SCC works with the NM to manages the s and transmits various maintenance and
management message.

The main functions and features supported by the SCC are to manage the boards and transmit
various maintenance and management message.

System
Table 12-2 Functions and features of the SCC

Function and Feature Description
Basic function l Communicates with boards of the network element (NE), and
performs board configuration and the collects the
performance and alarm data of the boards.
l Receives the clock signals sent by the OSC in the upstream
station to ensure that the clock of the SCC in the local station
is synchronous with that in the upstream station, and sends the
clock in the local station to the downstream station.
l Supports warm patch for the NE software. When a part of the
NE software needs to be upgraded, it is only necessary to
upgrade the software modules that have been modified instead
of upgrading the whole NE software.
l Supports the backup of the SCC data.
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the data of the
SCC so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the
replacement of the SCC.
l Supports simple network management protocol (SNMP).
l Supports IP over DCC.
l Supports OSI over DCC.
NOTE
The E4SCC does not support the CF card.
Basic function DCC Supports data communication channel (DCC) communication

communication with the NEs for network management.
Alarm function Provides the audible or visual alarm for the system.
Performance Events Reference SCC Board Alarm List.
Power protection -

The SCC unit consists of six parts: the control and processing module, the overhead processing
module, the monitoring module, the clock module, the communication module, and the power
supply module.
Figure 12-1 is the functional block diagram of the SCC unit.

System
Figure 12-1 Functional block diagram of the SCC unit
Other units
Clock module
Overhead
Control and Monitoring
processing
processing module module
module
Power supply
module
Communication
Fuse Required module
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply
from a subrack
Other units
Signal Flow
NA
Module Function
l Control and processing module
Controls, monitors, and manages each functional module of the unit.
l Overhead processing module
– Receives the overhead signals from service units and processes the overhead signals.
– Sends the processed overhead signals to service units.
l Monitoring module
Detects whether each unit in the subrack is online, and reports the related alarms to the
T2000.
l Clock module
Provides a clock source for the system.
– Receives the clock signals from the OSC unit at the upstream station, and ensures that
the local clock of the local unit is synchronous with the clock.
– Sends the local clock to the downstream station by using the OSC unit.
l Communication module
Communicates with each unit in the subrack, and reports the data of other units to the
T2000.

System

board.
12.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers

There are two jumpers on the SCC board. They are identified as J13 and J14 respectively and
used for monitoring the power supply of the equipment.
For the position of jumpers on an SCC board, see Figure 12-2.
Figure 12-2 Jumpers on the SCC
Power supply
module
J13
J14
CPU
l J13: Used to detect the first PFU input. When the jumper cap is on, it indicates that the -48
V power supply is monitored; when the jumper cap is off, the -60 V power supply is
monitored.
l J14: Used to detect the second PFU input. When the jumper cap is on, it indicates that the
-48 V power supply is monitored; when the jumper cap is off, the -60 V power supply is
monitored.
12.1.6 Front Panel

There are indicators, laser safety label, switch and button on the SCC front panel.

Figure 12-3 shows the SCC front panel.

System
Figure 12-3 SCC front panel
SCC SCC
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
ETH ETN
RST
RST
ALC
ALC
ETH
E2SCC E4SCC
Indicators
There are three indicators on the front panel.
l Ethernet status indicator (ETN) - yellow
Switch and Button

There are one button and one switch on the front panel.
Table 12-3 lists the function of each button and switch.

System
Table 12-3 Functions of the SCC button and switch
Button/Switch Function
ALC switch Used to mute the alarm sound.
RST button Used to reset the SCC. When the SCC board reset, the communication
will be interrupted with the SCC board and T2000, the same as the SCC
board and the other boards.
Interface
There are one electrical interface on the front panel of the E4SCC.
Table 12-4 lists the type and function of the interface.
Table 12-4 Types and functions of the E4SCC interface
Interfa Connector Description

ce Type
ETH RJ-45 It is not used.
12.1.7 Valid Slots

The SCC occupies one slot.
Valid slot for the board is IU7.

This section introduces slot information for the SCC configuration in an NM system.
Display of the Slot

12.1.9 SCC Board Specifications

SCC board specifications include mechanical specifications and power consumption.

345.0 mm × 24.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 0.9 in. × 8.6 in.)

System
Power Consumption

12.2 PMU
PMU: power and environment monitoring unit

The available hardware version of the PMU is E1.
Version
Table 12-5 lists the version description of the PMU.
Table 12-5 Version description of the PMU
Item Description
Board hardware E1
version
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA
12.2.2 Application
The PMU is mainly used to monitor the voltage of two power supplies of the independent OLA
subrack, and report overvoltage and undervoltage alarms and detected voltage value to the SCC.

The main functions and features supported by the PMU are power monitoring, environment
monitoring and alarms and lightening-proof circuit status monitoring.

System
Table 12-6 Functions and features of the PMU

Feature
Power monitoring Monitors the voltage of two power supplies of the independent OLA
subrack, and reports overvoltage and undervoltage alarms and
detected voltage value to the SCC.
Environment Monitors board temperature, and reports performance and alarms

monitoring of temperature to the SCC.
External alarm input Inputs 16 external alarm values to realize the monitoring on the
external alarm remotely.
Alarm output Outputs four alarm values to the DC power distribution cabinet or
the centralized alarm control equipment.
Alarm concatenation Provides alarm concatenation interface.
Indicators driving Drives cabinet indicators and the four indicators for OLA subrack
status on the front panel according to the command from the SCC.
Lightening-proof Receives the status signal of lightening-proof circuit from the DC

circuit status power filter unit (DPFU) and report lightening-proof alarm to the
monitoring SCC.
Auxiliary function Provides 5 V DC power supply for the OADM frame.Provides audio
alarm and alarm test switch.

None
12.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the PMU front panel.

Figure 12-4 shows the PMU front panel.

System
Figure 12-4 PMU front panel
PMU
RUN
CRI
MAJ
MIN
ETH
F&f
Serial1
Serial2
F1
LAMP1
LAMP2
ALM-TEST
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - Orange
l Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - Yellow
Interfaces
There are seven interfaces on the PMU front panel.

System
Table 12-7 Types and functions of the PMU interfaces

ETH RJ-45 Realizes communication between boards in the OLA

subrack and external equipment.
F&f RJ-45 Bears features of RS-232 interfaces.


F1 RJ-45 Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
LAMP1/ RJ-45 Outputs alarm driving signals to cabinet indicators. It

LAMP2 is used for concatenating equipment alarms among
OLA subracks.
12.2.6 Valid Slots

The PMU occupies one slot.
In an independent OLA subrack, slot valid for the board is IU12.

None
12.2.8 PMU Board Specifications

PMU board specifications include optical specifications, mechanical specifications and power
consumption.
The PMU does not provide any optical interface.
345.0 mm × 24.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 0.9 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

System


System 13 Optical Supervisory Channel and Timing Transmission
Hardware Description Board
13 Optical Supervisory Channel and

Timing Transmission Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical supervisory and timing transmission
boards.
13.1 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit.
13.2 SC2
SC2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit.

13 Optical Supervisory Channel and Timing Transmission System
Board Hardware Description
13.1 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit.

The available hardware version of the SC1 is E2.
Version
Table 13-1 lists the version description of the SC1.
Table 13-1 Version description of the SC1
Item Description
Current Board E2
hardware version
Board hardware E1 and E2.

version
Similarity E1 and E2 work in the same way.
Difference E2SC1 dose not support for high power, but E1SC1 does.
Replacement E2SC1 can replace E1SC1.
Type
NA
13.1.2 Application
The SC1 processes one supervisory channel. The SC1 transmits and extracts the overhead
information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.
For the position of the SC1 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-1.
Figure 13-1 Position of the SC1 in the WDM system

OTU OTU
MUX OA OA DMUX
OTU OTU
SC1 FIU FIU SC1
OTU OTU
DMUX OA OA MUX
OTU OTU


The main functions and features supported by the SC1 are to process one supervisory channel.
Table 13-2 Functions and features of the SC1

Basic function Receives, processes and transmits one optical supervisory signal.
Technical features l The OSC does not limit the operating wavelength of optical
amplifier.
l When the line amplifier is faulty, the optical supervisory
channel is still available.
Wavelength The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

The SC1 unit consists of seven modules: the optical receiving module, CMI coding, the overhead
processing module, CMI decoding, the optical transmitting module, the control and
communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 13-2 is the functional block diagram of the SC1 unit.

Figure 13-2 Functional block diagram of the SC1 unit
Frame processing
decoding
O/E E/O
coding
RM TM
CMI
CMI
Overhead
synchronization
Optical Optical
receiving Overhead processing transmitting
module module module
Control

Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Clock recovery
Signal Flow
The O/E module converts optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The
electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The frame
processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the electrical signals and transmits the
overhead bytes to the SCC unit for processing. The overhead processing module receives the
overhead bytes that are processed by the SCC unit and forms the signals into a frame. The framed
electrical supervisory signals are encoded in the CMI encoding module. At last, the electrical
supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the E/O module.
The overhead synchronous module realizes the synchronization between the local unit and the
SCC unit. It ensures that the overhead bytes are synchronously processed by the local unit and
the SCC unit.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals

Figure 13-3 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.

Figure 13-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3 ... 14 15 16 ... 31
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
13-3.
Table 13-3 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC
Timeslot Name Function

Number
1 E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one

orderwire phone requires three bytes.
2 F1 byte Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
3-13, 15 D1-D12 DCC channel

bytes Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the
issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performances.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to
the SCC for processing.
14 ALC byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol
byte.
17 F2 byte Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for
the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose
of specific maintenance.
19 E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone.

Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
Other Reserved -
Functional Modules
l Optical Receiving module
Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.
l Optical transmitting module
Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.
l CMI encoding/decoding module

Performs the mutual conversion between the 4 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
– Frame processing: Performs framed signal processing functions, such as frame search,
frame generation, CRC4 bit error count, remote-end alarming and loss-of-frame (LOF)
alarming.
– Overhead synchronization: Synchronizes overhead data required for SCC
communication with the SCC clock (2M clock and 8K frame header signal).
board.
13.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC1 front panel.

Figure 13-4 shows the SC1 front panel.

Figure 13-4 SC1 front panel
SC1
RUN
ALM
TM RM
Indicators

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the SC1 front panel.

Table 13-4 Types and functions of the SC1 interfaces
Interface Connector type Description
TM LC Connected to the FIU to transmit supervisory

signals
RM LC Connected to the FIU to receive supervisory signals
13.1.6 Valid Slots

The SC1 occupies one slot.
Valid slots for the board are IU6 and IU8.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the SC1 configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 13-5 Display of the SC1 optical interfaces
RM/TM 1
NOTE
13.1.8 SC1 Board Specifications

SC1 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 13-6 lists the optical specifications the SC1.

Table 13-6 Optical interface parameter specifications of the SC1
High power
Signal rate Mbit/s 2.048 a
Line code format - CMI
Launched power dBm 5 to 10
Optical source type - MLM LD
Minimum receiver sensitivity dBm -48

(BER=1x10-12)
a: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding.
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

13.2 SC2
SC2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit.

The available hardware version of the SC2 is E2.

Version
Table 13-7 lists the version description of the SC2.
Table 13-7 Version description of the SC2

Item Description
Current Board E2
hardware version
Board hardware E1 and E2.

version
Similarity E1 and E2 work in the same way.
Difference NA
Replacement E2SC2 can replace E1SC2.
Type
NA
13.2.2 Application
The SC2 processes two supervisory channel. The SC2 transmits and extracts the overhead
information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.
For the position of the SC2 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-5.
Figure 13-5 Position of the SC2 in the WDM system
OA
FIU FIU
SC2
OA

The main functions and features supported by the SC2 are to process two supervisory channel.

Table 13-8 Functions and features of the SC2

Basic function Receives, processes and transmits two optical supervisory

signals.
Realizes the monitoring to the OLA station.
Technical features l The OSC does not limit the operating wavelength of optical
amplifier.
l When the line amplifier is faulty, the optical supervisory
channel is still available.
l The SC2 is independent of the SCC, that is, even if the SCC
is not in position, the SC2 can pass through the DCC and
ensure the supervision on other stations.
Regeneration function The SC2 is transmitted in sections, with 3R function. In each

optical line amplifier, the information can be correctly received,
and new supervisory information can be attached as well.
Wavelength The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

The SC2 unit consists of seven modules: the optical receiving module, CMI coding, the overhead
processing module, CMI decoding, the optical transmitting module, the control and
communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 13-6 is the functional block diagram of the SC2 unit.

Figure 13-6 Functional block diagram of the SC2 unit
Frame processing E/O

RM1 O/E TM1
decoding
coding
CMI
CMI
Overhead
RM2 O/E E/O TM2
synchronization
Optical Optical
receiving Overhead processing transmitting
module module module
Control

Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Clock recovery
Signal Flow
The O/E module converts optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The
electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The frame
processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the electrical signals and transmits the
overhead bytes to the SCC unit for processing. The overhead processing module receives the
overhead bytes that are processed by the SCC unit and forms the signals into a frame. The framed
electrical supervisory signals are encoded in the CMI encoding module. At last, the electrical
supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the E/O module.
The overhead synchronous module realizes the synchronization between the local unit and the
SCC unit. It ensures that the overhead bytes are synchronously processed by the local unit and
the SCC unit.
The signal flow of the two channels of optical supervisory signals is the same.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals

Figure 13-7 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.

Figure 13-7 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3 ... 14 15 16 ... 31
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
13-9.
Table 13-9 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC
Timeslot Name Function

Number
1 E1 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one

orderwire phone requires three bytes.
2 F1 byte Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
3-13, 15 D1-D12 DCC channel

bytes Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the
issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performances.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to
the SCC for processing.
14 ALC byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol
byte.
19 E2 byte Provides the path for orderwire phone.

Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
Other Reserved -
Functional Modules
l Optical Receiving module
Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.
l Optical transmitting module
Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.
l CMI encoding/decoding module

Performs the mutual conversion between the 4 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.
– Frame processing: Performs framed signal processing functions, such as frame search,
frame generation, CRC4 bit error count, remote-end alarming and loss-of-frame (LOF)
alarming.
– Overhead synchronization: Synchronizes overhead data required for SCC
communication with the SCC clock (2M clock and 8K frame header signal).
board.
13.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC2 front panel.

Figure 13-8 shows the SC2 front panel.

Figure 13-8 SC2 front panel
SC2
RUN
ALM
TM1 RM1
TM2 RM2
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the SC2 front panel.

Table 13-10 Types and functions of the SC2 interfaces

TM1/TM2 LC Connected to the FIU to transmit supervisory

signals
RM1/RM2 LC Connected to the FIU to receive supervisory signals
13.2.6 Valid Slots

The SC2 occupies one slot.
Valid slots for the board are IU6 and IU8.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the SC2 configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 13-11 Display of the SC2 optical interfaces

RM1/TM1 1
RM2/TM2 2
NOTE
13.2.8 SC2 Board Specifications

SC2 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 13-12 lists the optical specifications the SC2.

Table 13-12 Optical interface parameter specifications of the SC2

Normal power High power
Signal rate Mbit/s 2.048 a 2.048 a
Line code format - CMI CMI
Launched power dBm -7 to 0 5 to 10
Optical source type - MLM LD MLM LD
Minimum receiver sensitivity dBm -48 -48

(BER=1x10-12)
a: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding.
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

System
Hardware Description 14 Protection Board
14 Protection Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of protection boards.
14.1 DCP
DCP: Double channel protection unit.
14.2 OLP
14.3 SCS
SCS: Synchronization optical channel separator unit.

System
14 Protection Board Hardware Description
14.1 DCP
DCP: Double channel protection unit.

The available hardware version of the DCP is E1.
Version
Table 14-1 lists the version description of the DCP.
Table 14-1 Version description of the DCP
Item Description
Board hardware E1
version
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
Table 14-2 lists the types of the DCP.
Table 14-2 Type description of the DCP
E1DCP 01 Supports optical interface for 1310 nm and 1550 nm single-

mode fiber.
14.1.2 Application
The DCP provides inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection and extended intra-board
wavelength protection for two working/protection OTU pairs so as to realize high-integrated 1
+1 protection.
For the position of the DCP in the WDM system, see Figure 14-1.

System
Figure 14-1 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel
protection)
1 1
OTU OTU
1 1 1 1
OTU OTU
MUX DMUX
OTU 2 OTU 2 2
2 2 2
service DCP 1 FIU FIU 1 DCP service
OTU OTU 1
1 1 1
OTU OTU
DMUX MUX
OTU 2 OTU 2
2 2 2 2
OTU OTU
Figure 14-2 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (extended intra-board wavelength
protection)
TO11
MUX DMUX
TO21
TI1
OTU RI11
OTU
DMUX MUX
RO1
DCP RI21 DCP
TO12
TI2
MUX DMUX
OTU OTU
TO22
RO2
RI12
DMUX MUX
RI22
NOTE
OTU.

The main functions and features supported by the DCP are to provide inter-subrack 1+1 optical
channel protection for two working/protection OTU pairs so as to realize high-integrated 1+1
protection.

System
Table 14-3 Functions and features of the DCP

Feature
Basic function l Provides inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection and extended
intra-board wavelength protection for two working/protection OTU
pairs so as to realize high-integrated 1+1 protection.
l Supports optical interface for 1310 nm and 1550 nm single-mode
fiber.(E1DCP01)
l Supports optical interface for 850 nm multi-mode fiber.(E1DCP02)
Protection schemes l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-end
switching. When the performance of the working fiber declines, the
system automatically switches the service from the working path to
the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because
the APS protocol is not needed.
l Supports secondary power protection

The DCP unit consists of three modules: the optical module, the control and communication
Figure 14-3 is the functional block diagram of the DCP unit.

System
Figure 14-3 Functional block diagram of the DCP unit
TI1 TO11
TO12
Splitter
TI2 TO21
TO22
RI11
RO1
RI12
Optical switch
RI21
RO2
RI22
Splitter
Optical power
detecting module
Optical module
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack
Signal Flow
One DCP unit supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals.
The DCP unit processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section
describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11
and RI12 optical interfaces, and enter the optical switch. The optical switch selects one
from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the
selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected
optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and

System
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module
– The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts.
– The signal dual-fed part divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of
the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.
– The signal selection part receives the optical signals from the working and protection
channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power
of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part
selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it.
board.
14.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the DCP front panel.

Figure 14-4 shows the DCP front panel.

System
Figure 14-4 DCP front panel
DCP
RUN
ALM
TO11 RI11
TO21RI21
TO12 RI12
TO22 RI22
TI1 RO1
TI2 RO2
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DCP front panel.

System
Table 14-4 Types and functions of the DCP interfaces

TI1 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit

the signals of the first channel

the signals of the second channel
RO1 LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive

signals of the first channel

signals of the second channel
TO11 LC Connected to the working OTU to transmit signals

of the first channel
TO12 LC Connected to the protection OTU to transmit signals


of the second channel

RI11 LC Connected to the working OTU to receive signals

RI12 LC Connected to the protection OTU to receive signals



14.1.6 Valid Slots

The DCP occupies one slot.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the DCP configuration in an
NM system.

System
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 14-5 Display of the DCP optical interfaces
RI11/TO11 1
RI12/TO12 2
RI21/TO21 3
RI22/TO22 4
TI1/RO1 5
TI2/RO2 6
NOTE
14.1.8 DCP Board Specifications

DCP board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 14-6 lists the optical specifications of the DCP01.
Table 14-6 Optical interface parameter specifications of the DCP01 (single-mode)
Insertion loss at the transmit end TI1-TO11, dB <4

(single-mode) TI1-TO12,
TI2-TO21,
TI2-TO22
Insertion loss at the receive end (single- RI11-RO1, dB < 1.5

mode) RI12-RO1,
RI21-RO2,
RI22-RO2
Range of the input optical power dBm -35 to +7

System
Alarm threshold of optical power difference dB 3

1528 to 1567
Switching threshold of optical power difference dB 5
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
14.2 OLP
For the unit name, refer to Table 14-8.

The available hardware version of the OLP is E2.
Version
Table 14-7 lists the version description of the OLP.
Table 14-7 Version description of the OLP
Item Description
Current board E2
hardware version

version

System
Item Description
Difference NA
Replacement The E2OLP can replace the E1OLP.
Type
Table 14-8 shows the types of the OLP.
Table 14-8 Type description of the OLP

Board Ty Unit Name Description
pe
E2OL 01 separate subrack Provides inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel

P channel protection protection. Supports optical interface for 850 nm
board (client multi-mode fiber.
wavelength:
multimode 850 nm)
02 separate subrack Provides inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel

channel protection protection and extended intra-board wavelength
board (client protection. Supports optical interface for 1310 nm
wavelength: single- and 1550 nm single-mode fiber.
mode 1310 nm & 1550
nm)
03 optical line protection Provides optical line protection

board
14.2.2 Application
The E2OLP01 provide inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection for one working/protection
OTU pair. The E2LOP02 provides and extended intra-board wavelength protection. The
E2OLP03 provides optical line protection. There are two applications of E2OLP03 in optical
line protection.
For the position of the E2OLP01 and E2OLP02 in the WDM system, see Figure 14-5 and Figure
14-6.
For the position of the E2OLP03 in the WDM system, see Figure 14-7 and Figure 14-8.

System
Figure 14-5 Position of the E2OLP01/E2OLP02 in the WDM system ( inter-subrack 1+1 optical
channel protection)
OTU OTU
MUX DMUX
OTU OTU
Client Client
OLP FIU FIU OLP service
service
OTU OTU
DMUX MUX
OTU OTU
Figure 14-6 Position of the E2OLP02 in the WDM system (extended intra-board wavelength
protection)
TO1
MUX DMUX
RI1
RO DMUX MUX
TI
OTU OLP OLP OTU
TO2
TI MUX DMUX RO
RI2
DMUX MUX
Figure 14-7 Position of the E2OLP03 in the WDM system (optical line protection, method 1)
OTU OTU
MUX DMUX
OTU OTU
Client
Client FIU OLP OLP FIU service
service
OTU OTU
DMUX MUX
OTU OTU

System
Figure 14-8 Position of the E2OLP03 in the WDM system (optical line protection, method 2)
OTU OA FIU FIU OA OTU

MUX DMUX
OTU OTU
OA FIU FIU OA
Client OLP Client
OLP
service service
OA FIU FIU OA
OTU OTU
DMUX MUX
OTU OA FIU FIU OA OTU
NOTE
Figure 14-5, Figure 14-7 and Figure 14-8, every two OTUs, one to transmit and the other to receive signals of
each channel, are actually one OTU.

The E2OLP01 and E2OLP02 provide inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection for one
working/protection OTU pair. The E2OLP03 provides optical line protection.
Table 14-9 Functions and features of the OLP

Feature
Basic function l The E2OLP03 provides optical line protection. This ensures the
services over the fiber line can be received as usual even when the
line is faulty.
l The E2OLP01 provides inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel
protection for one working/protection OTU pair. The E2OLP02
provides inter-subrack 1+1 optical channel protection and extended
intra-board wavelength protection.
Protection l The protection mode is dual-fed and selective receiving and single-
schemes end switching. When the performance of the working fiber declines,
the system automatically switches the service from the working path
to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick
because the APS protocol is not needed.
l Supports secondary power protection.

System

Feature
Power Offset The optical power deviation configuration interface for the working and
standby channels are provided. To ease the impact of the initial optical
power difference on the later switching and to make the system have
sufficient optical power margin. The default deviation of the OLP
board is 0, that is, the optical power of the working channel and the
optical power of the standby channel are adjusted to the same value.
NOTE
In actual application, After the system commissioning is complete, use the optical power deviation
initialization function of the working and protection channels to automatically save the actual input optical
power difference between the working and protection channels of the OLP board. Then, when the optical
power difference changes later, you can re-initialize the difference or configure a proper deviation value
according to the actual network condition.

The OLP unit consists of three parts: the optical module, the control and communication module,
and the power supply module.
Figure 14-9 is the functional block diagram of the OLP unit.
Figure 14-9 Functional block diagram of the OLP unit
Splitter
TI TO1
TO2
Optical switch
RI1
RO
RI2
Splitter
Optical power
detecting module
Optical module
Control

Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC

from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
The OLP unit realizes the dual-fed and selective receiving of one channel of signals.
The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1
and RI2 optical interfaces, and enter the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from
the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the
selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected
optical signals are output through the RO optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module
– The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.
– The signal dual-fed part divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of
the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.
– The signal selection part receives the optical signals from the working and protection
channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power
of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part
selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it.
board.
14.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OLP front panel.

System

Figure 14-10 shows the OLP front panel.
Figure 14-10 OLP front panel
OLP
RUN
ALM
TO1 RI1
TO2 RI2
TI RO
Indicators


System
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the OLP front panel.
Table 14-10 and Table 14-11 list the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-10 Types and functions of the E2OLP01 and E2OLP02 interfaces
TI LC Connected to the client-side equipment to transmit

the signals
RO LC Connected to the client-side equipment to receive

signals
Table 14-11 Types and functions of the E2OLP03 interfaces

TI LC Transmits line signals
RO LC Receives line signals
TO1 LC Transmits working line signals
TO2 LC Transmits protection line signals
RI1 LC Receives working line signals
RI2 LC Receives protection line signals
14.2.6 Valid Slots

The OLP occupies one slot.

System

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the OLP configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


Table 14-12 Display of the OLP optical interfaces

RI1/TO1 1
RI2/TO2 2
TI/RO 3
NOTE
14.2.8 OLP Board Specifications

OLP board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 14-13, Table 14-14 and Table 14-15 lists the optical specifications the OLP.
Table 14-13 Optical interface parameter specifications of the E2OLP01 (multi-mode)

Insertion loss at the transmit TI - TO1 dB < 4.5

end (multi-mode) TI - TO2
Insertion loss at the receive RI1 - RO dB < 5.3

end (multi-mode) RI2 - RO

System
Table 14-14 Optical interface parameter specifications of the E2OLP02 (single-mode)

Insertion loss at the transmit TI - TO1 dB <4

end (single-mode) TI - TO2

end (single-mode) RI2 - RO

1528 to 1567
Table 14-15 Optical interface parameter specifications of the E2OLP03 (single-mode)

Insertion loss at the transmit TI - TO1 dB < 4.0

end (single-mode) TI-TO2

end (single-mode) RI2 - RO
Range of the input optical power dBm -30 to 23

1528 to 1567
Laser Safety Level


System

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

14.3 SCS
SCS: Synchronization optical channel separator unit.

The available hardware version of the SCS is E2.
Version
Table 14-16 lists the version description of the SCS.
Table 14-16 Version description of the SCS
Item Description
Current board E2
hardware version

version
Difference NA
Replacement The E2SCS can replace the E1SCS.
Type
NA
14.3.2 Application
The SCS provides inter-board wavelength protection and 1+1 wavelength protection at client.
For the position of the SCS in the WDM system, see Figure 14-11 and Figure 14-12.

System
Figure 14-11 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (inter-board wavelength protection)
1 1
OTU OTU
1 1 1 1
OTU OTU
MUX DMUX
OTU 2 OTU 2 2
2 2 2
service SCS 1 FIU FIU 1 SCS service
OTU OTU 1
1 1 1
OTU OTU
DMUX MUX
OTU 2 OTU 2
2 2 2 2
OTU OTU
Figure 14-12 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (1+1 wavelength protection at client)
1 1
1 OTU OTU
2 2 2 1
MUX DMUX
1 1 2
Client OTU OTU
service 2 2 Client
SCS FIU FIU SCS service
1 1
OTU OTU
1 2 2 1
2 1 DMUX MUX 1 2
OTU OTU
2 2
NOTE
l An OTU is a transceiver that can transmit and receive signals for the same wavelength at the same time. In
Figure 14-11 and Figure 14-12, every two OTUs, one to transmit and the other to receive signals of each
channel, are actually one OTU.
l In inter-board wavelength protection mode, working and protection wavelengths adopt different routes for
transmission and thus protecting the services.
l In 1+1 wavelength protection mode at client, working and protection OTUs with the convergence function
are used to protect services.

The SCS provides inter-board wavelength protection and 1+1 wavelength protection at client.
Table 14-17 Functions and features of the SCS

Feature
Basic function The SCS provides inter-board wavelength protection and 1+1
wavelength protection at client. When the performance of the working
fiber degrades, signals can be automatically switched to the protection
path.

System

Feature
Protection schemes The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need the
support of protocol. Instead, the channel protection executes switching
by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

The SCS unit consists of three parts: the optical module, the control and communication module,
Figure 14-13 is the functional block diagram of the SCS unit.
Figure 14-13 Functional block diagram of the SCS unit
Optical module
TO11
TI1 Optical splitter
TO12
Optical splitter TO21

TI2
TO22
RI11
RO1 Optical coupler
RI12
Optical coupler RI21

RO2
RI22
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
One SCS unit supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The
SCS unit processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes
the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.

System
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11
and TO12 optical interfaces.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2
optical interfaces, and enter the coupler. The system activates one of the two channels of
optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of path optical signals
is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface.
Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection OTU is standby.
Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm trigger a protection switching. The system
shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
After passing through the splitter, the optical signals accessed from TI1 are demultiplexed
into two optical signals with the optical power ratio of 90:10. The two signals are output
through TO11 and TO12.
l Receive direction
After passing through the coupler, the two optical signals, with the optical power ratio of
90:10, that are input through RI11 and RI12 are multiplexed into one optical signal. The
one signal is output through RO1.
Module Function
l Optical module
– The optical module consists of splitters and couplers.
– The splitter divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same
power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.
– The coupler receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system
selects one channel of optical signals based on the service quality.
board.
14.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SCS front panel.

Figure 14-14 shows the SCS front panel.

System
Figure 14-14 SCS front panel
SCS
RUN
ALM
TO11 RI11
TO21 RI21
TO12 RI12
TO22 RI22
TI1 RO1
TI2 RO2
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the SCS front panel.

System
Table 14-18 Types and functions of the E1SCS interfaces


the signals of the first channel

the signals of the second channel

signals of the first channel

signals of the second channel
TO11/TO12 LC Connected to the OTUs to transmit signals of the

first channel
TO21/TO22 LC Connected to the OTUs to transmit signals of the

second channel
RI11/RI12 LC Connected to the OTUs to receive signals of the first

channel
RI21/RI22 LC Connected to the OTUs to receive signals of the

second channel
14.3.6 Valid Slots

The SCS occupies one slot.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the SCS configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 14-19 Display of the SCS optical interfaces

TI1/RO1 1
TI2/RO2 2
TO11 3
TO12 4
TO21 5
TO22 6
RI11 7
RI12 8
RI21 9
RI22 10
NOTE
14.3.8 SCS Board Specifications

SCS board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 14-20 lists the optical specifications the SCS.
Table 14-20 Optical interface parameter specifications of the SCS

Interface Item Unit Specifications
TI1-TO11 Splitting insertion Single-mode dB < 4.0

TI1-TO21 loss
Multi-mode dB < 4.5
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI11-RO1 Coupling insertion Single-mode dB < 4.0

RI12-RO1 loss
Multi-mode dB < 4.5
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Operating wavelength Single-mode nm 1270 to 1350

1528 to 1567

System
Interface Item Unit Specifications
Multi-mode nm 830 to 870
Operating wavelength deviation Single-mode nm ±40 (1310)

±20 (1550)
Multi-mode nm ±20
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

System
Hardware Description 15 Spectrum Analyzer Board
15 Spectrum Analyzer Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of spectrum analyzer boards.
15.1 MCA
MCA: multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit
15.2 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitor unit

System
15 Spectrum Analyzer Board Hardware Description
15.1 MCA
MCA: multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit

The available hardware version of the MCA board is E1.
Version
Table 15-1 lists the version description of the MCA board.
Table 15-1 Version description of the MCA

Item Description
Current Board E1
hardware version
Board hardware E1 and E2. Current E2 is out of service.

version
Difference The E1MCA board can detect optical power of signals at a rate of
40 Gbit/s while the E2MCA board cannot.
The E1MCA board serves in C band, while the E2MCA board
serves in C band and in extended C band.
Replacement They cannot be replaced by each other.
Type
Table 15-2 lists the type description of the MCA.
Table 15-2 Version description of the MCA

E1MCA0 8 (C) Applied for C band, supporting spectral analysis for eight channels
7 of signals.
E1MCA0 4 (C) Applied for C band, supporting spectral analysis for four channels
8 of signals.

System

NOTE
l When optical signals at a rate of 40 Gbit/s or higher rate are deployed in the system:
l OSNR detection for the optical signals at different rates is not supported if the channel spacing is
50 GHz.
l OSNR detection for only 10 Gbit/s or lower rate optical signals if the channel spacing is 100 GHz.
l When optical signals at a rate of 10 Gbit/s or or lower, OSNR detection is supported for the optical
signals at different rates.
15.1.2 Application
The MCA is a type of spectrum analyzer unit. The MCA provides spectral analysis for optical
signals.
For the position of the board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-1.
Figure 15-1 Position of the MCA in a WDM system
OTU OTU
OAU OAU
service OTU service
OTU
MCA MCA
OTU OTU
OAU OAU
service OTU service
OTU

The main functions and features supported by the MCA are supervising the channel and
analyzing the status of the channel.

System
Table 15-3 Functions and features of the MCA

Feature
Basic function l Supervises the channel.

l Analyzes the status of the channel.
l Generates alarms upon channel loss or new channel added.
l The MCA board can display the following information in
T2000 screen, supervises and reports the:
– Optical power of the channel
– Center wavelength
– Optical signal noise ratio (OSNR)
– Number of wavelengths in the main optical path
l For the MCA board, the time between successive scans of the
same port is about 17s.
NOTE
The MCA board supports detect of central wavelength and number of
wavelengths for all rate optical signals.
l When optical signals at a rate of 40 Gbit/s or higher are deployed in the
system:
l The MCA board does not detect OSNR for all optical signals if
wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.
l The MCA board detects OSNR only for optical signals at a rate of
10 Gbit/s or lower if wavelength spacing is 100 GHz.
l When optical signals at a rate of 10 Gbit/s or lower are deployed, the
MCA board detects OSNR for all the signals..
Optical switch Selects optical channels by using an optical switch.
Power protection –

The MCA unit consists of five parts: the 1 x 8 optical switch, the optical spectral analysis module,
the driving and control module, the control and communication module, and the power supply
module.
Figure 15-2 is the functional block diagram of the MCA unit.

System
Figure 15-2 Functional block diagram of the MCA unit

R01
R02
R03
Optical spectral analysis
R04
R05 module
R06
R07 1X8 optical switch
R08
Control Driving Data

signal signal signal
Driving and control module
Control

Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply SCC
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The 1 x 8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical spectral
analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter
is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and
communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC unit and the T2000. The final
spectrum analysis results are displayed on the T2000.
Module Function
The MCA unit consists of five parts: the 1 x 8 optical switch, the optical spectral analysis module,
the driving and control module, the control and communication module, and the power supply
module.
l 1 x 8 optical switch
Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.
l Optical spectral analysis module
Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.
l Driving and control module
– Drives and controls spectrum.

System
– Controls the 1 x 8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.
board.
15.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the MCA front panel.

Figure 15-3 shows the MCA front panel.

System
Figure 15-3 MCA front panel
MCA
RUN
ALM
RO1 RO2
RO3 RO4
RO5 RO6
RO7 RO8
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the MCA front panel.

System
Table 15-4 Types and functions of the MCA interfaces
R01-R08 LC Connected to the MON interfaces of other board

to receive optical signals that are for analysis.
15.1.6 Valid Slots

The MCA occupies two slots.
15.1.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the MCA configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.
Table 15-5 Display of the MCA optical interfaces
R01-R08 1-8
NOTE
Only R01-R04 are used for MCA-4.

System
15.1.9 MCA Board Specifications

MCA board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 15-6 lists the optical specifications of the MCA.
Table 15-6 Optical specifications of the E1MCA

Operating wavelength range nm C band: 1529 - 1561
Detect range for single channel dBm -30 to -10

optical power
Detect accuracy for optical dBm ±1.5

power
OSNR accuracy (The detect dB ±1.5 (OSNR between 13 dB and 19 dB)

range for signal-to-noise ratio is
13 dB to 23 dB, and the dB ±2.0 (OSNR between 19 dB and 23 dB)
wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
Detect accuracy for central nm ±0.1

wavelength
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 76.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 3.0 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
15.2 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitor unit

System

The available hardware version of the WMU is E1.
Version
Table 15-7 lists the version description of the WMU.
Table 15-7 Version description of the WMU

Item Description
Board hardware E1
version
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
Table 15-8 lists the type description of the MCA.
Table 15-8 Version description of the WMU

WMU 01 Supports optical wavelength and power detection module.
15.2.2 Application
The WMU is a type of wavelength monitoring unit. In the system, the WMU can monitor the
wavelength and optical power of optical signals online and report the wavelength and optical
power monitored to the SCC for processing.
The WMU monitors the optical signals output from the MON optical interface of the optical
amplifier board to realize the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions.

System
Figure 15-4 Position of the WMU01 in a WDM system
W E
OSC/OTC
OA DMUX MUX OA
FIU WMU
WMU FIU
FIU
OA MUX DMUX OA
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Client Client
service service
NOTE
A WMU can complete the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions at the same time. In Figure
15-4, every two WMUs are actually one WMU.

The main functions and features supported by the WMU are wavelength monitoring.
Table 15-9 Functions and features of the WMU

Feature
Basic function l Supports the centralized wavelength monitoring function of the

OTU unit at the transmit end of the system with a channel
spacing of 50 GHz.
l The WMU performs the centralized monitoring to the
wavelengths of the OTU at the transmit end of the system. The
unit can monitor two channels of wavelengths in the optical
transmit direction.
Optical switch Selects the optical signals of one direction for monitoring through
the optical switch.

System

Feature

The WMU unit consists of four parts: the 1 × 2 optical switch, the optical wavelength and power
Figure 15-5 is the functional block diagram of the WMU unit.
Figure 15-5 Functional block diagram of the WMU unit
IN1
Optical wavelength and power detection
IN2 module
1X2 optical switch
Control Control Data

Control
Power supply module
Power supply module

Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The 1 × 2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical
wavelength and power detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and
converted, the wavelength and optical power information is sent to the control and
communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further
reports the results to the SCC unit and the T2000. The final results are displayed on the
T2000.
Module Function
The WMU unit consists of four parts: the 1 × 2 optical switch, the optical wavelength and power

System
l 1 × 2 optical switch
Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for
optical wavelength and power detection.
l Optical wavelength and power detection module
Detects optical signals from the optical channel selection module, and reports the
wavelength and optical power information to the SCC unit.
board.
15.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WMU front panel.

Figure 15-6 shows the front panel of the WMU.

System
Figure 15-6 WMU front panel
WMU
RUN
ALM
IN1 IN2
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the WMU front panel.
Table 15-10and Table 15-11 list the type and function of each interface.
Table 15-10 Types and functions of the WMU01 interfaces

IN1-IN2 LC Respectively connects to the MON optical interfaces

on the optical amplifier boards in the two transmission
directions for centralized wavelength monitoring.
Table 15-11 Types and functions of the WMU02 interfaces

IN1 LC Respectively connects to the MON optical interfaces

on the multiplexer boards for centralized wavelength
monitoring (Only monitor C-EVEN wavelength).
IN2 LC Respectively connects to the MON optical interfaces

on the multiplexer boards for centralized wavelength
monitoring (Only monitor C-ODD wavelength).
15.2.6 Valid Slots

The WMU occupies one slot.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the WMU configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


theboard front panel.

System
Table 15-12 Display of the WMU optical interfaces
IN1-IN2 1-2
15.2.8 WMU Board Specifications

WMU board specifications include optical specifications, mechanical specifications and power
consumption.
Table 15-13 lists the optical specifications of the WMU.
Table 15-13 Optical specifications of the WMU01
Channel spacing - Supports the wavelength monitoring of the

system with the wavelength spacing of 50 GHz.
Detect accuracy for central GHz ±2.5

frequency
Detect accuracy for single dBm ±1.5

channel optical power
Single channel input power dBm -14 to -28

range
Detect range for single channel GHz -10 to +10

wavelength deviation

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption


System
Hardware Description 16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board
16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope

Equalizing Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical power and dispersion slope
equalizing boards.
16.1 GFU
GFU: gain flatness unit

System
16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board Hardware Description
16.1 GFU
GFU: gain flatness unit

The available hardware version of GFU is E3.
Version
Table 16-1 shows the version description of the GFU.
Table 16-1 Version description of the GFU
Item Description
Current board E3
hardware version

version
Difference NA
Replacement The E3GFU can replace the E1GFU.
Type
Table 16-2 shows the type description of the GFU.
Table 16-2 Type description of the GFU
GFU 03 Working with the Raman amplifier
02 Working with the ROP amplifier
16.1.2 Application
The GFU is used to equalize optical power by working with the Raman amplifier. This achieves
gain flatness of cascaded optical amplifiers.
For the position of the board in the WDM system, see Figure 16-1 and Figure 16-2.

System
Figure 16-1 Position of the GFU in the WDM system (method 1)

DCM
OAU GFU OBU

RPC
FIU FIU
SC2
OBU GFU OAU RPC
DCM
Figure 16-2 Position of the GFU in the WDM system (method 2)

GFU DCM
OAU OBU
RPC
FIU FIU
SC2
OBU OAU RPC
DCM GFU

The main functions and features supported by the GFU are optical power equalization and
software loading in-service.
Table 16-3 Functions and features of the GFU

Feature
Basic function Equalizes the optical power of cascaded optical Raman amplifiers.
Every two levels of cascading can use one GFU to offer static
compensation for the gain flatness of the system.
Supports the application of one GFF, and thus optimizing gain
flatness of one fiber.
Information query Queries board ambient temperature, detailed board information,

board software version and optical component type.
Software loading in- Supports online loading of board software.

service

System

Feature
Power protection -

The GFU unit consists of three parts: the optical module, the control and communication module,
Figure 16-3 is the functional block diagram of the GFU unit.
Figure 16-3 Functional block diagram of the GFU unit
Optical module
IN OUT
GFF module
Control
Power supply module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC unit, the GFU unit provides the fixed optical power
equilibrium function by using the gain flattening filter (GFF) module.
Module Function
l Optical module
Adopts the GFF module. It is a passive optical device. Provides static compensation for the
gain unflatness after cascaded amplifiers.

System
board.
16.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the GFU front panel.

Figure 16-4 shows the GFU front panel.
Figure 16-4 GFU front panel
GFU
RUN
ALM
IN OUT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

System
Indicators

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the GFU front panel.
Table 16-4 Types and functions of the GFU interfaces
IN LC Connected to the OAU or the DCM to input the first

channel optical signals that is to be gain flattened
OUT LC Connected to the OBU or the OAU to output the first

channel optical signals that is gain flattened
16.1.6 Valid Slots

The GFU occupies one slots.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the GFU configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot



System
Table 16-5 Display of the GFU optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
NOTE
An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves
to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.
16.1.8 GFU Board Specifications

GFU board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 16-6 and Table 16-7 list the optical specifications of the GFU.
Table 16-6 Optical specifications of the GFU03 (used with Raman amplifier)
Channel insertion loss dB 1.0-5.0
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5

(PDL)
Table 16-7 Optical specifications of the GFU02 (used with ROP amplifier)
Channel insertion loss dB 0.5-6.0
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5

(PDL)
Laser Safety Level


System

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
l Weight: 0.9 kg (2 lb.)
Power Consumption

System
Hardware Description 17 Variable Optical Attenuator Board
17 Variable Optical Attenuator Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of variable optical attenuator boards.
17.1 VA4
VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
17.2 VOA
VOA: variable optical attenuator unit

System
17 Variable Optical Attenuator Board Hardware Description
17.1 VA4
VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

The available hardware version of the VA4 is E2.
Version
Table 17-1 lists the version description of the VA4.
Table 17-1 Version description of the VA4

Item Description
Current Board E2
hardware version

version
Difference The E1VA4 supports input optical power reporting, but the E2VA4
does not.
Replacement The E2VA4 can replace the E1VA4.
Type
NA
17.1.2 Application
The VA4 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA4 realizes the power adjustment
for 4 optical signals.

System
Figure 17-1 Position of the VA4 in a WDM system
OTU OTU OTU OTU
VA4 VA4
VA4 OA VA4 OA
MR2 VA4 MR2
OA VA4 OA VA4
:Fixed attenuator
NOTE
Every two VA4s in Figure 17-1 between the MR2s and the OTUs are actually one VA4.

The main functions and features supported by the VA4 are optical power adjustment and alarm
monitoring.
Table 17-2 Functions and features of the VA4

Feature
Basic function l Adjusts the optical power of four channels of optical signals.
l Monitors the attenuation, and reports alarms.
Mainly used in OADM equipment. The VA4 is located before the
M40 to adjust the power of the accessed optical signals.
Attenuation range The range of variable attenuation is 1.5 dB to 20 dB.
Power protection -

The VA4 unit consists of four parts: the variable optical attenuator, the driving and control
module, the control and communication module and the power supply module.
Figure 17-2 is the functional block diagram of the VA4 unit.

System
Figure 17-2 Functional block diagram of the VA4 unit
IN1 Variable optical attenuator OUT1
Control signal Data signal

Driving signal
Control

Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply from SCC

a subrack
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC unit, the VA4 unit adjusts the optical signals input
through the INn(n=1 - 4) interface by using four variable optical attenuators.
Module Function
l Variable optical attenuator
Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to
the control and communication module.

System

board.
17.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA4 front panel.

Figure 17-3 shows the VA4 front panel.
Figure 17-3 VA4 front panel
VA4
RUN
ALM
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
IN3 OUT3
IN4 OUT4
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

System
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the VA4 front panel.
Table 17-3 Types and functions of the VA4 interfaces

IN1-IN4 LC Connected to the units to receive optical signals that

are for power adjustment
OUT1-OUT4 LC Connected to the units to transmit adjusted optical

signals
17.1.6 Valid Slots

The VA4 occupies one slot.
17.1.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the VA4 configuration in an
NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 17-4 Display of the VA4 optical interfaces
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
IN3/OUT3 3
IN4/OUT4 4
NOTE
17.1.9 VA4 Board Specifications

VA4 board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 17-5 lists the optical specifications of the VA4.
Table 17-5 Optical interface parameter specifications of the VA4
Attenuation range dB 1.5 - 20
Adjustment accuracy dB 0.7 (attenuation ≤ 10 dB)

1.0 (attenuation ≤ 15 dB)
Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)

System
Power Consumption

17.2 VOA
VOA: variable optical attenuator unit

The available hardware version of the VOA is E2.
Version
Table 17-6 lists the version description of the VOA.
Table 17-6 Version description of the VOA
Item Description
Current E2
Board hardware
version
Board hardware 72 and E2.

version
Similarity The E2 works in the same way as the 72.
Difference The 72VOA supports input optical power reporting, but the E2VOA
does not.
Replacement The E2VOA can replace the 72VOA.
Type
NA
17.2.2 Application
The VOA is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VOA realizes the power adjustment
for one optical signal.

System
Figure 17-4 Position of the VOA in a WDM system
OTU OTU OTU OTU
VOA VOA VOA VOA
VA4 OA VA4 OA
MR2 MR2
OA VA4 OA VA4
: Fixed attenuator

The main functions and features supported by the VOA are optical power adjustment and alarm
monitoring.
Table 17-7 Functions and features of the VOA

Feature
Basic function l Adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the
control command sent by the SCC.
l Monitors the attenuation, and reports alarms.
l Mainly used in OADM and OLA equipment.
Attenuation range The range of variable attenuation is 1.5 dB to 20 dB.
Protection schemes -

The VOA consists of four parts: the variable optical attenuator, the driving and control module,
the control and communication module and the power supply module.
Figure 17-5 shows the functional modules of the VOA.

System
Figure 17-5 Functional block diagram of the VOA
IN Variable optical attenuator OUT
Control signal Data signal

Driving signal
Control

Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply from SCC

a subrack
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC unit, the VOA unit adjusts the power of one channel
of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l Variable optical attenuator
Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to
the control and communication module.
board.

System
17.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VOA front panel.

Figure 17-6 shows the front panel of the VOA.
Figure 17-6 VOA front panel
VOA
RUN
ALM
IN OUT
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

System

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the VOA front panel.
Table 17-8 Types and functions of the VOA interfaces
IN LC Connected to the unit to receive an optical signal that

is for power adjustment
OUT LC Connected to the unit to transmit an adjusted optical

signal
17.2.6 Valid Slots

The VOA occupies one slot.
17.2.7 Bar Code

Board.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the VOA configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


board front panel.

System
Table 17-9 Display of the VOA optical interfaces
IN/OUT 1
NOTE
17.2.9 VOA Board Specifications

VOA board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 17-10 lists the optical specifications of the VOA.
Table 17-10 Optical interface parameter specifications of the VOA
Attenuation range dB 1.5 - 20
Adjustment accuracy dB 0.7 (attenuation ≤ 10 dB)

Laser Safety Level


345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption


System
Hardware Description 18 Optical Fiber Automatic Monitoring Board
18 Optical Fiber Automatic Monitoring

Board
About This Chapter
Describes the function and the working principle of optical fiber automatic monitoring boards.
18.1 FMU
FMU: fiber measure unit board
18.2 MWA
MWA: measure wavelength access board
18.3 MWF
MWF: measure wavelength filter board

System
18 Optical Fiber Automatic Monitoring Board Hardware Description
18.1 FMU
FMU: fiber measure unit board

The available hardware version of the FMU is E1.
Version
Table 18-1 lists the version description of the FMU.
Table 18-1 Version description of the FMU

Item Description
Board hardware E1
version
Similarity NA
Difference NA
Replacement NA
Type
NA
18.1.2 Application
DWDM nodes can be the OTM, OLA, OADM, OEQ or REG. The FMU sends out test optical
pulse, as well as receives, collects, processes and reports reflected signal. By this way, the FMU
board monitors the running conditions of the working optical fiber in real time. One FMU can
monitor up to four optical fibers.
Figure 18-1 Application of the FMU in WDM system

DWDM node DWDM node DWDM node
MWF
MWA
MWF
FMU

System

The main functions and features supported by the FMU are monitoring, testing function and
alarms and software upgrade online.
Table 18-2 Functions and features of the FMU

Functions and Description
Features
Basic function Sends out test optical pulse.

Receives, collects, processes and reports the reflected signal, and
thus monitoring the running conditions of the working optical fiber
in real time.
One FMU can monitor four optical fibers at the same time.
It selects the optical fiber to be tested through the optical switch.
Monitoring modes Supports two types of monitoring modes: online and standby optical
fiber.
The FMU can be configured with two OTDR modules of different
wavelengths. The OTDR at 1310 nm is used for online monitoring,
while the OTDR at 1550 nm for monitoring standby fiber.
Testing function Supports auto-test and manual test.
Software upgrade Supports online load and upgrade of FPGA and board software.
online

The FMU consists of optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) module, 1:4 optical switch and
control and communication module.
Figure 18-2 shows the principle block diagram of the FMU.

System
Figure 18-2 Principle block diagram of the FMU
TFM1
TFM2
TFM3 OTDR module
TFM4
1X4 optical switch
Driving Driving Data

Driving and detection module
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
SCC Back plane
DC power supply
from a subrack
Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) module

The OTDR module sends out monitoring optical pulse and receives reflected optical signal.
After processing and analysis, the module reports the data to the CPU.
1:4 optical switch

The 1:4 optical switch module inputs the monitoring optical signal, which is sent from the OTDR
module, into the designated test optical fiber. This realizes the monitoring upon four connected
optical fibers.

The control and communication module rearranges the commands of the SCC and sends these
commands to the OTDR module and optical switch module to control their operations.
The control and communication module compares the data collected by the OTDR with the
reference data stored in the board. If the data exceeds the threshold, an alarm raises.
The control and communication module communicates the data between the FMU and the SCC
18.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FMU front panel.

System

Figure 18-3 shows the front panel of the FMU.
Figure 18-3 The front panel of the FMU
FMU
RUN
ALM
TFM1 TFM2
TFM3 TFM4
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
Indicators

System
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the FMU.
Table 18-3 Types and functions of the FMU interfaces
TFM1 LC Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical

fiber.

fiber.

fiber.

fiber.
18.1.6 Valid Slots

The FMU occupies three slots.
l In an ordinary subrack, slots valid for the board are IU1-IU4, IU8-IU11.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the FMU configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot

A logical board is only a conceptual board, referred to the board information stored in the
database of the network management system.
A physical board is an actual board that has been configured on the NE.
The FMU occupies three slots. The slot number displayed on the T2000 is the number of the
first slot occupied by the board. For example, if the FMU is installed in IU1, IU2 and IU3, the
slot number displayed on the T2000 is IU1.

board front panel.

System
Table 18-4 Display of the FMU optical interfaces

TFM1 1
TFM2 2
TFM3 3
TFM4 4
18.1.8 FMU Board Specifications

FMU board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 18-5 lists the optical specifications of the FMU.
Table 18-5 Optical specifications of the FMU
Item Unit Index
Online monitor Standby fiber monitor
Test wavelength nm 1310±25 1550±25
OTDR dynamic range dB 39.5 a 38.5 a
Event dead zone 10 m (33 ft.) b
Attenuation dead zone 30 m (98 ft.) c
Pulse width 10ns, 30ns, 100ns, 300ns, 10ns, 30ns, 100ns, 300ns,
1μs, 3μs, 10μs, 20μs 1μs, 3μs, 10μs, 20μs
Pulse output power dBm ≤20
Distance accuracy m ±1m (3.3 ft.) ±5 x 10-5 x test distance ± spacing between
the sample points (not including the group index error)
Readout resolution dB 0.001
Reflection measurement dB ±2.0

resolution
Linearity dB/dB ±0.05
Group index - 1.400 to 1.700
Working temperature °C/°F -5 to +55 (23 to 131)

System
a: The loss incurred by online optical switch and the coupler is considered for the FMU. The
dynamic value is 1-2 dB smaller than the value of the OTDR component. Besides, the OTDR
effective dynamic range in online monitor mode is different from that in standby fiber monitor
mode.
b: Test conditions: The pulse width of the test signal is 10ns, and the return loss is not more than
-35 dB.
c: Test conditions: The pulse width of the test signal is 10ns, and the return loss is not more than
-35 dB.
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 114.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 4.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
18.2 MWA
MWA: measure wavelength access board

The available hardware version of the MWA is E2.
Version
Table 18-6 lists the version description of the MWA.
Table 18-6 Version description of the MWA

Item Description

version

version

System
Item Description
Difference NA
Replacement The E2MWA can replace the E1MWA.
Type
Table 18-7 lists the types of the MWA.
Table 18-7 Type description of the MWA
MWA MWA-II Usually used at the OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. The MWA-
II carries four DWDM multiplexing components and accesses four
channels of OTDR monitoring optical signals.
18.2.2 Application
The MWA multiplexes the monitoring wavelength of the OAMS with service wavelengths. This
realizes on-line monitoring upon the optical fiber.
Figure 18-4 Application of the MWA in WDM system

MWF
MWA
MWF
FMU

The main functions and features supported by the MWA is information report.

System
Table 18-8 Functions and features of the MWA

Features
Basic function Multiplexes the OTDR optical fiber monitoring signal and service
signal of the DWDM transmission system.
Accesses optical fiber monitoring wavelength at 1310 nm, so as to
realize on-line monitoring of optical fibers.
Information report Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information of the
board.

The MWA consists of WDM modules, the control and communication module and the power
supply module.
Figure 18-5 shows the principle block diagram of the MWA.
Figure 18-5 Principle block diagram of the MWA

RFM1 RFM2
Optical module 1310nm
WDM 1550nm
LIN1 TS1
module 1310nm
WDM 1550nm
OUT1 RS1
module
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
SCC
Back plane
DC power supply
from a subrack

System
Signal Flow
The service signal from the output optical interface of the FIU is output to the DWDM
module through RS1 optical interface. At the same time, the OTDR monitoring signal from
the FMU board enters the DWDM module through RFM2 optical interface.
After being multiplexed, the two signals are output, through OUT1 optical interface, to the
line fiber for monitoring.
l Receive direction
The service signal in the optical fiber enters the DWDM module through LIN1 optical
interface. At the same time, the OTDR monitoring signal from the FMU enters the DWDM
module through RFM1 optical interface of the MWA.
The service signal and monitoring signal are multiplexed reversely in the DWDM module.
After passing the DWDM module, the service signal is output to the FIU from TS1 optical
interface along its original transmission direction. But the monitoring signal is transmitted
in the contrary direction, entering LIN1 optical interface for monitoring.
Module Function
l WDM module
The optical module consists of multiple WDM modules, accesses multiple channels of
OTDR monitoring optical signals, so as to realize on-line monitoring of optical fibers.
board.
18.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the MWA front panel.

Figure 18-6 shows the front panel of the MWA.

System
Figure 18-6 The front panel of the MWA-I and the MWA-II
MWA MWA
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
LIN1 OUT1 LIN1 OUT1
TS1 RS1 TS1 RS1
RFM1RFM2 RFM1RFM2
LIN2OUT2
TS2 RS2
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
RFM3RFM4
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MWA-I MWA-II
Indicators
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWA-I.

System
Table 18-9 Types and functions of the MWA-I interfaces

LIN1 LC Input optical interface of the main path.
OUT1 LC Output optical interface of the main path.
TS1 LC Service wavelength output optical interface, connected

with the input optical interface of the FIU.
RS1 LC Service wavelength input optical interface, connected

with the output optical interface of the FIU.
RFM1 LC Monitoring wavelength access optical interface,

connected with one output optical interface of the
FMU.
RFM2 LC Monitoring wavelength access optical interface,

connected with one output optical interface of the
FMU.
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWA-II.

Table 18-10 Types and functions of the MWA-II interfaces

LIN1/LIN2 LC Input optical interface of the main path.
OUT1/OUT2 LC Output optical interface of the main path.
TS1/TS2 LC Service wavelength output optical interface, connected

with the input optical interface of the FIU.
RS1/RS2 LC Service wavelength input optical interface, connected

with the output optical interface of the FIU.
RFM1/ LC Monitoring wavelength access optical interface,

RFM2/ connected with one output optical interface of the
RFM3/RFM4 FMU.
NOTE
On the front panel, there are 12 optical interfaces, divided into two groups:
l LIN1/OUT1/TS1/RS1/RFM1/RFM2
l LIN2/OUT2/TS2/RS2/RFM3/RFM4
Each interface in group 1 matches that in group 2 one to one. The interfaces are used in two directions of the
regenerator.

System
18.2.6 Valid Slots

The MWA occupies one slot.

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the MWA configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


None
18.2.8 MWA Board Specifications

MWA board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 18-11 lists the optical specifications of the MWA.
Table 18-11 Optical specifications of the MWA
Item Unit Index
Wavelength range of the transmission channel nm 1500 to 1635
Wavelength range of the reflection channel nm 1280 to 1340
Insertion loss of the transmission channel dB 1.2

(including that of the connector)
Insertion loss of the reflection channel (including dB 1.0

that of the connector)
Flatness (whole operating wavelength range) dB 0.4
Isolation (transmission channel versus reflection dB ≥40

channel)
Isolation (reflection channel versus transmission dB ≥40

channel)
Return loss dB ≥45

System
Item Unit Index
Directivity dB ≥55
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤0.1
Polarization mode dispersion ps ≤0.1
Maximum input power dBm 27
Laser Safety Level

345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption
18.3 MWF
MWF: measure wavelength filter board

The available hardware version of the MWF is E2.
Version
Table 18-12 lists the version description of the MWF.
Table 18-12 Version description of the MWF
Item Description

version

System
Item Description

version
Difference NA
Replacement The E2MWF can replace the E1MWF.
Type
Table 18-13 lists the types of the MWF.
Table 18-13 Type description of the MWF

MWF 02 Works in the OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. The MWF02
carries two filtering components and filters out two channels of
OTDR monitoring optical signals at the same time.
18.3.2 Application
The MWF is used to filter out the monitoring wavelength of the OAMS. This is to eliminate the
effects of the monitoring signal on the WDM system when the monitoring signal passes through
the optical amplifier.
Figure 18-7 Application of the MWF in WDM system

MWF
MWA
MWF
FMU

System

The main functions and features supported by the MWF is filtering out the OTDR optical fiber
monitoring signal of the OAMS.
Table 18-14 Functions and features of the MWF

Features
Basic function Filters out the OTDR optical fiber monitoring signal of the OAMS.
Correctly report various information of the board.

The MWF consists of filter module, the control and communication module and the power supply
module.
Figure 18-8 and Figure 18-9 show the principle block diagram of the MWF01 and MWF02.
Figure 18-8 Principle block diagram of the MWF01
IN1 Filter module OUT1
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack

System
Figure 18-9 Principle block diagram of the MWF02
Control
Power supply
module
Fuse Required
voltage
Back plane
SCC
DC power supply
from a subrack
Signal Flow
The service signal transmitted over the line fiber and the OTDR monitoring signal are
multiplexed and input to the filtering component through IN1/IN2. After the monitoring signal
is filtered out, the service signal is output from OUT1/OUT2 and input in the corresponding
input optical interface of the FIU.
Module Function
l Filter module
The module is used to filter out the monitoring wavelength of the OAMS, and eliminate
the effects of the monitoring signal on the WDM system when the monitoring signal passes
through the optical amplifier.
board.

System
18.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the MWF front panel.

Figure 18-10 shows the front panel of the MWF.
Figure 18-10 The front panel of the MWF-I and the MWF-II
MWF MWF
RUN RUN
ALM ALM
IN1 OUT1 IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
MWF-I MWF-II
Indicators

System

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWF-I.
Table 18-15 Types and functions of the MWF-I interfaces
IN1 LC The input optical interface of the main path, receiving

the multiplexed signal from the line.
OUT2 LC The output optical interface of the main path,

outputting the service signal to the input optical
interface of the FIU.
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWF-II.
Table 18-16 Types and functions of the MWF-II interfaces
IN1/IN2 LC The input optical interface of the main path, receiving

the multiplexed signal from the line.
OUT1/OUT2 LC The output optical interface of the main path,

outputting the service signal to the input optical
interface of the FIU.
NOTE
On the front panel, there are four optical interfaces, divided into two groups: IN1/OUT1 matches with IN2/
OUT2 one to one, each used in two directions of a relay station.
18.3.6 Valid Slots

The MWF occupies one slot.

System

This section introduces information such as the slots, interfaces for the MWF configuration in
an NM system.
Display of the Slot


None
18.3.8 MWF Board Specifications

MWF board specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical
Table 18-17 lists the optical specifications of the MWF.
Table 18-17 Optical specifications of the MWF
Item Unit Index
Passband wavelength range nm 1500 to 1635
Stopband wavelength range nm 1280 to 1340
Passband insertion loss (including that of the dB 1.2

connector)
Flatness (whole operating wavelength range) dB 0.4
Isolation (passband versus stopband) dB ≥40
Return loss dB ≥40
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤0.1
Polarization mode dispersion ps ≤0.1
Maximum input power dBm 27
Laser Safety Level


System
345.0 mm × 38.0 mm × 218.5 mm (13.6 in. × 1.5 in. × 8.6 in.)
Power Consumption

System
Hardware Description 19 Cables
19 Cables
About This Chapter
Describes the cable classification, cable structure, connector, and pin assignment.
19.1 Optical Fibers

The product has several optical fibers with different length and connectors. The optical fiber is
used to connect WDM equipment to the ODF or other equipment.
19.2 Power Cables and Grounding Cables for Subracks
The product has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND, subrack and HUB power cables and grounding
cables.
19.3 Alarm Cables for Subracks
Alarm cables include SERIAL interface cable, alarm interface cable, alarm concatenating cable,
alarm input transfer cable , alarm output transfer cable.
19.4 Management Cables for Subrack
Management cables of subracks include OAM serial port cable, RS-422 serial port cable, RS-232
serial port cable, ordinary telephone cable, straight-through network cable, crossover network
cable.
19.5 Subrack Power Cables for Independent OLA Subrack
The OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack has power cables and grounding cables
including independent OLA subrack power cables and independent OLA subrack grounding
cable.
19.6 Alarm Cables for Independent OLA Subrack
Alarm cables of the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack includes cabinet indicator
alarm cable, inter-subrack indicator alarm concatenating cable, alarm interface cable, alarm
concatenating cable, alarm input transfer cable, alarm output transfer cable.
19.7 Management Cables for Independent OLA Subrack
Management cables of the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack includes OAM serial
port cable, ordinary telephone cable, straight-through network cable, crossover network cable.

System
19 Cables Hardware Description
19.1 Optical Fibers

The product has several optical fibers with different length and connectors. The optical fiber is
used to connect WDM equipment to the ODF or other equipment.
19.1.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are selected based on the results of site survey.
The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 19-1.
Table 19-1 Classification of optical fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable Available Length
FC/PC FC/PC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) 0.6 m (2.0 ft.), 1.0 m (3.3 ft.), 2.0 m
single-mode fiber (6.6 ft.), 2.2 m (7.2 ft.), 3.0 m (9.8 ft.),
5.0 m (16.4 ft.), 6.0 m (19.7 ft.), 10.0
m (32.8 ft.), 15.0 m (49.2 ft.), 20.0 m
(65.6 ft.), 25.0 m (82.0 ft.), 30.0 m
(98.4 ft.), 35.0 m (114.8 ft.), 45.0 m
(147.6 ft.), 55.0 m (180.5 ft.), 65.0 m
(213.3 ft.), 70.0 m (229.7 ft.), 80.0 m
(262.5 ft.), 100.0 m (328.1 ft.)
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) 10.0 m (32.8 ft.), 50.0 m (164.0 ft.)

multi-mode fiber
LC/PC LC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) 0.3 m (1.0 ft.), 1.0 m (3.3 ft.), 1.5 m
single-mode fiber (4.9 ft.), 3.0 m (9.8 ft.), 5.0 m (16.4
ft.), 6.0 m (19.7 ft.), 10.0 m (32.8 ft.),
15.0 m (49.2 ft.), 20.0 m (65.6 ft.),
30.0 m (98.4 ft.)
2.0 mm (0.08 in.) 1.0 m (3.3 ft.), 3.0 m (9.8 ft.), 5.0 m
multi-mode fiber (16.4 ft.), 10.0 m (32.8 ft.), 20.0 m
(65.6 ft.), 30.0 m (98 4 ft.)
LC/PC FC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) 0.6 m (2.0 ft.), 0.8 m (2.6 ft.), 2.7 m
single-mode fiber (8.9 ft.), 5.0 m (16.4 ft.), 6.0 m (19.7
ft.), 7.0 m (23.0 ft.), 10.0 m (32.8 ft.),
15.0 m (49.2 ft.), 20.0 m (65.6 ft.),
25.0 m (82.0 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.),
50.0 m (164.0 ft.)
2.0 mm (0.08 in.) 0.6 m (2.0 ft.), 3.0 m (9.8 ft.), 5.0 m
(65.6 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.), 50.0 m
(164.0 ft.)

System
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable Available Length
LC/PC SC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) 0.3 m (1.0 ft.), 2.7 m (8.9 ft.), 5.0 m
single-mode fiber (16.4 ft.), 10.0 m (32.8 ft.), 15.0 m
(49.2 ft.), 20.0 m (65.6 ft.), 25.0 m
(82.0 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.), 50.0 m
(164.0 ft.)
2.0 mm (0.08 in.) 3.0 m (9.8 ft.), 4.0 m (13.1 ft.), 5.0 m
(65.6 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.), 50.0 m
(164.0 ft.)
LSH/APC FC/UPC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) 20.0 m (65.6 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.)
single-mode fiber
19.1.2 Connectors
Most of the optical interfaces on the board front panel of the product are of LC/PC type. There
are also some LSH/APC optical interfaces. At the client-side ODF, FC/PC or SC/PC optical
interface is used.
For detailed description of the four types of fiber connectors, refer to Table 19-2.
Table 19-2 Types of fiber connectors

Internal Fiber Connector Description
LC/PC Bayonet coupling, round fiber connector with

slightly convex, polished endface
LSH/APC Connector with automatic dust cap and slightly

convex, polished angled endface
FC/PC Round fiber-optic connector with slightly

convex, polished endface
SC/PC Square fiber-optic connector with slightly

convex, polished endface
The LC/PC fiber connector is shown in Figure 19-1.

System
Figure 19-1 LC/PC fiber connector
LC/PC connector
The LSH/APC fiber connector is shown in Figure 19-2.
Figure 19-2 LSH/APC fiber connector
hook
switch
Protective
LSH/APC coonector
slidding cover
The FC/PC fiber connector is shown in Figure 19-3.

System
Figure 19-3 FC/PC fiber connector
FC/PC connector
The SC/PC fiber connector is shown in Figure 19-4.
Figure 19-4 SC/PC fiber connector
SC/PC coonector
19.2 Power Cables and Grounding Cables for Subracks

The product has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND, subrack and HUB power cables and grounding
cables.
19.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables

The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet.

System
One end of the power cable connects to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the
equipment room. The other end connects to the power box at the cabinet top.
Structure
The structure of the -48 V cabinet power cable/BGND power cable is shown in Figure 19-5.
Figure 19-5 Cabinet -48 V power cable/cabinet BGND power cable
1 2
1. Cord end terminal 2. OT naked crimping connector 3. Heat-shrink tube
The structure of the PGND cable is shown in Figure 19-6.
Figure 19-6 Cabinet PGND cable
2 1
1. OT naked crimping connector 2. Heat-shrink tube
Pin Assignment
None

System
Technical Parameter
The technical parameters of the -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables are shown in Table
19-3, Table 19-4, Table 19-5 and Table 19-6.
Table 19-3 Technical parameters of -48 V/BGND power cables (16 mm2[0.024 in.2])
Item Description
Cabinet -48 V Connector 1 Cord end terminal-16 mm2 (0.024 in.2)-24 mm (0.9
power cable in.)-75 A-Insertion depth 12 mm (0.47 in.)-Green
Connector 2 OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2 (0.024 in.2)-M8
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2 (0.024 in.2)-Blue-85

A
Length If the required length of the power cable is less than 20

m, use the Φ16 mm2 cable.
Cabinet BGND Connector 1 Cord end terminal-16 mm2 (0.024 in.2)-24 mm (0.9
grounding cable in.)-75 A-Insertion depth 12 mm (0.47 in.)-Green
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2 (0.024 in.2)-Black-85

A
Length If the required length of the power cable is less than 20

m, use the Φ16 mm2 cable.
Table 19-4 Technical parameters of -48 V/BGND power cables (25 mm2 [0.039 in.2])
Item Description
Cabinet -48 V Connector 1 Cord end terminal-25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)-30 mm (1.2
power cable in.)-75 A-Insertion depth 16 mm (0.63 in.)-Brown
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)-

Blue-110 A
Length If the required length of the power cable ranges from 20

m to 35 m, use the Φ25 mm2 cable.
Cabinet BGND Connector 1 Cord end terminal-25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)-30 mm (1.2
grounding cable in.)-75 A-Insertion depth 16 mm (0.63 in.)-Brown
Connector 2 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)-

M8
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)-

Black-110 A

System
Item Description

Table 19-5 Technical parameters of -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2 [0.05 in.2])
Item Description
Cabinet -48 V Connector 1 Cord end terminal-35mm2(0.05 in.2)-0.03m (1.2

power cable in.)-105A-Insertion depth 16mm (0.63 in.)-Cream-
colored
Connector 2 OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2(0.05 in.2)-M8
Cable type Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02

(RV)-35mm2(0.05 in.2)-Blue-135 A

Cabinet BGND Connector 1 Cord end terminal-35mm2(0.05 in.2)-0.03m (1.2

grounding cable in.)-105A-Insertion depth 16mm (0.63 in.)-Cream-
colored
Connector 2 OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2(0.05 in.2)-M8
Cable type Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02

(RV)-35mm2(0.05 in.2)-Black-135 A

Table 19-6 Technical parameters of PGND cables

Item Description
Cabinet PGND Connector 1 OT naked connector-25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)-M8

cable
Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)-Yellow
and green-110 A
19.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables

The cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door and side doors.
Structure
The structure of the cabinet door grounding cables is shown in Figure 19-7.

System
Figure 19-7 Cabinet door grounding cable
1 2
X1 X2
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameter
The technical parameters of cabinet door grounding cables are shown in Table 19-7.
Table 19-7 Technical parameters of cabinet door grounding cables

Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)-M6-Tin

plating-Insulated ring terminal-12-10 AWG-Yellow
Cable Type Power cable-600 V-UL1015-0 mm2-10 AWG-105-Yellow

and green-50 A
Length 0.35 m (1.15 ft.), 0.70 m (2.30 ft.)
19.2.3 Subrack Power Cables

The subrack power cables connect the power distribution unit at the cabinet top and the power
interface on the subrack, leading the -48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to the
subrack.
Structure
The structure of the subrack power cables is shown in Figure 19-8.

System
Figure 19-8 Subrack power cable
1 2
A X1
W1 X2
A3 A
A2
A1 W2 X3
1. Cable connector 2. Cord end terminal
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the subrack power cables is shown in Table 19-8.
Table 19-8 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables

Wire Cable Cord End Connection Core Color
Connector Terminal
W1 X1.A3 X2 A3 connects to X2 Black (power ground)
W2 X1.A1 X3 A1 connects to X3 Blue (-48 V power)
Technical Parameter
The technical parameters of subrack power cables are shown in Table 19-9.
Table 19-9 Technical parameters of subrack power cables

Item Parameter
Cable connector X1 Cable connector, D model-3PIN-Female-Solder injection

molding type-No middle contact
Cord end terminal X2, X3 Cord end terminal-4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)-20 A-Tin plating-
Insertion depth 10 mm (0.4 in.)-Gray
Cable Type Power cable-600 V-UL1015-0 mm2-12 AWG-41 A
Length 3.0 m (9.8 ft)
19.2.4 HUB Power Cable

The power distribution unit (PDU) can supply power to the HUB.
There are two HUB power cables. One cable is used to connect the output terminal of the PDU
on the top of the cabinet to the interface on the power box, that provides power supplies for the

System
HUB, inside the HUB frame. There is a 4PIN connector on one end of the power cable, and the
connector is connected to the interface on the power box of the HUB. There are four terminals
on other end, and the terminals are connected to the output terminals of the PDU. Refer to Figure
19-9 and Table 19-10.
The other cable is used to connect the HUB power port to the interface of the power box, that
provides power supplies for the HUB, inside the HUB frame. There is a 4PIN connector on one
end of the power cable, and the connector is connected to the interface on the power box of the
HUB. There are two terminals on other end, and the terminals are connected to the HUB power
ports. Refer to Figure 19-10 and Table 19-11.
Structure
The structure of the HUB power cable is shown in Figure 19-9 and Figure 19-10.
Figure 19-9 HUB power cable 1

1
2
main label X1
A-A A
31 W1 W3
X3
W2 W4
42 X4
X5
X2
3500
1. Common terminal 2. Cable connector

System
Figure 19-10 HUB power cable 2

In direction B L2
2 3
X1
w1 1
A
2
3
w2 4
X3
X2
In direction B L1
1.Power connector 2. Heat-shrink tube 3. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the HUB power cable is shown in Table 19-10 and Table 19-11.
Table 19-10 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable 1
Connector X5 Connector Wire Color
X5.1 X1 W1 Blue
X5.2 X2 W2 Blue
X5.3 X3 W3 Black
X5.4 X4 W4 Black
Table 19-11 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable 2
Connector X3 Connector Wire Color
X3.1 X1 W1 Brown
X3.2 X1 W1 Black
X3.3 X2 W2 Brown
X3.4 X2 W2 Black

System
Technical Parameter
The technical parameters of HUB power cable are shown in Table 19-12 and Table 19-13.
Table 19-12 Technical parameters of HUB power cable 1

Item Description
Connector X5 Ordinary Plug-4PIN-Double-Row/4.20mm
Connector X1/X2/ Common Terminal-Single Cord End Terminal-Conductor Cross

X3/X4 Section 1.0mm2-5A-Tin Plating-Insertion Depth 6mm-Yellow
Note: The connector in this table corresponds to the connector in Table 19-10.
Table 19-13 Technical parameters of HUB power cable 2

Item Description
Connector X3 Ordinary connector-4PIN-Single row/3.96 mm
Connector X1/X2 Power Connector-DC Model-1PIN-48 V DC-2 A-Female
Note: The connector in this table corresponds to the connector in Table 19-11.
19.3 Alarm Cables for Subracks

Alarm cables include SERIAL interface cable, alarm interface cable, alarm concatenating cable,
alarm input transfer cable , alarm output transfer cable.
19.3.1 SERIAL Interface Cable

A SERIAL is a communication interface between the PMU on the PDU and the subrack in the
cabinet. The SERIAL is also an interface for driving signal of the cabinet indicator.
The SERIAL interface cable is used to connect the SERIAL interface to the cabinet indicator
and subrack alarm interface.
Structure
Figure 19-11 shows the structure of the SERIAL interface cable.

System
Figure 19-11 SERIAL interface cable
Pos.50 W1
2 B
A Pos.1 Pos.9
W2 X2
X3 Pos.1
W3
X1
1
X5
X4
W4 X6
3
X7 1
2
C
100
600
2400
2800
3200
1. DB50 connector 2. DB9 connector 3. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-14 lists the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface cable.
Table 19-14 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface cable
Wire Connector X1 Connector X2, X3, X4, Relationship

X5
W1 X1.15 X2.5 Pair
X1.4 X2.4
X1.5 X2.3 Pair
X1.3 X2.1
X1.1 X2.8 Pair
X1.2 X2.7
X1.14 X2.6
W2 X1.23 X3.5 Pair
X1.12 X3.4
X1.13 X3.3 Pair
X1.11 X3.1

System
Wire Connector X1 Connector X2, X3, X4, Relationship

X5
X1.9 X3.8 Pair
X1.10 X3.7
X1.22 X3.6
W3 X1.7 X4.5 Pair
X1.20 X4.4
X1.21 X4.3 Pair
X1.19 X4.1
X1.17 X4.8 Pair
X1.18 X4.7
X1.6 X4.6
W4 X1.26 X5.1 Pair
X1.27 X5.2
X1.28 X6.1 Pair
X1.29 X6.2
X1.30 X7.1 Pair
X1.31 X7.2
Technical Parameter
Table 19-15 lists the technical parameters of the SERIAL interface cable.
Table 19-15 Technical parameters of SERIAL interface cable

Item Description
Connector X1 Cable connector, D model-50PIN-Female-Cable crimping type-

Super miniature
Connector X2/X3/X4 Cable connector, D model-9PIN-Female-Cable welding type
Connector X5/X6/X7 Common plug, 2PIN, Single row/2.5mm (0.1 in.)
Cable type Twisted-pair cable, 100 ohm, SEYVP, 0.48 mm (0.02 in.),
26AWG, 4 pairs, Black
Number of cores 4 pairs
Core diameter 0.48 mm (0.02 in.)

System
Note: Connectors X5, X6, and X7 correspond to the indicator power supply interfaces (J4, J3,
and J2) at the cabinet top respectively. The J4, J3, and J2 are interfaces to provide power supplies
for the green, red, and orange indicators.
19.3.2 Alarm Interface Cables

The alarm interface cables are inserted in the ALM interfaces in the interface area of the subrack
to realize concatenation, input and output of alarms.
The product can access up to 16 external alarms and output four alarms of the cabinet. Moreover,
it can cascade the output alarm Boolean values among subracks.
Structure
Figure 19-12 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.
Figure 19-12 Alarm interface cable
2 Pos.9
A
Pos.50 W2 C
X2
A Pos.1 3 Pos.1
B
Pos.1
W1 B
X4
X1
W3
L X3 Pos.37
1. DB50 connector 2. DB9 connector 3. DB37 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-16, Table 19-17 and Table 19-18 list the pin assignment of the alarm interface cable.
The reserved end of the W1 cable has signal wires in five different colors: BLUE (8 in total),
GRAY (6 in total), PINK (6 in total), Green (6 in total) and Orange (6 in total). The signal wires
in the same color distinguish themselves by the tiny square spots in different colors (RED and
BLK) on the wires.
NOTE
The core wire with red tiny square spots is defined as signal wire. The core wire with black tiny square
spots is defined as ground. Each x means that there is a group of one tiny square spot at intervals (For
example, BLUE/REDxxx means that there is a group of three red square spots on a blue signal wire at
intervals.)

System
Table 19-16 Pin assignment of W1

Connector Connector Color Connector Connector Color
X1 X4 X1 X4
X1.1 X4.1 PINK/ REDx X1.24 X4.17 GRN/ REDxx
X1.14 X4.2 PINK/ BLKx X1.11 X4.18 GRN/ BLKxx
X1.3 X4.3 ORG/ REDx X1.26 X4.19 GRAY/

REDxx
X1.16 X4.4 ORG/ BLKx X1.27 X4.20 GRAY/

BLKxx
X1.15 X4.5 BLUE/ X1.28 X4.21 PINK/

REDx REDxxx
X1.2 X4.6 BLUE/ X1.29 X4.22 PINK/

BLKx BLKxxx
X1.17 X4.7 GRN/ REDx X1.23 X4.23 ORG/ REDxxx
X1.4 X4.8 GRN/ BLKx X1.10 X4.24 ORG/ BLKxxx
X1.5 X4.9 GRAY/ X1.9 X4.25 BLUE/

REDx REDxxx
X1.18 X4.10 GRAY/ X1.22 X4.26 BLUE/

BLKx BLKxxx
X1.19 X4.11 PINK/ X1.21 X4.27 GRN/ REDxxx

REDxx
X1.6 X4.12 PINK/ X1.8 X4.28 GRN/ BLKxxx

BLKxx
X1.7 X4.13 ORG/ X1.30 X4.29 GRAY/

REDxx REDxxx
X1.20 X4.14 ORG/ X1.31 X4.30 GRAY/

BLKxx BLKxxx
X1.13 X4.15 BLUE/ X1.32 X4.31 BLUE/

REDxx REDxxxx
X1.12 X4.16 BLUE/ X1.33 X4.32 BLUE/

BLKxx BLKxxxx

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Alarm Output
X1.35 X2.1 Pair Main alarm output
X1.37 X2.6

System
X1.38 X2.3 Pair Critical alarm output
X1.41 X2.7
X1.43 X2.8 Pair Auxiliary alarm output
X1.45 X2.4
X1.49 X2.5

X1.36 X3.6
X1.40 X3.7
X1.44 X3.4
X1.48 X3.5
Technical Parameter
Table 19-19 lists the technical parameters of alarm interface cable.
Table 19-19 Technical parameters of subrack alarm interface cable

Item Description
Connector X1 Cable connector, D model-50PIN-Male-Cable crimping type-

Super miniature
Connector X2/X3 Cable connector, D model-9PIN-Male-Cable Welding Type
Connector X4 Cable connector, D model-37PIN-Female-Welding model used

for cable connection-Nut specification UNC4-40
Cable type W1 Communication cable-SEYVP16x2x0.4-26 AWG-32 cores-

PANTONE 430U-Sheilded

System
Item Description
W2, W3 Twisted-pair cable-100ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26 AWG-4 pairs-

Black
Number of cores W1: 32 cores; W2, W3: 8 cores
Core diameter W1: 0.4 mm (0.02 in.); W2, W3: 0.48 mm (0.02 in.)
Length 5.0 m (16.4 ft.)
19.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable

The alarm concatenating cables are used to concatenate the alarms of all equipment and output
them to the centralized alarm system. Both ends of the cable are DB9 female connectors.
Structure
Figure 19-13 shows the structure of the alarm concatenation cable.
Figure 19-13 Alarm concatenating cable
Pos.1 1
Pos.9 X1 X2
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-20 lists the pin assignment structure of alarm concatenating cable.
Table 19-20 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.1 X2.1 Pair
X1.6 X2.6
X1.3 X2.3 Pair
X1.7 X2.7

System
X1.4 X2.4 Pair
X1.8 X2.8
X1.5 X2.5 Pair
X1.9 X2.9
Note: For both X1 and X2 connector, pin 2 and pin 7 are shorted.
Technical Parameter
Table 19-21 lists the technical parameters of alarm concatenating cable.
Table 19-21 Technical parameters of alarm concatenating cable

Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable connector-D model-9PIN-female-welding model used for

cable connection
Cable type Twisted-pair cable-100 ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26 AWG-4 pairs-

Black
Length 3.0 m (9.8 ft.)
19.3.4 Alarm Input Transfer Cable

The alarm input transfer cable is used to input external alarms. One end of the cable is a DB37
connector (female). The other end is reserved.
Structure
Figure 19-14 shows the structure of the alarm input transfer cable.

System
Figure 19-14 Structure of alarm input transfer cable
1
Pos.1
Pos.37
1. DB37 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-22 lists the pin assignment of alarm input transfer cable.
Table 19-22 Pin assignment of alarm input transfer cable
Connector Color Channel Connector Color Channel No.

X1 No. X4
X1.1 White 1 X1.17 Red 6
X1.2 Blue X1.18 Brown
X1.3 White 2 X1.19 Red 13
X1.4 Orange X1.20 Grey
X1.5 White 8 X1.21 Black 14
X1.6 Green X1.22 Blue
X1.8 Brown X1.24 Orange
X1.10 Gray X1.26 Green
X1.11 Red 10 X1.27 Black 11
X1.12 Blue X1.28 Brown
X1.13 Red 4 X1.29 Black 15
X1.14 Orange X1.30 Grey
X1.15 Red 7 X1.31 Yello 16

System
Connector Color Channel Connector Color Channel No.

X1 No. X4
X1.16 Green X1.32 Blue
Technical Parameter
Table 19-23 lists the technical parameters of alarm input transfer cable.
Table 19-23 Technical parameters of alarm input transfer cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Cable connector, D model-37PIN-Male-Cable welding type
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair-100 ohm-SEYVP16x2x0.4-26 AWG-32

cores-PANTONE 430 U
Number of cores 32 cores
Core diameter 0.4 mm (0.02 in)
Length 10.0 m (32.8 ft.)
19.3.5 Alarm Output Transfer Cable

The alarm output transfer cable is used to output alarms to the distribution cabinet or to the
appointed centralized alarm system. One end of the cable is a DB9 female connector. The other
end is reserved.
Structure
Figure 19-15 shows the structure of the alarm output transfer cable.
Figure 19-15 Alarm output transfer cable
Pos.9 1
Pos.1 X1
1. DB9 connector

System
Pin Assignment
Table 19-24 lists the pin assignment of alarm output transfer cable.
Table 19-24 Pin assignment of alarm output transfer cable

Connector X1 Signal Cable Core color Alarm Output
X1.1 Main alarm WHITE Main alarm output

ground
X1.6 Main alarm BLUE
X1.3 Critical alarm WHITE Critical alarm output

ground
X1.7 Critical alarm ORANGE
X1.4 Auxiliary alarm 1 WHITE Auxiliary alarm 1 output

ground
X1.8 Auxiliary alarm 1 GREEN
X1.5 Auxiliary alarm 2 WHITE Auxiliary alarm 2 output

ground
X1.9 Auxiliary alarm 2 BROWN
Technical Parameter
Table 19-25 lists the technical parameters of alarm output transfer cable.
Table 19-25 Technical parameters of alarm output transfer cable

Item Description
Connector X1 Cable connector, D model-9PIN-Female-welding model used for cable

connection
Cable type Twisted-pair cable-100 ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm (0.02 in.)-26 AWG-4

pairs-Black
Length 10.0 m (32.8 ft.), 20.0 m (65.6 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.)
19.4 Management Cables for Subrack

Management cables of subracks include OAM serial port cable, RS-422 serial port cable, RS-232
serial port cable, ordinary telephone cable, straight-through network cable, crossover network
cable.

System
19.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used for management and remote maintenance.
Structure
Figure 19-16 shows the structure of OAM serial port cable.
Figure 19-16 OAM serial port cable
Pos.9 1
Pos.1 X1 X2
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-26 lists the pin assignment of OAM serial port cable.
Table 19-26 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable

X1.1 X2.1 Pair
X1.5 X2.5
X1.2 X2.2 Pair
X1.3 X2.3
X1.6 X2.6 Pair
X1.7 X2.7
X1.8 X2.8 Pair
X1.9 X2.9
Technical Parameter
Table 19-27 lists the technical parameters of OAM serial port cable.

System
Table 19-27 Technical parameters of OAM serial port cable
Item Description
Type Twisted-pair cable-100 ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm (0.02 in.)-26

AWG-4 pairs-Black
Length 10.0 m (32.8 ft.), 20.0 m (65.6 ft.)
19.4.2 RS-422 Serial Port Cable

RS-422 serial port cable is used to connect the interfaces that have the features of RS-422.
Structure
Figure 19-17 shows the structure of RS-422 serial port cable.
Figure 19-17 RS-422 serial port cable
Pos.1 1
Pos.9 X1 X2
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-28 lists the pin assignment of RS-422 serial port cable.
Table 19-28 Pin assignment of RS-422 serial port cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function
X1.1 X2.1 Pair PGND
X1.5 X2.5 GND
X1.6 X2.8 Pair RS-422TX +
X1.7 X2.9 RS-422TX -

System
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function
X1.8 X2.6 Pair RS-422RX +
X1.9 X2.7 RS-422RX -
Technical Parameter
Table 19-29 lists technical parameters of RS-422 serial port cable.
Table 19-29 Technical parameters of RS-422 serial port cable

Item Description
Type Twisted-pair cable-100 ohm- UL2464-0.4 mm (0.02 in.)-26 AWG-3

pairs- PANTONE WAEM GRAY 1U
Length 15.0 m (49.2 ft.)
19.4.3 RS-232 Serial Port Cable

RS-232 serial port cable is used to connect the interfaces that have the features of RS-232.
Structure
Figure 19-18 shows the structure of RS-232 serial port cable.
Figure 19-18 RS-232 serial port cable
Pos.1 1
Pos.9 X1 X2
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-30 lists the pin assignment of the RS-232 serial port cable.

System
Table 19-30 Pin assignment of the RS-232 serial port cable
X1.2 X2.3 Pair
X1.3 X2.2
X1.5 X2.5
Technical Parameter
Table 19-31 lists the technical parameters of RS-232 serial port cable.
Table 19-31 Technical parameters of RS-232 serial port cable
Item Description
Type Twisted-pair cable-100 ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm (0.02 in.)-26

AWG-2 pairs-Black
Length 15.0 m (49.2 ft.)
19.4.4 Ordinary Telephone Cable

Ordinary telephone cables are used to connect orderwire telephones. Both ends use RJ-11
connector. One end is connected to the PHONE interface. The other end is connected to the
interface of the orderwire phone.
Structure
Figure 19-19 shows the structure of ordinary telephone cable.
Figure 19-19 Ordinary telephone cable
6 6
1 1
X1 X2
1. Phone connector-RJ-11

System
Pin Assignment
Table 19-32 lists the pin assignment of ordinary telephone cable.
Table 19-32 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.1 X2.1 Not connected
X1.3 X2.3 TIP
X1.4 X2.4 RING
Technical Parameter
Table 19-33 lists the technical parameters of ordinary telephone cable.
Table 19-33 Technical parameters of ordinary telephone cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-6 bit-4PIN-Crystal model

connector-28 AWG
Cable type Electronic and Power Cable,150 V-UL20251-0.08 mm2-28 AWG-

Black-1 A-2 cores Telephone Cable
Number of cores 2 cores
Length 2.0 m (6.6 ft.), 15.0 m (49.2 ft.)
19.4.5 Straight-through Network Cable

The straight-through network cable is used in many ways, including connect the equipment and
HUB and connect HUB and NM computer.
Both ends of the straight-through network cable use RJ-45 connectors which connect the
equipment at two ends respectively.
Structure
Figure 19-20 shows the structure of straight-through network cable.

System
Figure 19-20 Straight-through network cable
1 1
8 8
1 1
1. Network connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-34 lists the pin assignment of straight-through network cable.
Table 19-34 Pin assignment of straight-through network cable
X1.2 X2.2 Pair
X1.1 X2.1
X1.6 X2.6 Pair
X1.3 X2.3
X1.4 X2.4 Pair
X1.5 X2.5
X1.8 X2.8 Pair
X1.7 X2.7
Technical Parameter
Table 19-35 lists the technical parameters of straight-through network cable.
Table 19-35 Technical parameters of straight-through network cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8

bit-shielded-24~26 AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network
cable

System
Item Description
Cable type Communication cable-100±15 ohm-CAT5E-SFTP 24

AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 445U
Number of cores 8
Length 5.0 m (16.4 ft.), 10.0 m (32.8 ft.), 20.0 m (65.6 ft.), 30.0 m
(98.4 ft.)
19.4.6 Crossover Network Cable

The crossover network cable is used to connect subracks of the equipment or to connect a subrack
to an NM computer.
Structure
Figure 19-21 shows the structure of crossover cable.
Figure 19-21 Structure of crossover cable
1 1
8 8
1 1
Pin Assignment
Table 19-36 lists the pin assignment of crossover network cable.
Table 19-36 Pin assignment of crossover network cable
X1.6 X2.2 Pair
X1.3 X2.1
X1.2 X2.6 Pair
X1.1 X2.3
X1.4 X2.4 Pair
X1.5 X2.5

System
X1.8 X2.8 Pair
X1.7 X2.7
Technical Parameter
Table 19-37 lists the technical parameters of crossover network cable.
Table 19-37 Technical parameters of crossover network cable

Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model

connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24~26 AWG-CAT 6/used with
SFTP network cable
Cable type Communication cable-100±15 ohm-CAT5E-SFTP-24 AWG-8

cores PANTONE 646U
Number of cores 8
Length 5.0 m (16.4 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.)
19.5 Subrack Power Cables for Independent OLA Subrack

The OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack has power cables and grounding cables
including independent OLA subrack power cables and independent OLA subrack grounding
cable.
19.5.1 Independent OLA Subrack Power Cables

The independent OLA subrack power cables connect the power distribution cabinet and the
power interface on the subrack, leading the -48 V power supply from the cabinet to the subrack.
Structure
Figure 19-22 shows the structure of independent OLA subrack power cable.

System
Figure 19-22 Independent OLA subrack power cable
1 2
A X1
W1 X2
A1 A
A2
A3 W2 X3
1. Cable connector 2. Cord end terminal
Pin Assignment
Table 19-38 lists the pin assignment of the independent OLA subrack power cable.
Table 19-38 Pin assignment of the independent OLA subrack power cable
Wire Cable Cord End Connection Core Color

Connector Terminal
W1 X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to Black (power ground)

X2
W2 X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to Blue (-48 V power)

X3
Technical Parameter
Table 19-39 lists the technical parameters of the independent OLA subrack power cable.
Table 19-39 Technical parameters of independent OLA subrack power cable
Item Parameter
Cable connector X1 Cable connector, D model-3PIN-female-Solder injection

molding type-No middle contact
Cord end terminal X2/X3 Cord end terminal-6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)-0.02 m (0.07 ft.)-30 A-
Insertion depth 12 mm (0.47 in.)-black
Cable Type Power cable-300 V-UL2517-0 mm2-10 AWG- P WARM

GRAY 1U
Length 3.0 m (9.8 ft.), 15.0 m (49.2 ft.), 30.0 m (98.4 ft.)

System
19.5.2 Independent OLA Subrack Grounding Cable

The independent OLA subrack grounding cable is used to ground the subrack.
Structure
Figure 19-23 shows the independent OLA subrack grounding cable.
Figure 19-23 Independent OLA subrack grounding cable
1 2
X1 X2
Pin Assignment
None
Technical Parameter
Table 19-40 lists the technical parameters of independent OLA subrack grounding cable.
Table 19-40 Technical parameters of independent OLA subrack grounding cable

Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)-M6-Tin

plating-Insulated ring terminal-12-10 AWG-Yellow
Cable Type Power cable-600 V-UL1015-0 mm2-10 AWG-105-Yellow and

green-50 A
19.6 Alarm Cables for Independent OLA Subrack

Alarm cables of the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack includes cabinet indicator
alarm cable, inter-subrack indicator alarm concatenating cable, alarm interface cable, alarm
concatenating cable, alarm input transfer cable, alarm output transfer cable.
OLA subracks have the same alarm concatenating cable, alarm input transfer cable and alarm
output transfer cable with the ordinary subrack. Refer to Alarm Cables (for Ordinary
Subracks).

System
19.6.1 Cabinet Indicator Alarm Cable

The cabinet indicator alarm cables are used to connect the PMU board on the subrack to the
cabinet indicator and to lead the indicator signal from the PMU to the cabinet indicator.
Structure
Figure 19-24 shows the structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable.
Figure 19-24 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

1
3
A
8 B
2 B 1
1 2
X2
W
X3
X1
A
X4
X5
L
1. Network connector 2. Heat-shrink tube 3. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-41 lists the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable.
Table 19-41 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

Connector X1 Connector X2, X3, X4, X5 Color Relationship
X1.4 X2.2 White Pair
X1.5 X2.1 Green
X1.2 X3.1 Blue
X1.8 X4.1 Brown
X1.6 X5.1 Orange
Technical Parameter
Table 19-42 lists the technical parameters of cabinet indicator alarm cable.

System
Table 19-42 Technical parameters of cabinet indicator alarm cable
Item Description
Connector X1 Network interface connector-8bit-8PIN-Shielded-Crystal model

connector
Connector X2/X3/ Ordinary connector-2PIN-Single row/2.5 mm (0.1 in.)

X4/X5
Cable type Twisted-pair cable-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-24 AWG-8 cores-

PANTONE 430 U
Number of cores 8
Length 3.5 m (11.5 ft.)
19.6.2 Inter-Subrack Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cable

The inter-subrack indicator alarm concatenating cables are used for concatenating indicator and
alarm signals of the different subracks in one cabinet.
Both ends of the cable use RJ-45 connector. One end is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP 2
interface of one subrack. The other end is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another
subrack.
Structure
Figure 19-25 shows the structure of inter-subrack indicator alarm concatenating cables.
Figure 19-25 Inter-subrack indicator alarm concatenating cable
1
A
1 8
X1 X2
1. Network port connector - RJ-45
Pin Assignment
Table 19-43 lists the pin assignment of inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cables.

System
Table 19-43 Pin assignment of inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cables

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship Alarm Output
X1.1 X2.1 White Pair Critical alarm output+
X1.2 X2.2 Blue Critical alarm output -
X1.3 X2.3 White Pair Main alarm output+
X1.6 X2.6 Orange Main alarm output -
X1.4 X2.4 White Pair Auxiliary alarm 1

output+
X1.5 X2.5 Green Auxiliary alarm 1

output -
X1.7 X2.7 White Pair Auxiliary alarm 2

output +
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Auxiliary alarm 2

output -
Technical Parameter
Table 19-44 lists the technical parameters of inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cables.
Table 19-44 Technical parameters of inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cables

Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8 bit-8PIN-Shielded-crystal model

connector
Cable type Twisted-pair cable-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-24 AWG-8 cores-

PANTONE 430 U
Number of cores 8
19.6.3 Alarm Interface Cable

The alarm interface cables are inserted in the ALM interfaces in the interface area of the subrack
to realize concatenation, input and output of alarms.
The OptiX BWS 1600G can access up to 16 external alarms and output four alarms of the cabinet.
Moreover, it can cascade the output alarm Boolean values among OptiX BWS 1600G subracks.

System
Structure
Figure 19-26 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.
Figure 19-26 Alarm interface cable
C
2 Pos.9
W2 C
A 1 X2
3 Pos.1
Pos.1
B
Pos.1
W1 B
A
X4
Pos.50 X1
W3
L X3 Pos.37
1. DB50 connector 2. DB9 connector 3. DB37 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 19-45, Table 19-46 and Table 19-47 list the pin assignment of alarm interface cable.
The reserved end of the W1 cable has signal wires in five different colors: BLUE (8 in total),
GRAY (6 in total), PINK (6 in total), Green (6 in total) and Orange (6 in total). The signal wires
in the same color distinguish themselves by the tiny square spots in different colors (RED and
BLK) on the wires.
NOTE
The core wire with red tiny square spots is defined as signal wire. The core wire with black tiny square
spots is defined as ground. Each x means that there is a group of one tiny square spot at intervals (For
example, BLUE/REDxxx means that there is a group of three red square spots on a blue signal wire at
intervals.)

X1 X4 X1 X4
X1.1 X4.1 PINK/ X1.24 X4.17 GRN/ REDxx

REDx
X1.14 X4.2 PINK/ X1.11 X4.18 GRN/ BLKxx

BLKx
X1.3 X4.3 ORG/ X1.26 X4.19 GRAY/ REDxx

REDx

System

X1 X4 X1 X4
X1.16 X4.4 ORG/ X1.27 X4.20 GRAY/ BLKxx

BLKx
X1.15 X4.5 BLUE/ X1.28 X4.21 PINK/ REDxxx

REDx
X1.2 X4.6 BLUE/ X1.29 X4.22 PINK/ BLKxxx

BLKx
X1.17 X4.7 GRN/ X1.23 X4.23 ORG/ REDxxx

REDx
X1.4 X4.8 GRN/ X1.10 X4.24 ORG/ BLKxxx

BLKx
X1.5 X4.9 GRAY/ X1.9 X4.25 BLUE/ REDxxx

REDx
X1.18 X4.10 GRAY/ X1.22 X4.26 BLUE/ BLKxxx

BLKx
X1.19 X4.11 PINK/ X1.21 X4.27 GRN/ REDxxx

REDxx
X1.6 X4.12 PINK/ X1.8 X4.28 GRN/ BLKxxx

BLKxx
X1.7 X4.13 ORG/ X1.30 X4.29 GRAY/ REDxxx

REDxx
X1.20 X4.14 ORG/ X1.31 X4.30 GRAY/ BLKxxx

BLKxx
X1.13 X4.15 BLUE/ X1.32 X4.31 BLUE/ REDxxxx

REDxx
X1.12 X4.16 BLUE/ X1.33 X4.32 BLUE/ BLKxxxx

BLKxx

X1.37 X2.6
X1.41 X2.7

System
X1.45 X2.4
X1.49 X2.5
X1.36 X3.6
X1.40 X3.7
X1.44 X3.4
X1.48 X3.5
Technical Parameter
Table 19-48 lists the technical parameters of independent OLA subrack alarm interface cable.
Table 19-48 Technical parameters of independent OLA subrack alarm interface cable
Item Description
Connector X1 Cable connector, D model-50PIN-Male-Cable crimping type-

Super miniature
Connector X2/X3 Cable connector, D model-9PIN-Male-Cable Welding Type
Connector X4 Cable connector, D model-37PIN-Female-Welding model used for

cable connection-Nut specification UNC4-40
Cable type W1 Communication cable-SEYVP16x2x0.4-26 AWG-32 cores-

PANTONE 430 U-Sheilded
W2, W3 Twisted-pair cable-100 ohm-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26 AWG-4 pairs-

Black
Number of cores W1: 32 cores; W2, W3: 8 cores
Core diameter W1: 0.4 mm (0.02 in.); W2, W3: 0.48 mm (0.02 in.)

System
Item Description
Length 5.0 m (16.4 ft.)
19.7 Management Cables for Independent OLA Subrack

Management cables of the OptiX BWS 1600G independent OLA subrack includes OAM serial
port cable, ordinary telephone cable, straight-through network cable, crossover network cable.
The Management cables of the OLA subrack is the same as that of the ordinary subrack. Refer
to 19.4 Management Cables for Subrack.

System
Hardware Description A Indicators
A Indicators
Provides a quick search approach to useful information about indicators.
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are three indicators of different colors on each cabinet: red, orange and green indicators.
A.2 Board Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel to indicate the status of alarm and running.
A.3 Fan Indicators
There are six green indicators and one red indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

System
A Indicators Hardware Description
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are three indicators of different colors on each cabinet: red, orange and green indicators.
Table A-1 lists the related messages of each indicator.
Table A-1 Cabinet indicators
Indicator Level/Category State
ON OFF
Red Critical alarm There is a critical alarm. There is no critical alarm.

An audio signal is also
generated.
Orange Major alarm There is a major alarm. No There is no major alarm.

audio signal is generated
with it.
Green Power supply Power supply is normal. Power supply is not

indicator normal.
A.2 Board Indicators

There are indicators on the front panel to indicate the status of alarm and running.
A.2.1 Alarm Indicator

A red indicator on the front panel of each board shows system alarms.
Table A-2 lists the related messages and descriptions.
Table A-2 Red alarm indicator
Flash State Description
Off No alarm, power off.
Flash quickly (SCC) Incoming orderwire call
Three times every other second Critical alarm
Twice every other second Major alarm
Once every other second Minor alarm
On Hardware fault, self-check failed.
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
Hardware Description A Indicators
NOTE
The alarm range of the SCC board includes other boards. That is, the alarm indicator on the SCC board
flashes when an alarm is generated on other boards.
A.2.2 Running Indicator

A green indicator on the front panel of each board shows running state of the system.
Table A-3 Green running indicator
Flash five times per second The board is not in service.
Flash once every other second The board is in service (normal).
2 seconds on and 2 seconds off The communication with the SCC unit stops, and the board
is in off-line working state.
Table A-4 lists the running state of the SCC.
Table A-4 Green running Indicator on the SCC
Flash five times per second The board is in off-line working state after the reset, or in
self-check state.
Flash once every other second The board is in service (normal).
Table A-5 lists the running state of the SCC.
Table A-5 Running indicator and alarm indicator on the SCC
Both flash slowly The board is waiting to load programs.
Both flash quickly The board is being loaded with programs.
A.2.3 Communication Indicator

An yellow indicator on the front panel of SCC board is the Ethernet communication indicator.
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-3

System
A Indicators Hardware Description
Table A-6 Orange indicator

Off The connection between NE and NM computer is abnormal or broken.
On The connection between NE and NM computer is normal.
Flashing There is data transmitted between gateway NE and NM computer.
A.2.4 PMU Board Indicators

There are four indicators on the panel of the PMU board.
Table A-7 lists the description of each indicator.
Table A-7 Indicators description of the PMU board

Silkscreen Color Status Description
On Off
RUN Green Normal Alarm occurs.
CRI Red Critical alarm occurs. No critical alarm occurs.
MAJ Orange Major alarm occurs. No major alarm occurs.
MIN Yellow Minor alarm occurs. No minor alarm occurs.
A.3 Fan Indicators

There are six green indicators and one red indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.
The six running indicators (green) show the running status of the six fans. The red indicator
indicates whether the fan is faulty or not. Table A-8 lists the related messages of each indicator.
Table A-8 Fan indicators

Silkscreen Color Status Description
On Off
FAN1-FAN6 Green The fan is running. The fan is idle.
ALARM Red Alarm occurs. Normal
A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
Hardware Description B Bar Codes of Each Board
B Bar Codes of Each Board
Bar Codes of Each Unit consists of the BOM number, ex-factory number, hardware version,
name, model and characteristic code.
B.1 Overview
B.2 Characteristic Code of the Optical Transponder Board (OTU)
Characteristic code of the optical transponder unit (OTU) indicates the frequency and types of
the optical modules on the OTU
B.3 Characteristic Code of the Optical Multiplexing/Demultiplexing Board
Characteristic Code of the Optical Multiplexing/Demultiplexing Unit indicates the attributes of
the optical signals processed by the unit, including the band, the odd or even wavelength, and
the channel group identifier.
B.4 Characteristic Code of the Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Board
Characteristic Code of the Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Unit indicates the attributes of the
optical signals processed by the unit, including the band, the odd or even wavelength, and the
channel group identifier.
B.5 Characteristic Code of the Optical Amplifier Board
Characteristic Code of the Optical Amplifier Unit indicates the maximum gain and maximum
nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the unit.
B.6 Characteristic Code of the Performance Detection Board
Characteristic code of the performance detection Unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the unit.
B.7 Characteristic Code of the Adjustment Board
Characteristic code of the adjustment unit indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical
signals processed by the unit.
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-1

System
B Bar Codes of Each Board Hardware Description
B.1 Overview
The information of a bar code includes can be queried on the T2000, for details refer to
Supporting Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the T2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
There are two bar codes on the front panel of each unit. Figure B-1 shows the position of the
bar codes on the front panel of a unit.
Bar code 1 (the long bar code) indicates the manufacturing information of the unit. This bar code
consists of the BOM number, ex-factory number, hardware version, name, model and
characteristic code.
Bar code 2 (the short bar code) indicates the unit information. This bar code consists of the
"BOM" letters, BOM number and release number or the "BOM" letters, BOM number, release
number and WDM-side wavelength. Compared with bar code 1, bar code 2 is shorter and easier
to read. As a result, bar code 2 helps you to rapidly obtain the unit information and identify the
unit.
Figure B-1 Position of the bar codes on the unit
B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
Figure B-2 and Figure B-3 show the bar codes of the unit. Example 1 applies to the OTU with
a fixed wavelength on the WDM side; example 2 applies to the OTU with a tunable wavelength
on the WDM side and the other boards.
Figure B-2 Constitutions of the bar codes on a unit (example 1)

Ex-factory
number Unit name
21030707191073000001 Y SSE1LBF01-19270PK
BOM Hardware Characteristic

Model
version code
Bar code 1
Release number
BOM 03070719 01 19270
WDM-side
BOM
wavelength
Bar code 2

System
Figure B-3 Constitutions of the bar codes on a unit (example 2)

Ex-factory Characteristic
number Unit name code
0339771074000011 Y SSE1RPC01-G10
BOM Hardware Model

version
Bar code 1
BOM 03033977 01
Release
BOM
number
Bar code 2
B.2 Characteristic Code of the Optical Transponder Board

(OTU)
Characteristic code of the optical transponder unit (OTU) indicates the frequency and types of
the optical modules on the OTU
B.2.1 Characteristic Code of the Fixed-Wavelength OTU

The characteristic code of the fixed-wavelength OTU indicates the frequency and types of the
optical modules on the OTU.
Such a code consists of seven or eight characters including digits and letters:
l Seven-character code: Applies to the OTU with a pluggable optical module on the client
side.
l Eight-character code: Applies to the OTU with a non-pluggable optical module on the
client side.
NOTE
The characteristic code of the pluggable optical module on the client side of the OTU presents on the
pluggable optical module and does not present in the bar codes of the front panel of the OTU.

System
Characteristic code format: frequency of the WDM-side transmitter optical module + type of
the WDM-side receiver optical module + type of the WDM-side transmitter optical module +
type of the client-side optical module.
Table B-1, Table B-2 and Table B-3 provides the information of such a characteristic code.
Table B-1 Characteristic code of the fixed-wavelength OTU
Characteristic
Code Indication Description
Digits 1-5 Frequency of the WDM-side Indicates the frequency of the

transmitter optical module WDM-side transmitter optical
module.
Character 6 Type of the WDM-side The value is A or P. A denotes APD

receiver optical module and P denotes PIN.
Character 7 Type of the WDM-side For the meaning of the character,

transmitter optical module refer to Table B-2.
Character 8 Type of the client-side optical For the meaning of the character,
module refer to Table B-3.
Table B-2 WDM-side transmitter optical module type mapping table
Index Optical Optical Line Dispersion Rate

Modul Code Pattern Tolerance
e
C TRWC NRZ 12800 ps/nm 2.5 Gbit/s
D TRWD NRZ 12800 ps/nm 2.5 Gbit/s
K OTRK NRZ 800 ps/nm 10.71 Gbit/s
M T2MZ NRZ 1200 ps/nm 10.71 Gbit/s
Table B-3 Client-side optical module type mapping table
Optical Module
Type Acronym Indication
SDH optical I Intra-office

module
S Short distance
L Long haul
M 850 nm multimode
GE optical module I Intra-office

System
Optical Module
Type Acronym Indication
S Short distance
L Long haul
M 850 nm multimode
10GE-LAN optical L 10 km LR module

module
E 40 km ER module
For example, the characteristic code of the LBF unit is 19270PK that consists of seven characters
including digits and letters. This code indicates that the frequency of the WDM-side transmitter
optical module is 192.70 THz; the type of the WDM-side receiver optical module is PIN; the
type of the WDM-side transmitter optical module is OTRK; and the type of the client-side optical
module is pluggable.
B.2.2 Characteristic Code of the Tunable-Wavelength OTU

The characteristic code of the tunable-wavelength OTU indicates the frequency and types of the
optical modules on the OTU.
Such a code consists of three or four characters:
l Three-character code: Applies to the OTU with a pluggable optical module on the client
side.
l Four-character code: Applies to the OTU with a non-pluggable optical module on the
client side.
NOTE
The characteristic code of the pluggable optical module on the client side of the OTU presents on the
pluggable optical module and does not present in the bar codes of the front panel of the OTU.
Characteristic code format: T + type of the WDM-side receiver optical module + type of the
WDM-side transmitter optical module + type of the client-side optical module.
Table B-4 and Table B-5 provides the information of such a characteristic code.
Table B-4 Characteristic code of the tunable-wavelength OTU
Characteristic Code Indication Description
Character 1 Tunable wavelength T denotes tunable, which

indicates that the wavelength is
tunable.
Character 2 Type of the WDM-side The value is A or P. A denotes

receiver optical module APD and P denotes PIN.
Character 3 Type of the WDM-side For the meaning of the character,

transmitter optical module refer to Table B-5.

System
Character 4 Type of the client-side optical For the meaning of the character,
Table B-5 WDM-side transmitter optical module type mapping table

Index Optical Optical Line Dispersion Rate
Modul Code Pattern Tolerance
e
T T2DR DRZ 1200 ps/nm 10.71 Gbit/s
T2TM NRZ 1200 ps/nm 10.71 Gbit/s
T1TM NRZ 12800 ps/nm 2.5 Gbit/s
For example, the characteristic code of the LOG unit is TPT that consists of three characters.
This code indicates that the wavelength of the WDM-side transmitter optical module is tunable;
the type of the WDM-side receiver optical module is PIN; the type of the WDM-side transmitter
optical module is T2DR or T2TM; and the type of the client-side optical module is pluggable.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code of the Fixed-Wavelength Regenerating

OTU
The characteristic code of the fixed-wavelength regenerating OTU indicates the frequency and
type of the optical module on the unit. Such a code consists of five digits and one character.
Characteristic code format: frequency + type of the receiver optical module.
Table B-6 provides the information of such a characteristic code.
Table B-6 Characteristic code of the fixed-wavelength regenerating OTU

Characteristic
Code Indication Description
Digits 1-5 Frequency Indicates the frequency of

transmitted signals.
Character 6 Type of the receiver optical The value is A or P. A denotes APD

module and P denotes PIN.
For example, the characteristic code of the TRC1 unit is 19210P. This code indicates that the
frequency of the transmitted optical wavelength is 192.10 THz and the type of the receiver optical
module is PIN.

System
B.2.4 Characteristic Code of the Tunable-Wavelength Regenerating

OTU
The characteristic code of the tunable-wavelength regenerating OTU indicates the types of the
transmitter and receiver optical modules on the unit. Such a code consists of three characters.
Characteristic code format: T + type of the receiver optical module + type of the transmitter
optical module
Table B-7 Characteristic code of the tunable-wavelength regenerating OTU

Character 1 Tunable wavelength T denotes tunable, which

indicates that the wavelength is
tunable.
Character 2 Type of the receiver optical The value is A or P. A denotes

module APD and P denotes PIN.
Character 3 Type of the transmitter optical For the meaning of the character,
For example, the characteristic code of the TMR unit is TPT that consists of three characters.
This code indicates that the wavelength of the transmitter optical module is tunable; the type of
the receiver optical module is PIN; the type of the transmitter optical module is T2DR or T2TM.
B.3 Characteristic Code of the Optical Multiplexing/

Demultiplexing Board
Characteristic Code of the Optical Multiplexing/Demultiplexing Unit indicates the attributes of
the optical signals processed by the unit, including the band, the odd or even wavelength, and
the channel group identifier.
B.3.1 Characteristic Code of the D40

The characteristic code of the D40 unit indicates the attributes of the optical signals processed
by the unit, including the band, the odd or even wavelength, and the channel group identifier.
In the case of the D40 board supporting C band, the characteristic code consists of four characters.
Characteristic code format: band + odd or even wavelength + "-" + remainder

System
Table B-8 Characteristic code of the D40 unit (C band)

Bar Code Indication Description
Character 1 Band Indicates the band attribute of

the optical signals processed
by the unit. The value of this
character is C that denotes the
C band.
Character 2 Odd or even wavelength Indicates the odd or even

wavelength attribute of the
optical signals processed by
the unit. The value of this
character is O or E. O denotes
odd and E denotes even.
Character 3 Hyphen This character is always a

hyphen.
Character 4 Remainder Indicates the remainder of a

channel number divided by
4.By input wavelength, the
D40 is classified into four
specifications: - D40
(C_EVEN) - D40 (C_ODD) -
D40 (C_EVEN_PLUS) - D40
(C_ODD_PLUS) They
correspond to four groups of
channel numbers - 1/5/9…
157 - 3/7/11…159 - 2/6/10…
158 -4/8/12…160 The
remainders of the channel
numbers divided by 4 are 1, 3,
2 and 0 respectively.
For example, the characteristic code of the D40 unit is CO-1. This code indicates that the optical
signals processed by the unit are C-band odd wavelengths that correspond to channels 1/5/9…
157.
B.3.2 Characteristic Code of the FIU

The characteristic code of the FIU indicates the multiplexing scheme of the optical signals
processed by the unit. Such a code consists of one character.
Characteristic code format: multiplexing scheme.

System
Table B-9 Characteristic code of the FIU
Character 1 Multiplexing scheme - C denotes the C band.
For example, the characteristic code of the FIU is C. This code indicates that the unit processes
C-band optical signals.
B.3.3 Characteristic Code of the ITL

The characteristic code of the ITL unit indicates the attributes of the optical signals processed
by the unit, including the band, the odd or even wavelength, and the channel spacing. Such a
code consists of four characters.
Characteristic code format: band + odd or even wavelength + channel spacing
Table B-10 Characteristic code of the ITL unit
Character 1 Band Indicates the band attribute of the optical signals

processed by the unit. The value of this character is
C. C denotes the C band.
Character 2 Odd or even Indicates the odd or even wavelength attribute of

wavelength the optical signals processed by the unit. The value
of this character is O or E. O denotes odd and E
denotes even.
Characters 3 and Channel spacing Indicates the channel spacing of the optical signals
4 processed by the unit. The value is 50 which
indicates that 100 GHz spaced wavelengths are
multiplexed into 50 GHz spaced wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code of the ITL unit is CO50. This code indicates that the unit
processes C-band odd-wavelength optical signals in which 100 GHz spaced wavelengths are
multiplexed into 50 GHz spaced wavelengths.
B.3.4 Characteristic Code of the M40

The characteristic code of the M40 unit indicates the attributes of the optical signals processed
In the case of the M40 board supporting C band, the characteristic code consists of four
characters.

System
Table B-11 Characteristic code of the M40 unit (C band)


C band.


hyphen.

M40 is classified into four
specifications: - M40
(C_EVEN) - M40 (C_ODD) -
M40 (C_EVEN_PLUS) -
M40 (C_ODD_PLUS) They
157 - 3/7/11…159 - 2/6/10…
158 -4/8/12…160 The
For example, the characteristic code of the M40 unit is CO-1. This code indicates that the optical
157.
B.3.5 Characteristic Code of the V40

The characteristic code of the V40 unit indicates the attributes of the optical signals processed
Such a code consists of four characters.

System
Table B-12 Characteristic code of the V40 unit


C band.


hyphen.

V40 is classified into four
specifications: - V40
(C_EVEN) - V40 (C_ODD) -
V40 (C_EVEN_PLUS) - V40
(C_ODD_PLUS) They
157 - 3/7/11…159 - 2/6/10…
158 -4/8/12…160 The
For example, the characteristic code of the V40 unit is CO-1. This code indicates that the optical
157.
B.4 Characteristic Code of the Optical Add/Drop

Multiplexing Board
Characteristic Code of the Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Unit indicates the attributes of the
optical signals processed by the unit, including the band, the odd or even wavelength, and the
channel group identifier.
B.4.1 Characteristic Code of the MR2

The characteristic code indicates the frequencies of two wavelengths processed by the MR2 unit.
Such a code consists of eight digits.

System
Characteristic code format: frequency 1 + frequency 2
Table B-13 Characteristic code of the MR2 unit
Digits 1-4 Optical signal frequency The last four digits of the frequency
value of optical wavelength 1
processed by the OTU.
For example, the characteristic code of the MR2 unit is 92109220. This code indicates that the
frequency of optical wavelength 1 is 192.10 THz and the frequency of optical wavelength 2 is
192.20 THz.
B.4.2 Characteristic Code of the MR8

The characteristic code indicates the frequencies of two wavelengths processed by the MR8 unit.
Such a code consists of eight digits.
Table B-14 Characteristic code of the MR8 unit
For example, the characteristic code of the MR8 unit is 92109280. This code indicates that the
frequency of optical wavelength 1 is 192.10 THz and the frequency of optical wavelength 8 is
192.80 THz. Since the eight optical signals processed by the MR8 are in sequence, it is inferred
that: The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical
signal is 192.30 THz. Inferred from it, the frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
B.5 Characteristic Code of the Optical Amplifier Board

Characteristic Code of the Optical Amplifier Unit indicates the maximum gain and maximum
nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the unit.

System
B.5.1 Characteristic Code of the OAU

The characteristic code of the OAU indicates the gain range and maximum nominal input optical
power of the optical signals processed by the unit. Such a code consists of eight characters
including digits and letters.
Characteristic code format: G + gain range + I + maximum full-load total input optical power.
Table B-15 Characteristic code of the OAU
Character 1 - The value of this character is

always G.
Digits 2 and 5 Gain range Indicates the range within

which the gain can be
continuously tuned.

always I.
Digits 7 and 8 Maximum full-load total Indicates the maximum total

input optical power input optical power under the
full load of accessed
wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code of the OAU is G2031I-3. This code indicates that the gain
can be continuously tuned within 20 dB through 31 dB and the maximum total input optical
power under the full load of accessed wavelengths is -3 dBm.
B.5.2 Characteristic Code of the HBA

The characteristic code of the HBA unit indicates the maximum gain and maximum nominal
input optical power of the optical signals processed by the unit. Such a code consists of seven
characters including digits and letters.
Characteristic code format: band + G + nominal gain + I + maximum full-load total input optical
power.
Table B-16 Characteristic code of the HBA Unit

C band.

System

always G.
Digits 3-4 Nominal gain Indicates the nominal gain

always I.

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code of the HBA is CG35I-8. This code indicates that the unit
processes C-band optical signals; the maximum gain is 35 dB; and the maximum total input
optical power under the full load of accessed wavelengths is -8 dBm.
B.5.3 Characteristic Code of the OBU

The characteristic code of the OBU indicates the gain and maximum nominal input optical power
of the optical signals processed by the unit. Such a code consists of six characters including
digits and letters.
Characteristic code format: G + nominal gain + I + maximum full-load total input optical power.
Table B-17 Characteristic code of the OBU


always G.
Digits 2 and 3 Nominal gain Indicates the nominal gain

always I.

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code of the OBU is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is
23 dB and the maximum total input optical power under the full load of accessed wavelengths
is -3 dBm.

System
B.5.4 Characteristic Code of the OPU

The characteristic code of the OPU indicates the gain and maximum nominal input optical power
of the optical signals processed by the unit. Such a code consists of six characters including
digits and letters.
Characteristic code format: G + nominal gain + I + maximum full-load total input optical power.
Table B-18 Characteristic code of the OPU

always G.
Digits 2 and 3 Nominal gain Indicates the nominal gain

always I.

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code of the OPU is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is
23 dB and the maximum total input optical power under the full load of accessed wavelengths
is -3 dBm.
B.5.5 Characteristic Code of the RPC

The characteristic code of the RPC indicates the on-off gain of the unit. Such a code consists of
three characters including two digits and one letter.
Characteristic code format: G + on-off gain.
Table B-19 Characteristic code of the RPC

always G.
Digits 2 and 3 On-off gain Indicates the minimum

difference between the optical
power when you power on the
RPC unit and that when you
power off the RPC unit.

System
For example, the characteristic code of the RPC is G10. This code indicates that the minimum
on-off gain is 10 dB.
B.6 Characteristic Code of the Performance Detection Board

Characteristic code of the performance detection Unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the unit.
B.6.1 Characteristic Code of the MCA

The characteristic code of the MCA unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by
the unit. Such a code consists of one character.
Characteristic code format: band
Table B-20 Characteristic code of the MCA unit


by the unit. The value is C that
denotes the C band.
For example, the characteristic code of the MCA unit is C. This code indicates that the unit
processes C-band optical signals.
B.7 Characteristic Code of the Adjustment Board

Characteristic code of the adjustment unit indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical
signals processed by the unit.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code of the VA4

The characteristic code of the VA4 unit indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
processed by the unit. Such a code consists of two digits.
Characteristic code format: maximum attenuation
Table B-21 Characteristic code of the VA4 unit

Digits 1 and 2 Attenuation Indicates the maximum

attenuation of the unit.

System
For example, the characteristic code of the VA4 unit is 21. This code indicates that the maximum
attenuation of the unit is 21 dB.
B.7.2 Characteristic Code of the VOA

The characteristic code of the VOA unit indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
processed by the unit. Such a code consists of two digits.
Characteristic code format: maximum attenuation
Table B-22 Characteristic code of the VOA unit

Digits 1 and 2 Attenuation Indicates the maximum

attenuation of the unit.
For example, the characteristic code of the VOA unit is 21. This code indicates that the maximum
attenuation of the unit is 21 dB.

System
Hardware Description C Quick Reference Table of the Boards
C Quick Reference Table of the Boards
This section introduces the optical interface common specifications and functions of the units.
C.1 OTU Specification
This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of the OTUs.
C.2 Optical Amplifier Unit Specification
This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of the optical amplifier units.
C.3 Other Unit Specification
This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of other units.
C.4 Basic Function of OTU
This section introduces the basic functions supported by the OTUs.
C.5 Loopback Function of OTU
The OTU boards support different loopbacks.
C.6 Pluggable Optical Module of OTU
The OTUs support different pluggable optical module at client side.
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-1

System
C Quick Reference Table of the Boards Hardware Description
C.1 OTU Specification

This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of the OTUs.
C.1.1 OTU Specification on the Client Side

This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of OTUs on the client side.
For quick reference table of OTUs on the client side, refer to Table C-1.
Table C-1 Quick reference table for OTUs on the client side
Max
Supported mean Min mean
Support type of launche launched
ed optical d power power Sensitivit Overload
Board service module (dBm) (dBm) y (dBm) (dBm)
LWF STM-64 I-64.1 -1 -6 -11 -1

LWFS OC-192
- -1 -6 -11 -1
10GE-
WAN S-64.2b +2 -1 -14 -1
L64.2 +4 0 -24 -7
LBE 10GE- 10G Base-SR -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1

LBES LAN
10G BASE- -1 -6 -14.4 +0.5
LR
10G BASE- +2 -4.7 -15.8 -1

ER
10G Base-ER +4 0 -24 -7
LBF STM-64 I-64.1 -1 -6 -11 -1

LBFS OC-192
- -1 -6 -11 -1
TMX40 10GE-
TMX40 WAN S-64.2b +2 -1 -14 -1
S L64.2 +4 0 -24 -7
OTU2 P1l1-2D1 -1 -6 -11 -1
P1S1-2D2b +2 -1 -14 -1
P1L1-2D2 +4 0 -24 -7
10GE- 10G Base-SR -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1

LAN
10G BASE- -1 -6 -14.4 +0.5
LR
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
Max
10G BASE- +2 -4.7 -15.8 -1

ER
10G Base-ER +4 0 -24 -7
FC 10G - -1 -6 -11 -1
- -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1
TMX STM-16 I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3

TMXS OC-48
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 +3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 +3 -2 -28 -9
ETMX STM-16 I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3

ETMXS OC-48
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 +3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 +3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1 P1l1-1D1 -3 -10 -18 -3
P1S1-1D1 0 -5 -18 0
P1L1-1D1 +3 -2 -27 -9
P1L1-1D2 +3 -2 -28 -9
LWC1 STM-16 I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3

OC-48
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
L-16.1 +3 -2 -27 -9
L-16.2 +3 -2 -28 -9
OTU1 P1l1-1D1 -3 -10 -18 -3
P1S1-1D1 0 -5 -18 0
P1L1-1D1 +3 -2 -27 -9
P1L1-1D2 +3 -2 -28 -9
LWX 34 Mbit/s I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3

45 Mbit/s
S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
140 Mbit/
s L-16.2 +3 -2 -28 -9

System
Max
ESCON 1000 BASE- -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

FC100 SX-0.5 km
FC200
FDG GE 1000 BASE- -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

LOG SX-0.5 km
LOGS 1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -19 -3
LX-10 km
1000 BASE- +3.0 -4.5 -21 -3

LX-40 km
1000 BASE- +5 -2 -21 -3

LX-80 km
LQM GE 1000 BASE- -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

SX-0.5 km
1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -19 -3

LX-10 km
1000 BASE- +3.0 -4.5 -21 -3

LX-40 km
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

LX-80 km
STM-16 S-4.1 -8 -15 -28 -8

OC-48
L-4.1 +2 -3 -28 -8
STM-4
OC-12 I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3
STM-1 S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
OC-4
L-16.1 +3 -2 -27 -9
DVBASI
FE L-16.2 +3 -2 -28 -9
ESCON - -14 -19 -27 -14
- -8 -15 -28 -8
FC100 FC 100/FC -3 -10 -18 -3

FC200 200
FC 100/FC -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

200

System
Max
ELOG GE 1000 -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

ELOGS BASESX-
0.5 km
1000 -3 -11.5 -19 -3

BASELX- 10
km
1000 +3.0 -4.5 -21 -3

BASELX- 40
km
1000 5 -2 -21 -3
BASELX- 80
km
FC100 FC 100/FC -3 -10 -18 -3

FC200 200
FC 100/FC -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

200
LOG FC100 FC100/ -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

LOGS FC200 FC200
FC100/ -3 -10 -18 -3

FC200
LU40 STM-256 VSR2000-3R +3 0 -6 +3

LU40S OC-768 2
C.1.2 OTU Specification on the WDM Side

This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of OTUs on the WDM side.
For quick reference table of OTUs on the WDM side, refer to Table C-2.

System
Table C-2 Quick reference table for OTUs on the WDM side
Board Bit Rate Supporte Max Min Sensiti Overl Dispersion
d type of mean mean vity oad tolerance
optical launc launc (dBm) (dBm) (ps/nm)
module hed hed
power power
(dBm) (dBm)
LWF 10.71 50 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 800

TMX Gbit/s NRZ,
11.1 fixed, PIN
LBE
Gbit/s
LBF 100 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 800
11.3 NRZ,
TMR a
Gbit/s fixed, PIN
LOG
ELOG 50 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 800
ETMX NRZ,
tunable,
PIN
LWFS 10.71 50 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 1000

TMXS Gbit/s DRZ,
11.1 tunable,
LBES
Gbit/s PIN
LBFS
11.3 25 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 1000
TMRS a
Gbit/s DRZ,
LOGS
tunable,
ELOGS PIN
ETMX
S
LWFS 10.71 100 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 500

LBES Gbit/s RZ, fixed,
PIN
LBFS
TMRS
LWX 34 Mbit/s 100 GHz, 0 -10 -25 -9 12800

to 2.7 NRZ,
Gbit/s fixed, APD
100 GHz, 0 -10 -18 0 12800

fixed, NRZ
PIN
50 GHz, 0 -10 -25 -9 12800

NRZ,
tunable,
APD
LWC1 2.67 100 GHz, 0 -10 -28 -9 12800

TRC1 Gbit/s NRZ,
fixed, APD

System
Board Bit Rate Supporte Max Min Sensiti Overl Dispersion

d type of mean mean vity oad tolerance
optical launc launc (dBm) (dBm) (ps/nm)
module hed hed
power power
(dBm) (dBm)
FDG 100 GHz, 0 -10 -18 0 12800
LQM fixed, NRZ
PIN
50 GHz, 0 -10 -26 -9 12800

NRZ,
tunable,
APD
TMX40 43.02 50 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 ±550

LU40 Gbit/s ODB,
44.57 tunable,
LUR40 PIN
Gbit/s
TMX40 43.02 50 GHz, 0 -5 -16 0 -500 to +500

S Gbit/s eDQPSK,
LU40S 44.57 tunable,
Gbit/s PIN
LUR40
S
a: Only E8LBF/E8LBFS boards support the rate of 11.3 Gbit/s.
C.2 Optical Amplifier Unit Specification

This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of the optical amplifier units.
For the optical interface common parameters of the optical amplifier units, refer to Table
C-3Table C-4, and Table C-5.
Table C-3 Quick reference table for common optical amplifier units (E5)
Single Channel Input Power

Range (dBm)
Gain
adjustab Nomina 40 80 160
Ratio of MON le range l gain Channel Channels Channel
Board Interface (dB) (dB) s s
E5OA MON/OUT = 16 to 25.5 16 -32 to -14 -32 to -17 -32 to -20

UC00 1/99 (20dB)
22 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -32 to -26
25.5 -32 to - -32 to -32 to

23.5 -26.5 -29.5

System
Single Channel Input Power

Range (dBm)
Gain
adjustab Nomina 40 80 160
Ratio of MON le range l gain Channel Channels Channel
Board Interface (dB) (dB) s s
E5OA 20 to 31 20 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -32 to -22

UC01
26 -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -32 to -28
31 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -32
E5OA 20 to 31 - -25 to -19 -25 to -19 -25 to -19

UC02
E5OA 24 to 36 24 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -32 to -26

UC03
29 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -32 to -31
36 -32 -32 -32
E5OA 23 to 34 23 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -32 to -22

UC05
30 -32 to -23 -32 to -26 -32 to -29
34 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -32
E5OB MON/OUT = - 23 -24 to -19 -24 to -22 -24

UC03 1/99 (20dB)
E5OB - 23 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -24 to -22

UC05
E5OP MON/OUT = - 23 -32 to -24 -32 to -27 -32 to -30

U 1/99 (20dB)
Table C-4 Quick reference table for Raman pump amplifier units
Maximu Channel Gain (dB)
m Pump
Ratio of MON Power G.652 LEAF TWRS G.653
Board Interface (dBm) fiber fiber fiber fiber
E3RP MON/SYS = 29.5 > 10 > 12 > 13 NA

C01 1/99 (20dB)
E3RP 29.5 > 10 NA NA NA

C03

System
Table C-5 Quick reference table for the high-power booster amplifier unit
Total input
Ratio of MON power range Nominal Operating wavelength
Board Interface (dBm) gain(dB) range(nm)
E2HB "MON"/"OUT" -25 to -2 29 1529 to 1568

A = 1/999 (30dB)
-25 to -8 35 1545 to 1561
C.3 Other Unit Specification

This section introduces the optical interface common specifications of other units.
For quick reference table of the spectrum analyzer board, refer to Table C-6. For quick reference
table of the optical supervisory channel and timing transmission board, refer to Table C-7. For
quick reference table for other units, refer to Table C-8.
Table C-6 Quick reference table for spectrum analyzer unit
Board Detect accuracy Detect accuracy for OSNR accuracy (dB)

for optical power central frequency
(dBm) (GHz)
MCA ±1.5 ±0.1 ±1.5 (OSNR between 13 dB and

19 dB)
±2 (OSNR between 19 dB and 23
dB)
Board Single channel Detect accuracy for Detect range for single
input power central frequency channel wavelength
range deviation
WMU 01 -14 to -28 ±2.5 -10 to 10
Table C-7 Quick reference table for optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
Minimum Launched power(dBm)

receiver
Board sensitivity(dBm) Normal power High power
SC1 -48 -7 to 0 -
SC2 -48 -7 to 0 5 to 10

System
Table C-8 Quick reference table for other units

Ratio of MON
Board Interface Insertion Loss (dB)
M40 MON/OUT = 1/10 ≤ 6.5

(10 dB)
V40 MON/OUT = 1/10 < 8.0 a

(10 dB)
D40 MON/IN = 9/100 ≤ 6.5

(10.5 dB)
MR2 - Add/Drop ≤ 2.0

wavelength
channel
IN-MO ≤ 1.0
MI-OUT
MR8 - Add/Drop ≤4
wavelength
channel
IN-MO ≤ 3.5
MI-OUT
E2WSD9 MONI/IN = 3/80 < 8.0

(14.3 dB)
E2WSM9 < 8.0
MONO/EXPO =
3/76 (14 dB)
RMU9 MONI/EXPI = 3/80 EXPI-OUT ≤ 8.5

(14.3 dB)
AMx d-TOA ≤ 12.5 b
MONO/TOA = 3/76
(14 dB) ROA-OUT ≤ 1.5
WSMD2 "MONI"/"IN" = AM-OUT ≤ 8b

9/400 (17 dB) EXPI-OUT
"MONO"/"OUT" =
9/388 (17 dB) IN-DM ≤4
IN-EXPI
WSMD4 MONI/IN = 3/80 AMx e-OUT ≤8b

(14.3 dB)
MONO/OUT = 3/76 IN-DMx e ≤8
(14 dB)
ITL01 - < 3.0
ITL05 RE - OUT <4

RO - OUT

System
Ratio of MON
IN - TE < 2.5
IN - TO
FIU-03 MON/OUT = 1/99 IN - TM(@λM) c < 1.5

(20 dB)
RM - OUT(@λM) < 1.5
c
IN - TC(@λC) c < 1.0
RC - OUT(@λC) c < 1.0
FIU-06 IN - TM(@λM) c < 1.5
RM - OUT(@λM) < 1.5

c
IN - TC(@λC) c < 1.0
RC - OUT(@λC) c < 1.0
VA4 - -
VOA - -
GFU03 - 1.0 to 5.0
GFU02 - 0.5 to 6.0
FMU - -
MWA02 - Transmission 1.2

channel
Reflection channel 1.0
MWF02 - Passband 1.2
Stopband 1.0
E2OLP03 - Transmit end TI - TO1 < 4.0
TI - TO2 < 4.0
Receive end RI1 - RO < 1.5
RI2 - RO < 1.5
E2OLP02 Transmit end TI - TO1 < 4.0
TI - TO2 < 4.0
RI2 - RO < 1.5

System
Ratio of MON
E2OLP01 Transmit end TI - TO1 < 4.5
TI - TO2 < 4.5
RI2 - RO < 5.3
DCP01 - Transmit end TI1 - TO11 < 4.0
TI1 - TO12 < 4.0
TI2 - TO21 < 4.0
TI2 - TO22 < 4.0
Receive end RI11 - RO1 < 1.5
RI12 - RO1 < 1.5
RI21 - RO2 < 1.5
RI22 - RO2 < 1.5
SCS - Single-mode < 4.0
Multi-mode < 4.5
a: Before delivery, the VOA value of each channel in the V40 is set as 3 dB. Thus, the value
of insertion loss may be 11 dB in testing. The VOA value can be adjusted according to the
actual requirement.
b: Tested value when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
c: @λM, indicates the measured value of the 1510 nm optical supervisory signals. @λC,
indicates the measured value of the C-band optical signals. @λMB, indicates the measured
value of the 1625 nm optical supervisory signals.
d: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
e: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.
C.4 Basic Function of OTU

This section introduces the basic functions supported by the OTUs.
Table C-9 and Table C-10 list the basic functions supported by the OTUs.

System
Table C-9 Basic function of OTUs

Tuna FEC function
ble
Regener Wav Supe FEC AFE
ating elen PRB rWD C
Board board ESC gth ALS S TCM M
E7LWF E4TMR/ Y Y Y Y N N Y Y
E4TMRS
E7LWF E4TMR/ Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
S E4TMRS
E4 E4TRC1 Y Y Y N N N Y N
LWC1
E4TRC1 - N Y Y N N N Y N
E4TMR - N Y Y N Y N Y Y
E4TMR - N Y Y N N Y Y Y
S
E3LWX E3LWX N Y Y N N N N N
R
E2FDG E4TRC1 Y Y Y N N N Y N
E2LQM Y Y Y Y N N Y N
E4LBE E4TMR/ Y Y Y N N N N Y
E4TMRS
E4LBES Y Y Y N N Y N Y
E3LBF Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y
E3LBFS Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y
E3LOG E4TMR/ Y Y Y N Y N N Y
E4TMRS
E3LOG Y Y Y N N Y N Y
S
E4TMX Y Y Y Y N N N Y
E4TMX Y Y Y Y N Y N Y
S
E3ETM Y Y Y Y N N N Y
X
E3EMT Y Y Y Y N Y N Y
XS
E3ELO Y Y Y N Y N N Y
G

System
Tuna FEC function

ble
Regener Wav Supe FEC AFE
ating elen PRB rWD C
Board board ESC gth ALS S TCM M
E3ELO Y Y Y N N Y N Y
GS
E8LBF E8TMR/ Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y
E8TMRS
E8LBFS Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
E8LWF Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y
E8LWF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
S
E8ETM Y Y Y Y Y N N Y
X
E8ETM Y Y Y Y N Y N Y
XS
E8ELO Y Y Y N Y N N Y
G
E8ELO Y Y Y N Y Y N Y
GS
E8TMR - N Y Y N Y N Y Y
E8TMR - N Y Y N Y Y Y Y
S
E1TMX E1LUR4 Y Y Y N Y N Y Y
40 0
E1TMX E1LUR4 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y
40S 0S
E1LU40 E1LUR4 Y Y Y N Y N Y Y
0
E1LU40 E1LUR4 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y
S 0S
E1LUR - Y Y Y Y N N N Y
40
E1LUR - Y Y Y Y N Y N Y
40S
Note: In Table C-9, "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the
OTU does not support the function.

System
Table C-10 Monitoring function of OTUs

Board B1 B2 SM-BIP8 PM-BIP8
E7LWF Y Y Y Y
E8LWF Y Y Y Y
E7LWFS Y Y Y Y
E8LWFS Y Y Y Y
E4LWC1 Y Y Y Y
E4TRC1 Y Y Y Y
E4TMR N N Y Y
E8TMR N N Y Y
E4TMRS N N Y Y
E8TMRS N N Y Y
E3LWX Y N N N
E2FDG Y Y N N
E3LOG N N Y Y
E3LOGS N N Y Y
E2LQM Y Y Y Y
E3ELOG N N Y Y
E8ELOG N N Y Y
E3ELOGS N N Y Y
E8ELOGS N N Y Y
E4LBE N N Y Y
E4LBES N N Y Y
E3LBF Y Y Y Y
E8LBF Y Y Y Y
E3LBFS Y Y Y Y
E8LBFS Y Y Y Y
E4TMX Y Y Y Y
E4TMXS Y Y Y Y
E3ETMX Y Y Y Y
E8ETMX Y Y Y Y

System
Board B1 B2 SM-BIP8 PM-BIP8
E3ETMXS Y Y Y Y
E8ETMXS Y Y Y Y
E1TMX40 N N Y Y
E1TMX40S N N Y Y
E1LU40 Y N Y Y
E1LU40S Y N Y Y
E1LUR40 N N Y Y
E1LUR40S N N Y Y
C.5 Loopback Function of OTU

The OTU boards support different loopbacks.
Table C-11 list the loopback supported by OTUs.
Table C-11 Loopback supported by OTUs

Cross
WDM-Side WDM-Side Client-Side Client-Side Loopbac
Board Inloop Outloop Inloop Outloop k
E7LWF Y Y Y Y N
E8LWF Y Y Y Y N
E7LWFS Y Y Y Y N
E8LWFS Y Y Y Y N
E4LWC1 Y Ya Y Y N
E4TRC1 N N N N N
E4TMX Y Y Y Y N
E4TMXS Y Y Y Y N
E3ETMX Y Y Y Y N
E8ETMX Y Y Y Y N
E3ETMX Y Y Y Y N
S

System
Cross
E8ETMX Y Y Y Y N
S
E4TMR N N N N N
E8TMR N N N N N
E4TMRS N N N N N
E8TMRS N N N N N
E3LWX N N N N Y
E2FDG Y Y Y Y N
E2LQM Y Y Y Y N
E4LBE Y Y Y Y N
E4LBES Y Y Y Y N
E3LBF Y Y Y Y N
E8LBF Y Y Y Y N
E3LBFS Y Y Y Y N
E8LBFS Y Y Y Y N
E3LOG Y Y Y Y N
E3LOGS Ya Y Y Y N
E3ELOG Y Y Y Y N
E8ELOG Y Y Y Y N
E3 Y Y Y Y N
ELOGS
E8ELOG Y Y Y Y N
S
E1TMX4 Y Y Y Y N
0
E1TMX4 Y Y Y Y N
0S
E1LU40 Y Y Y Y N
E1LU40S Y Y Y Y N
E1LUR40 N N N N N

System
Cross
E1LUR40 N N N N N
S
a: This loopback configured in the OTU interrupts ESC communication.
C.6 Pluggable Optical Module of OTU

The OTUs support different pluggable optical module at client side.
Table C-12 lists the pluggable optical module type supported by OTUs.
Table C-12 Pluggable optical module type supported by OTUs
Board SFP(2.5 Gbit/s or 1.25 Gbit/s) XFP(10 Gbit/s)
E7LWF N Y
E8LWF N Y
E7LWFS N Y
E8LWFS N Y
E4LWC1 Y N
E4TMX Y N
E4TMXS Y N
E3ETMX Y N
E8ETMX Y N
E3ETMXS Y N
E8ETMXS Y N
E3LWX Y N
E2FDG Y N
E4LBE N Y
E4LBES N Y
E3LBF N Y
E8LBF N Y
E3LBFS N Y

System
Board SFP(2.5 Gbit/s or 1.25 Gbit/s) XFP(10 Gbit/s)
E8LBFS N Y
E3LOG Y N
E3LOGS Y N
E2LQM Y N
E3ELOG Y N
E8ELOG Y N
E3ELOGS Y N
E1TMX40 N Y
E1TMX40S N Y
E1LU40 N N
E1LU40S N N

System
Hardware Description D Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards
D Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of

Boards
This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and slots of boards.
Table D-1 lists the power consumption and weight of boards. Note that the power consumption
values are measured in normal working conditions (25°C [77°F]) and under temperature of 55°
C (131°F).
Table D-1 OptiX BWS 1600G equipment board information
Board Typical Maximum Weight Slots Available

Power Power Occupie Slots
Consumpti Consumpti d
on at 25°C on at 55°C
(77°F) (W) a (131°F) (W) a
E7LWF 22.0 26.0 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8LWF 23.9 26.3 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E7LWFS 26.0 28.6 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8LWFS 29.3 32.2 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E4TMX 32.2 35.4 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E4TMXS 34.5 37.9 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E3ETMX 32.2 35.4 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8ETMX 31.2 34.3 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-1

System
D Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards Hardware Description

(77°F) (W) a (131°F) (W) a
E3ETMX 34.5 37.9 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

S IU8 - IU13
E8ETMX 38.8 42.7 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

S IU8 - IU13
E4TMR 19.5 21.5 0.85 kg (1.9 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8TMR 20.3 22.3 0.85 kg (1.9 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E4TMRS 23.5 25.5 0.85 kg (1.9 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8TMRS 24.1 26.5 0.85 kg (1.9 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E4LBE 22.0 26.0 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E4LBES 26.0 28.0 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E3LBF 22.0 26.0 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8LBF 23.9 26.3 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E3LBFS 26.0 28.6 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8LBFS 29.3 32.2 0.95 kg (2.1 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E3LOG 44.0 53.6 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E3LOGS 47.3 56.5 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E2LQM 63.4 66.5 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1–IU6,

IU8–IU13
E3ELOG 46.0 48.1 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8ELOG 39.7 43.7 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System

(77°F) (W) a (131°F) (W) a
E3ELOGS 51.3 53.8 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E8ELOGS 42.5 46.8 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E3LWX 32.0 35.5 0.9 kg (2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E4LWC1 13.5 14.6 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E4TRC1 20.0 22.0 0.9 kg (2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E2FDG 28.0 30.8 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E1TMX40 71.5 78.7 4.75 kg (10.5 lb) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E1TMX40 85.0 93.5 4.75 kg (10.5 lb) 2 IU1 - IU5,

S IU8 - IU12
E1LU40 70.0 77.0 3.89 kg (8.6 lb) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E1LU40S 84.0 92.4 4.55 kg (10.0 lb) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E1LUR40 60.0 66.0 3.09 kg (6.79 lb) 2 U1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E1LUR40 74.0 81.4 3.75 kg (8.24 lb) 2 U1 - IU5,

S IU8 - IU12
E3M40 9.6 10.6 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) 2 IU2 - IU6,

IU9 - IU13
E3D40 9.6 10.6 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) 2 IU2 - IU6,

IU9 - IU13
E3V40 24.0 26.0 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.) 2 IU2 - IU6,

IU9 - IU13
E3MR2 2.1 2.5 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E1MR8 2.1 2.5 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13

System
D Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards Hardware Description

(77°F) (W) a (131°F) (W) a
E3ITL 8.0 8.8 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E3FIU 2.1 2.5 0.9 kg (2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E2WSD9 23.2 25.5 2.8 kg (6.5 lb.) 2 IU2 - IU6,

IU9 - IU13
E2WSM9 23.2 25.5 2.8 kg (6.5 lb.) 2 IU2 - IU6,

IU9 - IU13
E1RMU9 7.2 7.9 0.9 kg (2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E1WSMD 15.0 16.5 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

2 IU8 - IU13
E1WSMD 11.7 12.9 2.7 kg (6.0 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

4 IU8 - IU12
E5OAU 16.8 21.4 2.4 kg (5.3 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E5OBU 14.0 15.4 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E5OPU 20.0 22.0 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E2HBA 24.0 26.4 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E3RPC 70.0 77.0 4.2 kg (9.3 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E1MCA 7.0 7.7 1.7 kg (3.7 lb.) 2 IU1 - IU5,

IU8 - IU12
E1WMU 27.0 29.7 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E2VA4 10.0 11.0 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E2VOA 6.5 7.2 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E1PMU 12.0 13.2 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.) 1 IU12
E1FMU 25.0 27.5 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) 3 IU1 - IU4,

IU8 - IU11
D-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System

(77°F) (W) a (131°F) (W) a
E2MWA 2.0 2.2 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E2MWF 2.0 2.2 0.8 kg (1.8 lb,) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E2SC1 6.5 7.2 0.9 kg (2 lb.) 1 IU6, IU8
E2SC2 8.0 9.6 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) 1 IU6, IU8
E4SCC 7.8 8.6 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) 1 IU7
E1DCP 6.0 6.6 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
E2OLP 6.0 6.6 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.) 1 IU1 - IU6,

IU8 - IU13
a: Typical power consumption refers to the average power consumption when the equipment
is running in normal temperature. Maximum power consumption refers to the possible
maximum power consumption of the equipment in extreme conditions.

System
Hardware Description E Glossary
E Glossary
19-inch cabinet A cabinet which is19 inches in width and 600mm in depth, compliant
with the standards of the IEC297.
Add/drop A multiplexer capable of extracting and inserting lower-rate signals from

Multiplexer a higher-rate multiplexed signal without completely demultiplexing the
signal.
Add/drop In the OADM equipment, the MR2 boards carry the wavelength that
wavelength directly adds or drops services.
AIS insertion If there are excessive errors in a channel, AIS can be inserted in this
channel to indicate that it is unavailable. For a line board, you can set
whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B1, B2 and
B3 bytes. For a tributary board at the E1 or T1 level, you can set whether
to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For a tributary
board at the E3 level or higher, you can set whether to insert AIS when
there are excessive errors in the B3 byte.
AIS Alarm Indication Signal. A signal sent downstream in a digital network

if an upstream failure has been detected and persists for a certain time.
Alarm cable The cable which is used to transmit alarm signals.
Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a

failure or an emergency has occurred.
ALC Automatic Level Control. The technique supports the adjustment of

optical power aimed to restrain the output power to be inferior on the
downstream and keep the optical power to be within a certain working
range.
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-1

System
E Glossary Hardware Description
APD Avalanche Photodiode. A semiconductor photodetector with integral

detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction
are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons.
APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other
semiconductor electronics.
Attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in

decibels.
Attenuator A passive component that attenuates an electrical or optical signal.
Attribute Property of an object.
Automatic gain A technique which is used to adjust the gain of each wavelength signal
control within allowed range.
Backplane A PCB circuit board in the subrack, which is connected with all the boards
in position.
BIP BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With even parity
an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified
portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides
even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion
of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity
is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of
1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition
comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion
includes the BIP-X.
Bit error rate The number of coding violations detected in a unit of time, usually one
second. Bit error rate (BER) is calculated with this formula: BER =
errored bits received/total bits sent
bit/s The number of bits passing a point every second. The transmission rate
for digital information.
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that

minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office.
Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
Channel spacing The centre-to-centre difference in frequency or wavelength between

adjacent channels in a WDM device.
Channel The smallest subdivision of a circuit that provides a type of

communication service; usually a path with only one direction.
E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
Circuit A communications path or network; usually a pair of channels providing

bi-directional communication.
Client A kind of terminal (PC or workstation) connected to a network that can

send instructions to a server and get results through a user interface.
Coded mark This is the STS-3 line code. This is a two level non-return to zero code.
inversion A binary 1 is coded by either of the amplitude levels, +A or -A, for one
full unit time interval (T) in such a way that the level alternates for
successive binary ones. For a binary zero there is always a positive
transition (-A to +A) at the mid point of the binary unit interval (T/2).
Concatenate The linking together of various data structures, for example two
bandwidths joined to form a single bandwidth.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
Connection A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "uni-

directional connections" capable of simultaneously transferring
information in opposite directions between their respective inputs and
outputs.
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber. A kind of fiber which uses negative

dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber
to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
DCM frame A frame which is used to hold the DCMs.
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module. A module, which contains dispersion

compensation fibers to compensate for the positive dispersion of
transmitting fiber.
DCN Data Communication Network. A communication network within a TMN

or between TMNs which supports the data communication function
(DCF).
Demultiplexing A process applied to a multiplex signal for recovering signals combined

within it and for restoring the distinct individual channels of the signals.
Dense The higher capacity version of WDM, which is a means of increasing the
wavelength capacity of fiber-optic data transmission systems through the
division multiplexing of multiple wavelengths of light. Commercially available
multiplexing DWDM systems support the multiplexing of from 8 to 40 wavelengths
of light.
Digital signal An electrical or optical signal that varies in discrete steps. Electrical
signals are coded as voltages. Optical signals are coded as pulses of light.
Drop The port on a network element where the service to an end customer may
be connected, for example, a tributary card on a SONET ADM. For
example, a drop for a DS1 customer service may be provided by a VT1.5
card terminating a VT1.5 trail.
Dual-Fed A description of a ring that has entry nodes that add traffic to the ring
through the bridging function.

System
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology utilizes the

characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode
optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency
spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit
simultaneously in the same fiber.
ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations

channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel
(DCC) as its physical layer.
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier. The optical amplifier that its fiber doped
with the rare earth element erbium, which can amplify at 1530 to 1610
nm when the optical amplifier is pumped by an external light source.
ESC Electric Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes the communication

among all the nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical
transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into
DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
ESCON Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the host
with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream
transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
ESD Electrostatic Discharge. The phenomena the energy being produced by

electrostatic resource discharge instantly.
Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers.
It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different
physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet
usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet
networks.
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
Eye pattern A graphic presentation formed by the superimposition of the waveforms

of all possible pulse sequences.
Fan tray A module which contains fans used for heat dissipation.
assembly
Fault A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required action. This

does not include an inability due to preventive maintenance, lack of
external resources, or planned actions.
FC Fiber Channel. A standard of data storage network for transmitting signals

at 100 Mbit/s to 4.25Gbit/s over fiber or (at slow speeds) copper.
Fiber channel The channel which is used for fiber routing.

System
Fiber jumper The fiber which is used to connect the subrack with the ODF.
Fiber spool box A box which is used to spool the fiber.
Fiber spool The spool on the side of a subrack which is used for fiber routing.
Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of
each time slot can be identified.
Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of
the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical
interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and
controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means
that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for
communication.
Isolation A non-reciprocal optical device intended to suppress backward

reflections along an optical fibre transmission line while having minimum
insertion loss in the forward direction.
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations,

control system instability, and so on.
Label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
Laser The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range
of wavelengths. Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light.
Semiconductor diode lasers are the used light source in fiber-optic system.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be

described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely
concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic
information.
Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fibre can be located by setting
loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback
modes: No loopback, Outloop, Inloop.
Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains
several subracks.

System
Motherboard A PCB circuit board in the subract,which is connected with all the boards
in position.
Mounting ear A component on the side of a subrack, which is used to install the subrack
in a cabinet.
NE Explorer NE Explorer is the main operation interface of the T2000. For easy
navigation, the NE Explorer window presents an expandable directory
tree (Function Tree) in the lower left pane. The configuration,
management and maintenance of the equipment are accessed here.
Noise figure The specification to scale the random signal in the system presenting in
addition to any wanted signal.
NRZ Non Return to Zero. A digital code in which the signal level is low for a
0 bit and high for a 1 bit and dose not return to 0 between successive 1
bits.
OADM frame A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can be used to add the
optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical
signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
OCP Optical Channel Protection. A protection mechanism supports working

channels with multiple wavelengths and protection one in order to be
against the situation that there is any fault in the working channel.
ODF Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool
fibers.
OLA A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the

input optical signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the
key component of the OLA is the EDFA amplifier.
OLP Optical Line Protection. A protection mechanism supports a working path

and a protection path with dual-fed signal selection function. Normally,
the working path carries the traffic. The protection path will work to be
against the situation that there is any fault in the working link.
Optical amplifier A device or subsystem in which optical signals can be amplified by means
of stimulated emission taking place in an suitable active medium. It is
used to amplify the optical signal of the optical transmission system.

System
Optical A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus

connector for the purpose of providing frequent optical interconnection/
disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
Optical coupler An optical device that couples multiple channels of optical signals into
one channel of optical signals.
Optical A device which performs the inverse operation of a wavelength

demultiplexer multiplexer, where the input is an optical signal comprising two or more
wavelength ranges and the output of each port is endowed with the
different and preselected wavelength.
Optical interface A device to allow two or more corresponding optical transmitting units
to be connected.
Optical A branching device with two or more input ports and one output port
multiplexer where the light in each input port is restricted to a preselected wavelength
range and the output is the combination of light from the input ports.
Optical spectrum An instrument that scans the spectrum to record power, measures the
analyzer value of loss insertion and tests the performance of the wavelength and
optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) of each channel.
Optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively
transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber
transmission line.
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication

among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the
monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working
channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is
1625 nm).
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the

transmitted optical signal to the noise on the received signal.
OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. An instrument that measures

transmission characteristics by sending a short pulse of light down a fiber
and observing backscattered light.
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer. A device that multiplex or demultiplex

optical signals into a transmission link or into the client side.
OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the

accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM
wavelength.
Overhead Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic
signals. Orderwire, for example, would be considered overhead
information.

System
Path A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format
for the signal at the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the
standard frame format for the signal is disassembled.
PIN Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region

separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is
used in fiber-optic receivers.
Plesiochronous A network with nodes timed by separate clock sources with almost the
same timing.
Power and The power and environment monitoring unit is installed at the top of the
environment cabinet of the SDH equipment and is used to monitor the environment
monitoring unit variables, such as the power supply and temperature. With external signal
input through the relay, fire alarm, smoke alarm, burglary alarm, and so
on. can be monitored as well.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet,
which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
Receiver Receiver overload is the maximum acceptable value of the received

overload average power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10 -10 BER.
Receiver Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of

sensitivity average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10 -10 BER.
REG A device that performs regeneration.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the
amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained
within specified limits.
Ring network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one
to be a cycle.
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal.

It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-
point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19. 2
kbit/s.
SD Signal degrade.See signal degrade.
Settings Parameters of an operation that can be selected by the user.
SF Signal fail.See signal fail.
SFP Small form-factor pluggable. See small form-factor pluggable.
Signal cable The cable which is used to transmit electrical signals, different from the
power cable or fiber.

System
Simple network An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing systems and devices in
management a network. The data being monitored and managed is defined by a
protocol Management Information Base (MIB). The functions supported by the
protocol are the request and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data,
and traps that signal the occurrence of events.
SLIP Serial Line Interface Protocol. The protocol that defines the framing mode
over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial
line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known
IP address.
Small Form- A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. The
Factor Pluggable devices are designed for use with small form factor (SFF) connectors, and
offer high speed and physical compactness, and are hot-swappable. SFP
transceivers are expected to perform at data speeds of up to five gigabits
per second (5 Gbit/s), and possibly higher. Because SFP modules can be
easily interchanged, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can be
upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with
traditional soldered-in modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit
board containing several soldered-in modules, a single module can be
removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a
substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SuperWDM A technical solution can extend effectively the transmitting distance of

DWDM system with the application of Super CRZ encoding and the
advanced phase modulation capability.
Synchronous A network where transmission system payloads are synchronized to a

master (network) clock and traced to a reference clock.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Common name for the

suite of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwide
internet works.
Telecom The entity which provides the means used to transport and process
management information related to management functions for the telecommunications
network network.
TMN Telecommunications Management Network. The entity which provides

the means used to transport and process information related to
management functions for the telecommunications network.
Tray A discal component in the cabinet, which is used to place the chassis or
other equipment.
Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several
subracks.

System
User The user of the T2000 client, and the user and password define the
corresponding authority of operation and management of the T2000.
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator. An attenuator in which the attenuation can

be varied.
Wavelength A means of increasing the capacity of fiber-optic data transmission

division systems through the multiplexing of multiple wavelengths of light. WDM
multiplexing systems support the multiplexing of as many as four wavelengths.
WDM Wavelength-Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the

characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode
optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows
multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
XFP The 10-Gigabit Small Form-Factor Pluggable transceiver (XFP) is the 10

Gigabit pluggable optical module that combines transmitter and receiver
functions in one compact, flexible and low cost package format.

System
Hardware Description F Acronyms and Abbreviations
F Acronyms and Abbreviations
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AFEC Advanced Forward Error Correction
AGC Automatic Gain Control
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APE Automatic Power Equilibrium
ASE Amplified Spontaneous Emission
AWG Arrayed Waveguide Grating
BA Booster Amplifier
BER Bit Error Ratio
CLNS Connectionless Network Layer Service
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check
CRZ Chirped Return to Zero
CSES Continuous Severely Errored Second
Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential F-1

System
F Acronyms and Abbreviations Hardware Description
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network
DDN Digital Data Network
DFB Distributed Feedback
DRZ Differential Phase Return to Zero
DSP Digital Signal Processing
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EFEC Enhanced Forward Error Correction
ELH Extra Long Haul
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute
FEC Forward Error Correction
FIFO First In First Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FWM Four-Wave Mixing
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GUI Graphical User Interface
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
ITU-T Telecommunication Sector
F-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
LAN Local Area Network
LCN Local Communication Network
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LD Laser Diode
MCF Message Communication Function
MD Mediation Device
MPI-R Main Path Interface at the Receiver
MPI-S Main Path Interface at the Transmitter
MQW Multi Quantum Well
NE Network Element
NF Noise Figure
NRZ Non Return to Zero
OA Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OD Optical Demultiplexing
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OEQ Optical Equalizer
OHP Overhead Processing
OLA Optical Line Amplifier
OM Optical Multiplexing
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
ORL Optical Return Loss
OS Operations System
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel

System
F Acronyms and Abbreviations Hardware Description
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
OTS Optical Transmission Section
OTU Optical Transponder Unit
OTUk Optical Channel Transport Unit(G.709)
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDL Polarization Dependent Loss
PIN Positive Intrinsic Negative
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
PON Passive Optical Network
POS Packet Over SDH/SONET
QA Q Adaptation
RS Reed-Solomon
SAN Storage Area Network
SBS Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
SCC System Control & Communication
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SPM Self Phase Modulation
SRS Stimulated Raman Scattering
F-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

System
STM Synchronous Transport Module
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TEC Thermoelectric Cool
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
UAT Unavailable Time
XPM Cross Phase Modulation
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex
WS Work Station


00482828-Hardware Description (V100R007 08)

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

00482828-Hardware Description (V100R007 08)

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

4 Independent OLA Subrack......................................................................................................4-1

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

7 Overview of Boards................................................................................................................... 7-1

8 Optical Transponder Board......................................................................................................8-1

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-34

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

8.7.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-85

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

8.11.8 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................8-138

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

8.24.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................8-272

9 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board....................................................................9-1

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

9.1.5 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 9-5

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

9.5.7 Bar Code...............................................................................................................................................9-53

10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board......................................................................10-1

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

11 Optical Amplifier Board.......................................................................................................11-1

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................11-12

12 System Control, Supervision and Communication Board.............................................12-1

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

12.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers.................................................................................................................12-5

13 Optical Supervisory Channel and Timing Transmission Board..................................13-1

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

14.1.8 DCP Board Specifications..................................................................................................................14-9

15 Spectrum Analyzer Board.....................................................................................................15-1

16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board................................................16-1

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

17 Variable Optical Attenuator Board.....................................................................................17-1

18 Optical Fiber Automatic Monitoring Board......................................................................18-1

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

18.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................18-10

xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

19.6.3 Alarm Interface Cable......................................................................................................................19-36

B Bar Codes of Each Board..........................................................................................................B-1

C Quick Reference Table of the Boards...................................................................................C-1

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

C.2 Optical Amplifier Unit Specification.............................................................................................................C-7

D Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards............................................................D-1

xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 08 (2011-10-30)

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX BWS 1600G V100R007

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R008C00

l Network Planning Engineer

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Issue 08 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement